programme : b.e. - sathyabama university · 2018-05-17 · sathyabama institute of science and...

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech REGULAR REGULATIONS 2015

PROGRAMME : B.E.

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 1

COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

THEORY

1. SHS1101 English for Science and Technology 3 0 0 3 1

2. SMT1101 Engineering Mathematics - I 3 1 0 4 2

3. SPH 1101 Physics of Engineering Materials 3 0 0 3 10

4. SCY1101 Engineering Chemistry - I 3 0 0 3 15

5. SCH 1101 Environmental Science and Engineering 3 0 0 3 20

6. SEC1101 Electronic Devices 3 0 0 3 30

PRACTICAL

7. SPH4051 Engineering Physics Lab 0 0 2 1 105

8. SCY4051 Engineering Chemistry Lab 0 0 2 1 105

9. SEC4051 Electronic Devices Lab 0 0 4 2 109

TOTAL CREDITS 23

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 2


THEORY

1. SMT1105 Engineering Mathematics - II 3 1 0 4 3

2. SPH1102 / Physics of Electronic Devices / 3 0 0 3 12

SPH 1103 / Engineering Physics / 3 0 0 3 13

SPH 1104 Applied Biophysics 3 0 0 3 14

3. SCY1102 / Chemistry of Electronic Materials / 3 0 0 3 16

SCY1103 / Chemistry of Industrial Materials / 3 0 0 3 17

SCY1104 / Bio Organic Chemistry / 3 0 0 3 18

SCY1105 Physical Chemistry 3 0 0 3 19

4. SEC1207 Digital Logic circuits 3 0 0 3 37

5. SEE1107 Electrical Circuits and Networks 3 1 0 4 67

6. SCS1102 Fundamentals of Programming 3 0 0 3 22

PRACTICAL

SEC4055 Circuits and Networks Lab 0 0 4 2 111 7.

8. SCS4101 Programming in C Lab 0 0 4 2 105

TOTAL CREDITS 24

L - LECTURE HOURS, T – TUTORIAL HOURS, P – PRACTICAL HOURS, C – CREDITS


SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 3


THEORY

1. SMT1201 Engineering Mathematics - III 3 1 0 4 4

2. SEE1105 Electrical Technology 3 0 0 3 65

3. SIC1203 Measurements and Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 88

4. SEC1208 Signals and Systems 3 0 0 3 38

5. SEC1213 Probability Theory and Random process 3 1 0 4 41

6. SEC1205 Electronic Circuits - I 3 0 0 3 35

PRACTICAL

7. SEC4058 Electronic Circuits – I Lab 0 0 4 2 113

8. SEE4051 Electrical Engineering Lab 0 0 4 2 127

TOTAL CREDITS

24

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

S E M E S T E R 4


THEORY 1. SMT1204 / Engineering Mathematics – IV / 3 1 0 4 5

SMT1206 / Number Theory and Linear Algebra / 3 1 0 4 6

SMT1207 / Graph Theory / 3 1 0 4 7

SMT1208 / Applied Statistics / 3 1 0 4 8

SMT1209 Foundations of Mathematics 3 1 0 4 9

2. SEC1206 Electronic Circuits – II 3 0 0 3 36

3. SCS1202 Object Oriented Programming 3 0 0 3 23

4. SEE1202 Electromagnetic Theory 3 0 0 3 70

5. SEC1210 Transmission Lines and Waveguides 3 0 0 3 40

6. SEC1209 Analog Communications 3 0 0 3 39

PRACTICAL

SCS4201 Object Oriented Programming Lab 0 0 4 2 106 7.

8. SEC4059 Electronic Circuits Lab II 0 0 4 2 113

9. S13PT1 Professional Training – 1 0 0 0 5

TOTAL CREDITS 28




Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 5


THEORY

1. SCS1315 Computer Architecture and Operating Systems 3 0 0 3 24

2. SEC1314 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4 52

3. SEC1 301 Antennas and Wave Propagation 3 0 0 3 42

4. SEE1203 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 71

5. SEC1302 Analog Integrated Circuits 3 0 0 3 43

6. SEC1303 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3 44

PRACTICAL

7. SEC4062 Analog Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 4 2 115

8. SEC4065 Digital Signal Processing Lab 0 0 4 2 116

TOTAL CREDITS

24

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 6


THEORY

1. SEC1321 Telecommunication Systems and Services 3 0 0 3 58

2. SEC1201 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers 3 0 0 3 31

3. SEC1313 Digital Communications 3 0 0 3 51

4. SEC1316 CMOS VLSI Design 3 0 0 3 54

5. SEC1320 Embedded Systems 3 0 0 3 57

6. Elective – 1 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

SEC4067 Microprocessor and Microcontroller Lab 0 0 4 2 117 7.

8. SEC4063 Communication Engineering Lab 0 0 4 2 115

9. S13PT2 Professional Training – 2 2 0 0 0 5

TOTAL CREDITS 27




Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 7


THEORY

1. SEC1402 Programming in HDL 3 0 0 3 60

2. SEC1403 Optical Communications 3 0 0 3 61

3. Elective – 2 3 0 0 3

4. Elective – 3 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

SEC4072 Hardware Description Language Lab 0 0 4 2 120 5.

6. SEC4074 Microwave and Optical Lab 0 0 4 2 121

7. Project Work (Phase 1)

TOTAL CREDITS 16

Sl. No. COURSE CODE

SEMESTER 8


THEORY

1. SEC1405 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 0 0 3 63

2. SBA1101 Principles of Management and Professional Ethics 3 0 0 3 28

3. Elective – 4 3 0 0 3

PRACTICAL

S13PROJ Project Work (Phase 1 & 2) 0 0 30 15

4.

TOTAL CREDITS 24

TOTAL CREDITS FOR THE PROGRAM 190

ELECTIVE COURSES (GROUP A)

Sl. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEC1306 Data Communication and Networking 3 0 0 3 46

2. SEC1307 Embedded Processors 3 0 0 3 47

3. SEC1311 Satellite Communications 3 0 0 3 50

4. SEC1404 Wireless Communications 3 0 0 3 62

5. SEC1322 Cryptography and Network Security 3 0 0 3 59

6. SEC1601 Advanced Microprocessors 3 0 0 3 136

7. SEC1603 Automatic Speech Recognition 3 0 0 3 138

8. SEC1616 Pattern Recognition and Image Vision 3 0 0 3 150

9. SEC1617 Advanced Electronic Test Engineering 3 0 0 3 151

10. SEC1618 Programming in MATLAB 3 0 0 3 152

11. SIC1311 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 98



ELECTIVE COURSES ( GROUP B)

Sl. No. COURSE CODE COURSE TITLE L T P C PAGE No.

1. SEC1605 Digital Image and Multimedia Processing 3 0 0 3 140

2. SEC1609 Fundamentals of Fuzzy Logic and Artificial Neural Networks 3 0 0 3 143

3. SEC1611 Integrated Services Digital Network 3 0 0 3 145

4. SEC1612 MEMS and its Applications 3 0 0 3 146

5. SEC1613 Mobile Adhoc Networks 3 0 0 3 147

6. SEC1614 Mobile Communications 3 0 0 3 148

7. SEC1615 Nanoelectronics 3 0 0 3 149

8. SEC1619 Radar and Navigational Aids 3 0 0 3 153

9. SEC1621 Spread Spectrum Communications 3 0 0 3 155

10. SEE1305 Power Electronics 3 0 0 3 79

11. SIC1310 Theory of Robotics 3 0 0 3 97

12. SIC1605 Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 169

SATHYABAMA INSTITUTE OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS FACULTY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS

B.E. / B. Tech REGULAR 1 REGULATIONS 2015

SHS1101 ENGLISH FOR SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL Branches of B.E/B.Tech) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To equip the learners with English communicative skills to handle the present and future needs by exposing them

to situations and tasks in the areas of LSRW, genre and register related to EST by following content based teaching.

UNIT 1 BASIC COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. Listening for specific information, Self Introduction, Reading Comprehension, Kinds of Sentences, Parts of Speech, Tenses & its Types, Impersonal Passive, Elements of Effective Writing, Letter Writing, Concord, Prefixes & Suffixes

UNIT 2 NUANCES OF EST 9 Hrs. Listening for inference, Describing a process, Cloze Reading and its types, Transcoding - Encoding & Decoding,

Flow Chart, Bar chart, Pie Chart, Tabular Column, Tree Diagram, Technical Definitions, Connectives & Discourse Markers, Word Association- connotations

UNIT 3 EST NOW AND THEN 9 Hrs. Listening and Note taking, Role-play, Reading and interpreting visual material (pictures/newspapers) Essay Writing - Note Making - WH questions - Question Tags - Types of sentences - Compound Nouns, Technical Definitions.

UNIT 4 APPLICATIONS OF EST 9 Hrs. Listening and Classifying information, Group discussion, Reading and identifying the topic sentence, - Writing a

Project Proposal, Recommendations and Instructions - Manual Writing, Use of abbreviations and acronyms, Editing (Spelling, Grammar, Punctuation) Idioms & Phrases.

UNIT 5 PREPARING FOR FUTURE 9 Hrs. Listening and summarizing, Making presentations on given topics - Giving impromptu talks Reading and

Summarizing, E-mail writing, Rearranging the Jumbled sentences Reported Speech, Homophones/Homonyms, Creative Writing & Poster making using similes/metaphors.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sangeetha Sharma & Meenakshi Raman, Technical Communication: Principles and Practice. Oxford University Press,

New Delhi, 2011. 2. Sanjay Kumar & Pushp Lata, Communication Skills, 2 n d Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2011. 3. Nira Konar, Communication Skills for Professionals, PHI Publishers, Eastern Economy Edition, New Delhi, 2011. 4. Sharon J Gerson & Steven M Gerson, Technical Communication: Process and Product, 8 th Edition, Orient Longman, 2013. 5. Tyagi Kavita and Misra Padma, Basic Technical Communication PHI Publishers, Eastern Economy Edition, New Delhi, 2011. 6. Nagini,P S et al. Excellence Through communication, Shri Jai Publications, Chennai, 2005.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice; with equal distribution to each unit -(10 x 2) 20 Marks

(Task types can include Multiple choice, open ended, gap filling, completion and rewriting the sentences, matching type etc.)

PART B : 2 questions from each unit with internal choice; each carrying 16 marks (5 X 10) 80 Marks (Questions types should testing vocabulary, grammar, reading and writing with equal distribution to all. For example Reading Comprehension type can include skimming,

scanning, comprehensive with evaluative, inferential and hypothetical question/ fixed type questions or cloze exercise , Academic paragraph writing based on Flow chart, Tree

diagram, Bar diagram, Table and Pie chart to describe process, comparative and contrast, differentiate , Formal letter writing - Application for a Job & Resume Preparation/ Email- Letter inviting a dignitary-Accepting/Declining (or) Rearranging the jumbled sentences in

the right order, (or) Requesting for Practical Training/ Letter to the Editor. Writing a Project Proposal / Project Report (or) Essay Writing- Writing an Essay on a given topic, Summary

writing or Making notes in the standard format with title. Grammar Rearranging the jumbled sentences in the right order or editing the paragraph for errors based on syllabus)



SMT1101 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - I L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL branches except BIO Groups) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The ability to identify, reflect upon, evaluate and apply different types of information and knowledge to form independent judgments. Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning this subject.

UNIT 1 MATRICES 12 Hrs.

Characteristic equation of a square matrix - Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix- properties of Eigen values- Cayley-Hamilton theorem (without proof) - verification , finding inverse and power of a matrix - Diagonalisation of a matrix using orthogonal transformation - Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form by orthogonal transformation.

UNIT 2 GEOMETRICAL APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 13 Hrs. Curvature -centre, radius and circle of curvature in Cartesian co- ordinates - Evolutes - Envelope of family of curves with one and two parameters. - Evolute as envelope of normals.

UNIT 3 FUNCTIONS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 11 Hrs. Introduction to partial derivatives - Jacobians - Taylor’s expansion - Maxima and minima of functions of two variables - Constrained maxima and minima using Lagrange ’s multiplier method.

UNIT 4 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 11 Hrs.

First order exact differential equations - Second order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Particular Integral for eax, sinax or cosax, xn, xneax, eaxsinbx or eaxcosbx - Equations reducible to linear equations with constant co-efficients using x = e t - Simultaneous first order linear equations with constant coefficients - Method of Variation of Parameters

UNIT 5 THREE DIMENSIONAL ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY 13 Hrs.

Direction cosines and ratios - Plane - Plane through intersection of two planes - Straight Line - Coplanar lines - Planes and Straight lines - Shortest distance between two Skew lines - Sphere -Plane section of a sphere - Great Circle.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Veerarajan T, Engineering Mathematics for First Year, II Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers, 2008.

2. Kandaswamy P & co., Engineering Mathematics for First Year, IX revised edition, S.Chand & Co Pub., 2010.

3. Moorthy M.B.K, Senthilvadivu K ,Engineering mathematics-I, Revised Edition, VRB Pub., 2010,

4. Arumugam S & co. Engineering Mathematics Vol-I , Revised Edition, SciTech Pub., 2010

5. Venkataraman M.K., Engineering Mathematics - First Year (2nd edition), National Publishing Co., 2000.

6. Kreyszig. E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10 th edition, John Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 2012.

7. Grewal B. S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 41 t h Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,201 1.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SMT1105 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - II L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL branches except BIO Groups) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning this subject.

UNIT 1 MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 13 Hrs.

Double integrals in Cartesian and polar co-ordinates - Change the order of integration - Change of variables from Cartesian to polar coordinates- Area of plane curves using double integrals- Triple integrals - Volume using triple integrals in Cartesian co-ordinates (simple applications).

UNIT 2 BETA AND GAMMA INTEGRALS 11 Hrs.

Properties of definite Integrals and problems - Beta and Gamma integrals - Relation between them - Properties of Beta and Gamma integrals with proofs - Evaluation of definite integrals in terms of Beta and Gamma function - Simple applications (evaluation of double integrals).

UNIT 3 VECTOR CALCULUS 12 Hrs.

Gradient, divergence and curl - Directional derivative - Irrotational and Solenoidal vector fields - Vector Integration - Simple problems on line, surface and volume Integrals, Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stoke ’s theorem (without proofs)- Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopipeds.

UNIT 4 LAPLACE TRANSFORMS 14 Hrs.

Laplace transform - Transforms of standard functions - properties- Transforms of derivatives and integrals - Transforms of the type eatf(t), tf(t), f(t)/t - Transform of periodic functions - Transform of unit step function and impulse function - Inverse Laplace transforms - Convolution theorem - Initial and final value theorems

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF LAPLACE TRANSFORM 10 Hrs. Llinear ordinary differential equation with constant co-efficients - Integral equations - Integral equations of convolution type -simultaneous linear differential equations with constant co-efficients.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Kreyszig. E, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 10 th edition, John Wiley & Sons, Singapore, 2012.

2. Grewal B. S, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 41 t h Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,201 1.

3. Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, A Text book of Engineering Mathematics, Eigth Edition, Laxmi Publications Pvt Ltd., 2011.

4. Venkatraman M.K, Engineering Mathematics, National Publishing Company, 2000.

5. NarayananS., Manicavachagom Pillay T.K., and Ramanaiah G., Advanced Mathematics for Engineering students, Volume I, 2n d Edition, S. Viswanathan Printers and Publishers, 1992.






SMT1201 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - III L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL Branches except BIO Groups, CSE and IT) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE


UNIT 1 COMPLEX VARIABLES 11 Hrs. Analytic functions - Cauchy- Riemann equations in cartesian and polar form - Harmonic functions - properties of analytic functions - Construction of analytic functions using Milne - Thompson method - Bilinear transformation.

UNIT 2 COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12 Hrs. Cauchy’s integral theorem - Cauchy’s integral formula - problems - Taylor’s and Laurent’s series - Singularities - Poles and Residues - Cauchy’s residue theorem and problems.

UNIT 3 FOURIER TRANSFORMS 12 Hrs. The infinite Fourier transform - Sine and Cosine transform - Properties - Inversion theorem - Convolution theorem - Parseval’s identity - Finite Fourier sine and cosine transform.

UNIT 4 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 13 Hrs. Formation of equations by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions - Solutions of PDE - general, particular and complete integrals - Solutions of First order Linear PDE ( Lagrange’s linear equation ) - Solution of Linear Homogeneous PDE of higher order with constant coefficients.

UNIT 5 THEORY OF SAMPLING AND TESTING OF HYPOTHESIS 12 Hrs. Test of Hypothesis - test of significance - Large samples - Z test - single proportion - difference of proportions - Single mean - difference of means - Small samples - Student‘s t test - single mean - difference of means -Test of variance - Fisher’s test - Chi square test - goodness of fit - independence of attributes.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics (8 th Edition), John Wiley and Sons (Asia)Pvt. Ltd., Singapore, 2001.

2. Grewal,B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1999.

3. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics, (4th Revised Edition), S.Chand&Co., New Delhi, 2001.

4. Veerarajan,T., Engineering Mathematics Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., NewDelhi, 1999.

5. S.C. Gupta, V.K. Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics, S.Chand & Company, 2012.






SMT1204 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - IV L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL branches except BIO Groups, CSE & IT) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE


UNIT 1 FOURIER SERIES 13 Hrs.

Definition- Dirichlets conditions- coefficients- Fourier series for the function defined in [c, c+2π],[c, c+2l] - Parseval’s identity ( without proof) - Half range cosine series and sine series of f(x) defined in [0,π],[0,l] - simple problems - Harmonic Analysis.

UNIT 2 APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 13 Hrs.

One dimensional wave equation - Transverse vibrating of finite elastic string with fixed ends- Boundary and initial value problems - Fourier solution - one dimensional heat equation - steady state problems with zero boundary conditions- Two dimensional heat equation - steady state heat flow in two dimensions- Laplace equation in Cartesian form( No derivations required).

UNIT 3 ALGEBRAIC AND TRANSCENDENTAL EQUATIONS 11 Hrs. Solution of Algebraic equation by Regula Falsi Method , Newton Raphson Method - Solution of simultaneous linear algebraic equations - Gauss Elimination Method , Gauss Jacobi & Gauss Seidel Method.

UNIT 4 INTERPOLATION , NUMERICAL DIFFERENTATION & INTEGRATION 11 Hrs.

Interpolation- Newton forward and backward interpolation formula- Lagranges formula for unequal intervals-Numerical differentiation- Newton’s forward and backward differences to compute first and second derivatives-Numerical integration - Trapezoidal rule - Simpson’s one third rule and three eighth rule.

UNIT 5 NUMERICAL SOLUTIONS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS AND PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12 Hrs.

Ordinary differential equations - Taylor series method - Runge Kutta method for fourth order- Partial differential equations - Finite differences - Laplace equation and its solutions by Liebmann’s process- Solution of Poisson equation - Solutions of parabolic equations by Bender Schmidt Method - Solution of hyperbolic equations.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Kreyszig, E., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, (8 th Edition), John Wiley and Sons (Asia)Pte Ltd., Singapore,

2001.

2. Grewal,B.S., Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 1999.

3. Kandasamy, P., Thilagavathy, K., and Gunavathy, K., Engineering Mathematics, (4th Revised Edition), S.Chand&Co., New Delhi, 2001.

4. Veerarajan,T., Engineering Mathematics, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Co., NewDelhi, 1999






SMT1206 NUMBER THEORY AND LINEAR ALGEBRA L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL branches) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE The ability to identify, reflect upon, evaluate and apply different types of information and knowledge to form

independent judgments. Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning this subject.

UNIT 1 NUMBER THEORY - I 12 Hrs.

Divisibility theory in the integers - the division algorithm, the greatest common divisor, the Euclidean algorithm, the Diophantine equation ax + by = c. Primes and their distribution. The fundamental theorem of arithmetic. The sieve of Eratosthenes. The theory of congruences. Basic properties of congruence. Binary and decimal representation of integers. Linear congruences and Chinese remainder theorem.

(Sections 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.1, 3.2, 4.2, 4.3 & 4.4 of Text 1).

UNIT 2 NUMBER THEORY - II 12 Hrs.

Fermat's little theorem and pseudoprimes Wilson's theorem. The sum and number of divisors. The greatest integer function. Euler's phi-function. Euler's generalization of Fermat's theorem. Properties of the phi-function. (Sections 5.2, 5.3, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 of Text 1) (Theorems 7.6 and 7.7 only).

UNIT 3 MATRIX THEORY - I 12 Hrs. Rank of a matrix - Elementary transformation, reduction to normal form, row reduced echelon form. Computing the inverse of a non singular matrix using elementary row transformation. (Section 4.1 to 4.13 of Text 2)

UNIT 4 MATRIX THEORY - II 12 Hrs.

System of linear homogeneous equations. Null space and nullity of matrix. Sylvester's law of nullity. Range of a matrix. Systems of linear non homogeneous equations. Characteristic roots and characteristic vectors of a square matrix.

UNIT 5 FUNDAMENTAL THEOREMS ON MATRIX THEORY 12 Hrs. Some fundamental theorem. Characteristic roots of Hermitian, Skew Hermitian and Unitary matrices. Characteristic equation of a matrix Cayley-Hamilton theorem.(Sections 6.1 to 6.6 and 11.1 to 11.3 and 11.11).

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. David M. Burton : Elementary Number Theory, Sixth Edn., TMH.

2. Shanti Narayanan & Mittal : A Text Book of Matrices, Revised edn., S. Chand.

3. C.Y. Hsiung : Elementary Theory of Numbers. Allied Publishers.

4. Neville Robbins : Beginning Number Theory, Second Ed. Narosa. 5. George E. Andrews : Number Theory, HPC.

6. Kenneth Hoffman & Ray Kunze : Linear Algebra, Pearson Education.






SMT1207 GRAPH THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVE

The ability to assess and interpret complex situations in mathematical methods of solution is the main objective of this subject.

UNIT 1 GRAPHS AND CONNECTIVITY 12 Hrs.

Isomorphic graphs, Ramsey numbers, Independent sets and Coverings, Intersection graphs and line graphs, Operation on graphs, Walks, Trials and Paths, Connected components, Blocks, Connectivity sections 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.9, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4.

UNIT 2 EULER TOURS AND HAMILTON CYCLES 12 Hrs. Eulerian and Hamiltanian graphs (omit Fleury's Algorithm) Trees

Sections : 5.0, 5.1, 5.2 (only upto and not including Theorem 5.5), 6.0, 6.1, 6.2.

UNIT 3 MATCHING AND PLANAR GRAPHS 12 Hrs. Matchings and Planarity Sections 7.0, 7.1, 7.2, 8.0, 8.1, 8.2

UNIT 4 GRAPH COLOURING 12 Hrs. Colourability, Chromatic numbers, Five colour theorem.

UNIT 5 DIRECTED GRAPHS 12 Hrs. Chromatic polynomials,Directed graphs, Paths and Connectedness. Sections: 9.0, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4, 10.0, 1 0.1, 10.2.

Max. 60 Hours


1. S. Arumugam & S. Ramachandran, “ Invitation to Graph Theory”, Scitech Publications, Chennai -17.

2. R.J. Wilson, “Introduction to Graph Theory”, 4th ed., LPE, Pearson Education.

3. J.A. Bondy & U.S.R. Murty, “Graph Theory with Applications”.

4. J. Clark & D.A. Holton, “A First Look at Graph Theory”, Allied Publishers.

5. N. Deo, “Graph Theory with Application to Engineering and Computer Science”, PHI.






SMT1208 APPLIED STATISTICS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVE Analytical, logical thinking and conclusions based on quantitative information will be the main objective of learning

this subject.

UNIT 1 DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS 12 Hrs. Univariate data : Skewness and kurtosis- Pearson's and Bowley's coefficient of skewness- moment measures of skewness and kurtosis.

UNIT 2 CORRELATION AND REGRESSION ANALYSIS 14 Hrs.

Analysis bi-variate data: Curve fitting-fitting of straight lines,parabola,power curve and exponential curve. Correlation- Pearson's correlation coefficient and rank correlation coefficient - partial and multiple correlation-formula for calculation in 3 variable cases-Testing the significance of observed simple correlation coefficient. Regression-simple linear regression,the two regression lines, regression coefficients and their properties.

UNIT 3 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS 10 Hrs. Time series:Components of time series-measurement of trend by fitting polynomials-computing moving averages-seasonal indices-simple average-ratio to moving average.

UNIT 4 STATISTICAL QUALITY CONTROL 12 Hrs.

Statistical Quality control: Concept of statistical quality control,assignable and chance causes,process control. Construction of control charts,3 sigma limits. Control chart for variables-X-bar chart and R chart. Control chart for attributes -p chart, d chart and c chart.

UNIT 5 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS 12 Hrs. Analysis of variance : One way and two wayclassifications. Null hypotheses , total, between and within sum of squares. Assumptions-ANNOVATable.

Max. 60 Hours


1. Veerarajan. T., “Probability, Statistics and Random Processes”, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi.

2. Goon A.M ,Gupta M.K.& Das Gupta:Fundementals of Statistics .Vol.I The World Press,Calcutta 3. S.C.Gupta & V.K.Kapoor:Fundementals of Applied Statistics Sultan Chand & Sons

4. S.P.Gupta:Statistical Methods, Sultan Chand, New Delhi.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SMT1209 FOUNDATIONS OF MATHEMATICS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVE Understand the basic rules of logic, including the role of axioms or assumptions and appreciate the role of

mathematical proof in formal deductive reasoning and able to distinguish a coherent argument from a fallacious one, both in mathematical reasoning and in everyday life.

UNIT 1 SET THEORY - I 13 Hrs. Pre-requisites: Sets, subsets, Set operations and the laws of set theory and Venn diagrams. Examples of finite and

infinite sets. Finite sets and the counting principle. Empty set, properties of empty set. Standard set operations. Classes of sets. Power set of a set (Quick review). Cartesian product of two and more sets, relations. Difference and Symmetric difference of two sets. Set identities, Generalized union and intersections (As in section 1.7 of Text book 1).

UNIT 2 SET THEORY - II 12 Hrs. Relations: Product set, Relations (Directed graph of relations on set is omitted). Composition of relations, Types of

relations, Partitions, Equivalence relations with example of congruence modulo relation, Partial ordering relations, n-ary relations. (As in Chapter 3 of text book 2 excluding 3.7).

UNIT 3 TYPES OF FUNCTION 13 Hrs. Functions Pre-requisites: Basic ideas such as domain, co-domain and range of functions. Equality of functions,

Injection, Surjection and Bijection (Quick review). Syllabus: Identity function, constant functions, product (composition) of functions, theorems on one-one and onto functions, Mathematical functions, Recursively defined functions (As in Chapter 4 of text book 2). Indexed collection of sets, Operations on indexed collection of sets (As in 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of text book 2). Special kinds of functions, Associated functions, Algorithms and functions, Complexity of Algorithms (As in Chapter 5.7 of text book 2). Equipotent sets, Denumerable and countable sets, Cardinal numbers (Definitions and examples only as in 6.1, 6.2, 6.3 and 6.5 of text book 2).

UNIT 4 BASIC LOGIC - I 11 Hrs. Basic Logic-1 Introduction, propositions, truth table, negation, conjunction and disjunction. Implications,

biconditional propositions, converse, contra positive and inverse propositions and precedence of logical operators. Propositional equivalence: Logical equivalences. Predicates and quantifiers: Introduction, Quantifiers, Binding variables and Negations. (As in Chapter 1 of Text book 1).

UNIT 5 BASIC LOGIC - II 11 Hrs. Basic Logic-2 Methods of proof: Rules of inference, valid arguments, methods of proving theorems; direct proof,

proof by contradiction, proof by cases, proofs by equivalence, existence proofs, uniqueness proofs and counter examples. (As in Chapter 1 of Text book 1).

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. K.H. Rosen, “Discrete Mathematics and its Applications” (fifth edition), Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi. 2. S. Lipschutz, “Set Theory and related topics” (Second Edition), Schaum Outline Series, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company, New Delhi. 3. P.R. Halmos, “Naive Set Theory”, Springer. 4. E. Kamke, “Theory of Sets”, Dover Publishers.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SPH1101 PHYSICS OF ENGINEERING MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to ALL Branches of B.E/ B. Tech.) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To expose the students to different classes of materials and present the fundamentals of materials science; to

develop the understanding of the behaviour of materials, their properties and structures; to facilitate selection of suitable material for particular engineering application.

UNIT 1 CHARACTERIZATION OF MATERIALS 9 Hrs. Introduction, Structural characterization - X-ray diffraction, Bragg’s law, Determination of crystal structure -

powder X-ray diffractometer (Debye Scherrer camera) and Single crystal XRD with principle, construction and working, Microstructural characterization - Introduction, electromagnetic lens system, Determination of surface morphology by Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM), Transmission Electron Microscope (TEM) and Atomic Force Microscope (AFM) with principle, construction and working. Microhardness testing -Determination of microhardness by Vickers hardness test, Knoop hardness test and Nanohardness test with principle, construction, and working.

UNIT 2 MAGNETIC MATERIALS 9 Hrs.

Introduction, Origin of magnetic moment - orbital, spin and nuclear magnetic moments; Bohr magneton; Classification of magnetic materials based on spin- dia, para, ferro, antiferro and ferri- Curie temperature, Neel temperature.; Magnetic domains- Domain theory of Ferro magnetism (Weiss theory) - Observation of domain (bitter powder pattern), Energies involved in domain formation - magnetostatic energy, anisotropic energy, magnetostrictive energy and domain wall energy; Hysteresis Curve -based on domain theory; Types of magnetic materials - soft and hard magnetic materials; Magnetic bubbles - formation and propagation of magnetic bubbles-T-bar, read/write operation.

UNIT 3 SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 9 Hrs.

Introduction to superconductivity- Properties of superconductor - electrical resistance, Meissner Effect, effect of heavy magnetic field, effect of heavy current (Silsbee’s rule), effect of high pressure , isotope effect, entropy, specific heat capacity, energy gap, London Penetration depth, Coherence Length, Ginzburg Landau Parameter, Flux Quantization and thermal conductivity. Theory of superconductivity - London Theory (Macroscopic), Bardeen, Cooper and Schrieffer Theory (Microscopic) - explanation based on formation of Cooper pairs and existence of energy gap. Types of superconductors - Type I and Type II superconductors, D.C. and A.C Josephson Effect, I-V Characteristics and applications of Josephson junction. Applications - cryotron, magnetic levitation train and SQUIDS.

UNIT 4 OPTICAL MATERIALS 9 Hrs.

Introduction, refractive index, absorption and dispersion, reflections. Classification of optical materials, absorption in metals, semiconductors and insulators (dielectrics), Excitons- Frenkel and Mott-Wannier excitons, Point detects -Frankel and Schottky defects, Traps - trapping and recombination centres - Colour Centres - types - F - Centre, R-Centre, V-Centre (V1 and V2), M -Centre. Luminescence - Principle and classification - Mechanism and working of Photo luminescence (Fluorescence and Phosphorescence).

UNIT 5 SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Band theory (qualitative), types of semiconductors- intrinsic semiconductor - carrier concentration and Fermi level in intrinsic semiconductor - extrinsic semiconductor - carrier concentration and Fermi level in extrinsic semiconductor (p type and n type) - Experimental determination Band gap of semiconductor -Hall Effect - experimental determination of Hall Voltage, Applications of Hall effect.

Max. 45 Hours




1. Willam D Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an introduction, 6 th Edition, john-Wiley and Sons, 2004.

2. Avadhanulu M.N.and Kshirsagar P.G., Engineering Physics, 2n d Edition, S.Chand and Company, 2007.

3. Rajendran.V, Marikani.A, Materials Science, 8 th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

4. Sankar B.N. and Pillai S.O, A text book of Engineering Physics, 1 st Edition, New Age international Publishers, 2007.

5. Arumugam.M, Semiconductor Physics and Optoelectronics, 1st Edition, Anuradha Publishers, 2003.

6. Wilson.J and Hawkes. J.F.B., Optoelectronics - An introduction, 2nd Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2001.

7. Gaur. R.K and Gupta. S.L., Engineering Physics, 8th Edition, Dhanbat Rai Publications, 2007.

8. Cullity B.D., Principles of X-ray diffraction, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, 2001.

9. Mott.W, Micro indentation Hardness Testing, Butterworth Scientific publication, London, 1965.



PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice; 2 questions from each of the five units 20 Marks

PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Applications mentioned in the syllabus refer to the basic applications and not to any specific case.) (Maximum of 20 % problems may be asked.)



SPH1102 PHYSICS OF ELECTRONIC DEVICES L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide the students the fundamental knowledge in fibre optics, digital electronics and devices such as sensors

devices, display devices and nano-devices to enable understanding of its applications.

UNIT 1 FIBRE OPTICS 9 Hrs. Introduction - principle of optical fibre transmission- fibre geometry - acceptance angle and numerical aperture -

derivation, types of rays - Types of optical fibres -.Optical fibre materials - plastic and glass fibres- Manufacturing processes - Double crucible technique and vapour phase deposition technique. Transmission characteristics of optical fibres - attenuation and distortion. Fibre splicing - fusion and mechanical splicing. Fibre connectors - butt joint and expanded beam connectors. Optical fibre communication system (block diagram) - advantages and its general applications.

UNIT 2 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9 Hrs. Number systems - Binary, decimal, Hexadecimal and Octadecimal - Conversion from one number system to another.

Binary addition, Subtraction - Subtraction by 1’s & 2’s complement, BCD addition, Excess 3 code and gray code, ASCII code.

UNIT 3 SENSOR DEVICES 9 Hrs. Introduction - voltage and current sensors, Light Dependent Resistor (LDR), photodiode, strain gauges, thermistor,

pressure sensor - Bourdon tube, temperature sensor - thermocouple, magnetic sensor - Hall effect sensor, nanosensors and their applications.

UNIT 4 DISPLAY DEVICES 9 Hrs. Introduction, luminescence, electroluminescence, active display devices, cathode ray tube, light emitting diode, LED

materials, passive display devices, liquid crystal displays-working, comparison LED and LCD, plasma display, dynamic scattering display, Touch screen.

UNIT 5 NANO DEVICES 9 Hrs. Definition, Fabrication-Top down approach and bottom up approach. Nanomagnets - Particulate Nanomagnets,

Geometrical Nanomagnets, Magneto Resistance - Ordinary Magneto Resistance, Giant Magneto Resistance, Tunneling Magneto Resistance, Injection Laser - Quantum Cascade Laser - Optical Memories and Coulomb Blockade Devices.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gerd Keiser, Optical fibre communication, 4th Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2011. 2. John M. Senior, Optical fibre communications - Principle and Practice, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2006. 3. Franz J.H, Jain V.K, Optical communication - Components and Systems, 1st Edition, Narosa Publications, 2001. 4. Rajagopal.K, Text book of Engineering Physics, Part-I, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008 5. Leach, Malvino and Goutam Saha, Digital Principles and applications, 7th Edition, McGraw Hill, 2011. 6. William H. Gothman, Digital electronics - An introduction to theory and practice, 2nd Edition, PHL of India, 2007. 7. Rajendran.V,.Marikani.A, Materials Science, 8th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008. 8. Avadhanulu. M.N. and. Kshirsagar. P.G, Engineering Physics, 2nd Edition, S. Chand & Company, 2007. 9. Neubert H.K.P, On Teaching Sensor Technology, Royal Aircraft Establishment, Great Britain, 1971. 10. Cooper W.D. and Helfrick A.P, Electronic measurement and Techniques, Prentice hall, 3rd Revised Edition, 1985. 11. Wilson J and Hawkers J F B, Optoelectronics - An introduction, 2nd Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2001. 12. Bhattacharya. P, Semiconductor optoelectronic devices, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1996. 13. Pole. Jr. C.P and Owens, F.J., Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, 1st Edition, New York, 2003

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice; 2 questions from each of the five units. 20 Marks PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks

(Applications mentioned in the syllabus refer to the basic applications and not to any specific case.) (Maximum of 20 % problems may be asked.)



SPH1103 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide the students with fundamental knowledge in Cryogenics and Acoustics, Properties of Matter such as

Elasticity and Viscosity, and enable them to apply relevant principles to solve real world engineering problems.

UNIT 1 LOW TEMPERATURE PHYSICS 9 Hrs. Properties of cryogenic fluids- oxygen, nitrogen, helium and hydrogen - Joule Thomson effect - Porous plug

experiment -Production of low temperatures- adiabatic demagnetisation of a paramagnetic salt - Cascade process - Practical applications of low temperatures -Refrigeration and Air conditioning machines - Super fluidity and its applications ( elementary ideas only) UNIT 2 ELASTICITY 9 Hrs.

Introduction-stress and strain diagram -Hooke’s law- types of elasticity- Young’s modulus, Bulk modulus, Rigidity modulus. Poisson ratio - Twisting couple on a cylinder (wire) - torsional pendulum - determination of rigidity modulus. Bending of beams - expression for bending moment of a beam - expression for the depression of the cantilever loaded at the free end - uniform and non-uniform bending-theory and experiment- I form of girders. UNIT 3 VISCOSITY 9 Hrs.

Streamline and turbulent motion, coefficient of viscosity - equation of continuity, Euler’s equation, critical velocity, Reynolds’s number, Poiseuille’s equation for flow of a liquid through a capillary tube - Stoke’s law (statement only)- terminal velocity, Bernoulli’s theorem and applications, Lift of an Aeroplane, Atomizer, Venturi meter, filter pump and Pitot’s tube. UNIT 4 METAL ALLOYS 9 Hrs.

Introduction, classification of metal alloys-Ferrous and Non Ferrous Alloys, Ferrous Alloys- classification, composition, properties and applications; Synthesization of alloy steels-Electric Arc Furnace process (Heroult furnace), Non-Ferrous Alloys - Aluminium, Copper, Titanium, Magnesium alloys - composition, properties and applications, Shape Memory Alloys - Shape memory effect, mechanism, transformation temperature, types of SMA - one way and two way shape memory effect, General applications of SMA. UNIT 5 ACOUSTICS OF BUILDINGS 9 Hrs.

Introduction - musical sound and noise, characteristics of musical sound - pitch, loudness, quality - Weber-Fechner law, decibel scale, sound intensity level and sound pressure level. Sound absorption-OWU, sound absorption coefficient and its measurements - Reverberation - Reverberation time - Standard Reverberation time - Sabine’s formula to determine the Reverberation time (Jaegar method), Factors affecting the acoustics of a building and the remedies, Principles to be followed in the acoustical design of a good auditorium.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Mathur D.S, Heat and Thermodynamics, Reprint, S. Chand and Co. 2004. 2. Christian Enss and Siegfried Hunklinger, Low temperature Physics, 1st Edition, Springer, 2005. 3. Mathur D.S, Elements of Properties of Matter, Reprint, S.Chand and Co. 2005. 4. Srinivasan M.R, Physics for Engineers, 2nd Edition, New Age international Publishers, 2005. 5. Gaur. R.K. and Gupta. S.L., Engineering Physics, 8th Edition, Dhanbat Rai Publications, 2007. 6. Avadhanulu. M.N. and. Kshirsagar. P.G, Engineering Physics, 2nd Edition, S. Chand and Company, 2007. 7. Willam D Callister, Materials Science and Engineering an introduction, 6th Edition, john-Wiley and Sons, 2004. 8. Rajendran.V, Marikani A., Materials Science, 8th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008. 9. Rajagopal.K, Text book of Engineering Physics, Part-I, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008 10. Kinsler L.E, Frey A.R., Coppens A.B. and Sanders J.V., Fundamentals of Acoustics, 4th Edition, John-Wiley and sons, 2005.


PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice; 2 questions from each of the five units. 20 Marks

PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks (Applications mentioned in the syllabus refer to the basic applications and not to any specific case.) (Maximum of 20 % problems may be asked.)



SPH1104 APPLIED BIOPHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To expose the students of biology to some fundamental physics required for study of the measurements of physical

properties related to biological systems.

UNIT 1 PROPERTIES OF MATTER 9 Hrs.

Viscosity-Newton’s formula-coefficient of viscosity-Factors affecting viscosity-capillary flow method-Stokes method-Biological significance of viscosity-Surface tension-Kinetic theory of surface tension-Factors affecting surface tension-Capillary rise method-Drop weight method-Interfacial surface tension-Biological significance of surface tension.

UNIT 2 LASER PHYSICS 9 Hrs.

Absorption, spontaneous emission and stimulated emission-characteristics of laser light-Einstein’s A and B coefficients-principle of laser action-He-Ne laser-CO2 laser-Ruby laser-Nd-YAG Laser-semiconductor laser-applications of laser.

UNIT 3 MICROSCOPES 9 Hrs.

Characteristics of light-magnification-Compound microscope-Phase contrast microscope-interference microscope-ultraviolet microscope-Fluorescent microscope-electron microscope-Transmission Electron microscope-Scanning electron microscope-Uses.

UNIT 4 RADIATION BIOLOGY 9 Hrs.

Radioactivity-Natural radioactivity-induced radioactivity-Half life-mean life-Radioactive disintegration-units of radioactivity-GM counter-Proportional counter-Scintillation counter-uses of radio isotopes: diagnostic and therapeutic-archeological dating by C14 method-Biological effects of radiation.

UNIT 5 BIOLOGICAL TRANSDUCERS 9 Hrs. Bio-medical instrumentation-transducers-electrodes and bio amplifiers-physiological transducer-pressure transducer-temperature transducer-pulse sensors-respiration sensors-bio-chemical transducers.

Max. 45 Hours


1. M. A. Subramaniam, Biophysics-principles and techniques, MJP publishers, 2005 2. S. Armugam, Biomedical instrumentation, Anuratha Agencies, 2ndEd., 2006

3. J. Kumar, S. Moorthy Babu, S. Vasudevan, Engineering Physics, Vijay Nicole Imprints Pvt. Ltd, 2006

4. Vasantha Pattabhi, N. Gautham, Biophysics, Narosa Publishing House, 2002

5. Vatsala Piramal, Biophysics, Dominant Publishers and Distributors, 2006 6. D.S.Mathur, Properties of matter, S.Chand Publishing, 11thEd.2005

7. P. Narayanan, Essentials of Biophysics, New Age International, 2ndEd. 2007



PART A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No choice; 2 questions from each of the five units. 20 Marks

PART B : 2 questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks (Applications mentioned in the syllabus refer to the basic applications and not to any specific case.) (Maximum of 20 % problems may be asked)



SCY1101 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the properties and various synthetic methods for the preparation of nanomaterials and their applications. To know about the quality parameters of water and methods to estimate the toxic elements and softening methods. To give an overview about types of batteries and fuel cells, corrosion mechanisms and preventive methods. To have a basic idea about polymers and various moulding techniques.

UNIT 1 SYNTHESIS OF NANOMATERIALS 9 Hrs. Introduction: Nanomaterials: Definition - Classification based on dimensions - Size dependent properties. Types of

nanomaterials: Nanoparticles: Synthesis by chemical reduction method. Nanoporous materials: Synthesis by sol-gel method. Nanowires: Synthesis by VLS mechanism. Carbon Nanotubes (CNTs): Single walled and multi walled nanotubes - Mechanical and electrical properties of CNTs - Applications of CNTs - Synthesis of CNTs by electric arc discharge method and laser ablation method.

UNIT 2 WATER TECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Introduction: Water quality parameters - Contamination of water by arsenic, lead, fluoride, mercury and their

removal. Hardness: Types - Expression - Units. Estimation of hardness of water by EDTA method - Problems. Estimation of iron, calcium and magnesium: AAS method. Water softening: Zeolite process - Demineralization process. Desalination: Reverse osmosis - Electrodialysis.

UNIT 3 ELECTROCHEMICAL POWER SOURCES 9 Hrs. Electrochemistry: Galvanic cell - Electrochemical cell representation - EMF series and its significance. Batteries:

Terminology - Lead-acid accumulator - Nickel-cadmium batteries. Lithium batteries: Li/SOCl2 cell - Li/I2 cell - Lithium ion batteries. Fuel Cells: Hydrogen-oxygen fuel cells - Solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC).

UNIT 4 CORROSION SCIENCE 9 Hrs. Introduction: Definition. Types: Dry corrosion: Mechanism - Pilling-Bedworth rule - Wet Corrosion: Mechanism.

Types: Galvanic corrosion and differential aeration cell corrosion. Galvanic series and its significance. Factors influencing corrosion. Corrosion prevention: Material selection and design - Cathodic protection. Protective coatings: Paints - Constituents. Mechanism of drying of drying oils. UNIT 5 POLYMER CHEMISTRY 9 Hrs.

Introduction to polymers: Nomenclature - Functionality. Types of polymerization. Mechanism of polymerization: Free radical mechanism - Cationic mechanism - Anionic mechanism. Plastics: Types - Thermoplastics and thermosetting plastics. Properties: Strength - Crystalline and amorphous state - Average molecular weight - Polydispersity. Compounding of plastics. Moulding of plastics: Compression moulding - Injection moulding - Extrusion moulding- Introduction to conducting polymers.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jain P.C. and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 15th Edition Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., 2009. 2. Dara S.S., Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand & Co, 2008. 3. Sheik Mideen A., Engineering Chemistry (I & II),13th Edition, Shruthi Publishers, 2010. 4. Kuriakose J.C. and Rajaram J., Chemistry in Engineering and Technology". Vol.1 & 2, 5th reprint, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Company (P) Ltd., 2010. 5. Sharma B.K., Engineering Chemistry, 2n d Edition, Krishna Prakasam Media (P) Ltd., 2001. 6. Mars G Fontana, Corrosion Engineering, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 7. David Linden andThomas B Reddy, Handbook of Batteries, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2010.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks

(Out of 80 marks, maximum of 10% problems may be asked)



SCY1102 CHEMISTRY OF ELECTRONIC MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To know the nature of conducting polymer materials used in electronic industry and to understand the recent analytical techniques for their characterization. To give an idea on the application of computer science in chemistry and the importance of insulating materials in electrical and electronic industries.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS 9 Hrs. Introduction: Charge transport carriers: Soliton - Polaron and bipolaron. Conducting polymers: Polyacetylene -

Polyaniline. Applications of conducting polymers. Polymer Structures for LEDs: Polyphenylenes - Polythiophene. Photoresists for electronics. Molecular devices based on conducting polymers.

UNIT 2 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Absorption of radiation. UV-Visible spectrophotometer: Instrumentation - Applications. IR

spectrophotometer - Instrumentation - Applications. Thermal methods of analysis: Thermogravimetry (TGA) - Differential Thermal Analysis (DTA) - Differential Scanning Calorimetry (DSC). Sensors: Oxygen sensors - Glucose sensor. Cyclic Voltammetry for Redox systems.

UNIT 3 THIN FILM TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Introduction: Lithography. Thin-film deposition: Chemical vapour deposition - Physical vapour deposition: Pulsed

laser and atomic layer deposition. Epitaxy: Vapour phase epitaxy - Liquid phase epitaxy - Molecular beam epitaxy. Evaporation: Thermal vaporation and e-beam evaporation. Sputtering techniques: Direct current (DC) sputtering and radio frequency (RF) sputtering. Preparation of Si/Ge semiconductors - Czochralski crystal growth technique: Doping of semiconductors by Ion implantation.

UNIT 4 INSULATING MATERIALS 9 Hrs. Electrical Insulating Materials: Introduction - Requirements. Classification based on substances: Gaseous, liquid

and solid insulating materials. Preparation, properties and applications of SF6, Epoxy resin, ceramic products: white wares and glass - Transformer oil. Electrical resistivity: Factors influencing electrical resistivity of materials - Composition, properties and applications of high resistivity materials: Manganin - Constantan - Molybdenum disilcide - Nichrome.

UNIT 5 CHEMIN FORMATICS 9 Hrs. Introduction: Computer representation of chemical compounds: Line notations - Wiswesser line notation - ROSDAL

notation - SMILES coding - Advantages and disadvantages of different types of notations. Standard structure exchange formats: Structure of Mol files and SD files. Chemical structure drawing softwares. Molecule editors: CACTVS molecule editor - Chemdraw - ChemSketch - Chemwindow. Searching chemical structure: Similarity search.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Ziaie B., Introduction to Micro/Nanofabrication, Springer, 2010. 2. Andrew Leach, An Introduction to Cheminformatics, Springer, 2009. 3. Johann Gasteiger and Thomas Engel (Ed.), Cheminformatics: A Textbook. Wiley-VCH, 2003. 4. Hagen Klauk, Organic Electronics: Materials, Manufacturing and Applications, Wiley, 2006. 5. Dara S.S., Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand & Co, 2008. 6. Sheik Mideen A., Engineering Chemistry (I & II),13th Edition, Shruthi Publishers, 2010. 7. Douglas A. Skoog and Donald M. West, Principles of Instrumental Analysis, 6th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks




SCY1103 CHEMISTRY OF INDUSTRIAL MATERIALS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To know the different types of coal, their analysis and gaseous fuels. To have a basic understanding about terms related to phase rule and its applications to various systems. To understand the requirements, classification of explosives and propellants used in aerospace industries. To provide an idea about lubrication mechanisms, properties and to learn the science of composites and abrasives.

UNIT 1 FUELS 9 Hrs. Fuels: Introduction - Classification of fuels - Characteristics of a fuel - Determination of calorific value of a fuel by

Bomb calorimeter. Coal: Classification of coals based on energy content. Chemistry and analysis of coal: Proximate analysis and ultimate analysis. Manufacture of metallurgical coke: Otto-Hoffmann’s method. Cracking: Fluidized bed catalytic cracking. Knocking in compression ignition and spark ignition engines. Gaseous fuels: CNG - LPG - Producer gas. Ethanol as a fuel.

UNIT 2 PHASE EQUILIBRIA 9 Hrs. Introduction: Definition of phase rule - Terms involved in phase rule with examples. One component system: Water

system. Two component alloy systems: Classification - Reduced phase rule - Thermal analysis. Simple eutectic system: Lead-silver system. Congruent system: Zinc-magnesium system. Incongruent system: Sodium-potassium system.

UNIT 3 EXPLOSIVES AND ROCKET PROPELLANTS 9 Hrs. Explosives: Requirements - Classification of explosives: Low explosives - Primary explosives - High explosives.

Assessment of explosives: Sand bomb test - Drop height - Velocity of detonation. Rocket propellants: Types of rocket engines - Basic principle of rocket propulsion system - Specific impulse (ISP) - Thrust: Momentum thrust and pressure thrust. Requirements of a good propellant. Classification of chemical propellants - Liquid fuels - Liquid oxidizers - Solid fuels - Solid oxidizers. UNIT 4 LUBRICANTS 9 Hrs.

Introduction: Requirements and functions of lubricants. Mechanism of lubrication: Hydrodynamic lubrication - Boundary lubrication - Extreme pressure lubrication. Properties of lubricants: Viscosity index - Cloud point - Pour point - Flash point - Fire point - Oiliness - Sligh oxidation test - Aniline point. Classification of lubricants: Liquid lubricants - Semisolid lubricants - Solid lubricants.

UNIT 5 COMPOSITES AND ABRASIVES 9 Hrs. Introduction: Definition. Constituents of composites: Matrix phase and dispersed phase - Examples. Metal matrix composites: Al matrix; Mg matrix and Ti matrix composites. Ceramic matrix composites: SiC marix and Alumina matrix composites. Polymer matrix composites: Fiber reinforced plastics (FRP) and its types. Application of composites. Cermets: Oxide base cermets - Carbide base cermets - Properties and applications. Abrasives: Definition - Properties: Moh’s scale of Hardness. Classification: Natural and synthetic abrasives. Manufacture of abrasive paper and abrasive cloth.

Max. 45 Hours

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks. (Out

of 80 marks, maximum of 10% problems may be asked)

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jain P. C., and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 15th Edition, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., 2009. 2. Sheik Mideen A., Engineering Chemistry (I & II), 13th Edition, Shruthi Publishers, 2010. 3. Dara.S.S., Text Book of Engineering Chemistry, S.Chand & Co, 2009. 4. Kuriakose J. C., and Rajaram. J, Chemistry in Engineering and Technology, Vol.1 & 2, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company (P) Ltd., 2009. 5. Puri Br., Sharma Lr., Madhan S Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, 41st Edition, Vishal Publishing Co., 2004. 6. Uppal M.M., Engineering Chemistry, 6th Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2006. 7. Agarwal O.P., Engineering Chemistry, 3rd Edition, Khanna Pubishers., 2003.

Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. 20 Marks 80 Marks



SCY 1104 BIO ORGANIC CHEMISTRY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the fundamentals of classification, synthesis, properties and structural elucidation of carbohydrates, amino acids and proteins. To know the classification and properties of lipids and enzymes. To have overall idea about the structure and biological aspects of steroids, hormones, vitamins and nucleic acids.

UNIT 1 CARBOHYDRATES 9 Hrs. Introduction: Classification: Sugars and Non-sugars. Building up of the sugar series: Aldoses. Conversion of higher

to lower homologue and vice versa: Ascending and descending series - Kiliani Fischer synthesis - Ruff degradation. Glucose: Physical properties - Chemical properties: Epimerization - Mutarotation. Structural elucidation of glucose: Open chain and closed chain structure. Structure and biological importance of disaccharides: Sucrose - Maltose - Lactose. Structure and biological importance of polysaccharides: Starch - Cellulose - Chitin - Heparin - Peptidoglycan.

UNIT 2 AMINOACIDS AND PROTEINS 9 Hrs. Aminoacids: Classification - α, β, and γ aminoacid - acidic, basic and neutral amino acids - Essential and non

essential amino acids. Preparation: HVZ reaction - Strecker synthesis - Gabriel Phthalimide synthesis. Physical properties: Isoelectric point. Chemical properties: Reaction of amino group - Carboxyl group and both. Proteins: Classification based on shape and solubility - Classification based on increasing complexity of structure. Structure of proteins: Primary - Secondary - Tertiary - Quaternary.

UNIT 3 LIPIDS AND ENZYMES 9 Hrs. Lipids: Occurrence and classification of lipids - Simple lipids: Fats - Distinction between fats and oils - Occurrence

- Properties: Hydrolysis - Auto oxidation - Addition reactions. Analysis of fats and oils: Saponification value and Iodine number. Compound Lipids and Derived lipids.

Enzymes: Classification and nomenclature - Enzyme Kinetics: Michaelis-Menton equation. Enzyme activity - Mechanism of enzyme action.

UNIT 4 STEROIDS, HORMONES AND VITAMINS 9 Hrs. Steroids: Introduction - Nomenclature. Cholesterol: Constitution (excluding synthesis) and biological importance.

Hormones: Introduction - Difference between hormones and vitamins. Classification - Structure and functions of steroid hormones: Androsterone - Progesterone - Testosterone - Estrone. Adrenocortical hormones: Cortisone. Vitamins: Structure and importance of Vitamin D - Folic acid - Nicotinamide.

UNIT 5 NUCLEIC ACIDS 9 Hrs. Introduction: Purines and Pyrimidines - Nucleosides and Nucleotides - Nitrogeneous bases - Structure of nucleic

acids - DNA, RNA, m-RNA, t-RNA, r-RNA - 70s and 80s - Biological importance of nucleic acids - Sequencing of nucleic acids - Maxam-Gilbert’s method and Sanger’s method.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jain J. l., Nitin Jain, Sunjay Jain, Fundamentals of Biochemistry, 6 t h Edition, S. Chand and Sons, 2013. 2. David L. Nelson, Michael M. Cox, Lehninger Principles of Biochemistry, 6 th Edition, W. H. Freeman, 2013. 3. Gurdeep R Chatwal, Organic Chemistry of Natural Products Vol II , 2nd Revised Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 1986. 4. Tewari K.S., Vishnoi N.K. and Mehrotra S.N., A Text Book of Organic Chemistry, 2nd Revised Edition, Vikas Publications, 2004. 5. Rastogi S.C., Biochemistry, 6 th Reprint, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Limited, 2007. 6. Styer L., Biochemistry, . 4th Edition, W.H. Freeman & Co, 1995.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks




SCY1105 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the fundamentals related to the phase diagrams and their applications. To know about the types and properties of solutions. To expose the students for various separation techniques for the purification of compounds.

To provide an idea about the chemical kinetics in terms of order, molecularity and their derivations involved. To give an overview about the advanced electrochemical applications.

UNIT 1 PHASE RULE 9 Hrs. Phase diagram - Information from phase diagram - Terminology used in phase diagram. Gibb’s phase rule -

Derivation. One component system: Water system. Two component alloy systems: Classification - Reduced phase rule - Thermal analysis. Simple eutectic system: Lead-silver system. Congruent System: Zinc-magnesium system. Incongruent system: Sodium-potassium system. Phase diagram of simple three component system.

UNIT 2 SOLUTIONS 9 Hrs. Introduction: Solid solution - Hume Rothery’s rule. Types of solid solutions: Liquid solutions: Solubility of

partially miscible liquids - Phenol-water system. Colligative properties: Lowering of vapour pressure. Raoult’s law: Derivation - Osmotic pressure - Isotonic solution - Relationship between osmotic pressure and vapour pressure. Depression in freezing point - Derivation. Elevation in boiling point - Derivation - Problems.

UNIT 3 SEPARATION TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

Distillation techniques: Fractional distillation - Steam distillation - Vacuum distillation. Chromatography: Elution analysis - Paper chromatography - Thin layer chromatography - Liquid chromatography - High performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) - Gas chromatography (GC).

UNIT 4 CHEMICAL KINETICS 9 Hrs.

Introduction: First and second order reactions: Integration - Integration of nth order reaction. Methods of determining order and molecularity. Collision theory of bimolecular gaseous reactions - Activated complex of bimolecular reactions - Lindemann theory of unimolecular equation - Kinetics of complex reactions: Reversible reaction - Consecutive reaction - Chain reactions - Autocatalysis - Problems.

UNIT 5 ADVANCED ELECTROCHEMISTRY 9 Hrs. Introduction: Cell constant - Equivalent conductance - Molar conductance. Ionic mobility: Transport number -

Moving boundary method - Hittorff’s method. Debye Huckel theory of strong electrolytes. Concentration cells: Types - Concentration cells without transference and with transference. Potentiometric tritrations: Redox titration. Polarography - Applications of polarography.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Puri B.R., Sharma L. R., Madan. S.Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, 41st Edition , Vishal Publishing co., 2004. 2. Keith J. Laidler, Chemical Kinetics, Third Edition, Pearson education limited, 2004. 3. Atkins P. W., Physical Chemistry, 6th edition, Oxford University press, 1998. 4. Barrow G. M., Physical Chemistry, 5th edition, McGraw-Hill, 1988. 5. Glasstone S., A Text book of Physical Chemistry, Macmillan Ltd, 1976. 6. Jayakumar V., Engineering Metallurgy, ARS publications, 2012.


PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks (Out of 80 marks, maximum of 10% problems may be asked)



SCH1101 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVE To impart knowledge on the issues related to environment and to emphasize the importance of a clean

environment

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES AND NATURAL RESOURCES 10 Hrs.

Definition, scope and importance, need for public awareness, forest resources: use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies. Timber extraction, mining, dams, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams-benefits and problems, mineral resources: use effects on forests and tribal people. water resources: use and over-utilization of surface and ground water, exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral resources, case studies food resources: world food problems, changes caused by agriculture and overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer-pesticide problems, water logging, salinity, case studies. Energy resources: growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy sources, use of alternate energy sources: Case studies. Land resources: land as a resource, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion and desertification, role of an individual in conservation of natural resources, equitable use of resources for sustainable lifestyles.

UNIT 2 ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 10 Hrs.

Concept of an ecosystem, structure and function of an ecosystem - producers, consumers and decomposers - energy flow in the ecosystem, ecological succession, food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids. Introduction, types, characteristic features, structure and function of the (a) forest ecosystem (b) grassland ecosystem (c) desert ecosystem (d) aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes, rivers, oceans, estuaries). Introduction to biodiversity, definition: genetic, species and ecosystem diversity - biogeographical classification of India - value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values, biodiversity at global, national and local levels. India as a mega-diversity nation, hot-spots of biodiversity, threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of wildlife, man-wildlife conflicts, endangered and endemic species of India, conservation of biodiversity, in-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT 3 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION 9 Hrs.

Definition - causes, effects and control measures of: (a) air pollution (b) water pollution (c) soil pollution (d) marine pollution (e) noise pollution (f) thermal pollution (g) nuclear hazards. Solid waste management: causes, effects and control measures of urban and industrial wastes, role of an individual in prevention of pollution, pollution case studies, disaster management: floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides.

UNIT 4 SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 8 Hrs.

From unsustainable to sustainable development, urban problems related to energy, water conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management, resettlement and rehabilitation of people; its problems and concerns, case studies, environmental ethics: issues and possible solutions, climate change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case studies. Wasteland reclamation, consumerism and waste products - environment protection act: air (prevention and control of pollution) act - water (prevention and control of pollution) act, wildlife protection act; forest conservation act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental legislation, Key initiatives of Rio declaration, Vienna convention, Kyoto protocol, Johannesburg summit and public awareness.

UNIT 5 HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 8 Hrs. Population growth, variation among nations, population explosion, family welfare programme, environment and human

health, human rights, value education, HIV / AIDS, women and child welfare, role of information



technology in environment and human health, case studies. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets -river/forest/grassland/hill/mountain. Visit to a local polluted site -urban/rural/ industrial/agricultural-study of common plants, insects, birds-study of simple ecosystems, pond, river, hill slopes etc.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Meenakshi. P, Elements of Environmental Science and Engineering, 1st Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2009.

2. Ravikrishnan. A, Environmental Science & Engineering, 3rd Edition, Sri Krishna Publications, Chennai, 2008.

3. Wrigh. R. T & Nebel B.J, Environmental science-towards a sustainable future by Richard 8th edition, Prentice Hall of India,

NewDelhi,2006

4. Erach Bharucha, Text Book of Environmental Studies, 2 nd Edition ,University Press, Chennai, 2006




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks. 80 Marks



SCS1102 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the basic programming concepts. To understand the concept of arrays, functions and pointers. To gain knowledge about memory management.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs.

Introduction: Algorithms, Pseudocodes & flowcharts, Overview of C, features of C, Structure of C program, Compilation & execution of C program. Identifiers, variables, expression, keywords, data types, constants, scope and life of variables, and local and global variables. Operators: arithmetic, logical, relational, conditional and bitwise operators. Special operators: sizeof () & comma (,) operator. Precedence and associativity of operators & Type conversion in expressions.

Basic input/output and library functions: Single character input/output i.e. getch(), getchar(), getche() & putchar(). Formatted input/output: printf() and scanf().

UNIT 2 CONTROL STRUCTURES AND FUNCTIONS 9 Hrs.

Control structures: Conditional control (if, nested if, switch case), Loop control (for, while, do while) and Unconditional control structures (goto)

Functions: The Need of a function, user defined and library function, prototype of a function, calling of a function, function argument, passing arguments to function, return values, nesting of function, recursion. Library Functions: Concepts, mathematical and string functions.

UNIT 3 ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9 Hrs.

Arrays: Single and multidimensional arrays, array declaration and initialization of arrays, array as function arguments.

Strings: Declaration, initialization and string handling functions. Structure and Union: Defining structure, declaration of structure variable, accessing structure members, nested

structures, array of structures, structure assignment, structure as function argument, function that returns structure, union.

UNIT 4 STORAGE CLASSES AND POINTERS 9 Hrs.

Storage class specifier - auto, extern, static & register, Pointers: The ‘&’ and ’*’ operators, pointers expressions, pointers vs arrays

UNIT 5 MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

Pointer to functions, Function returning pointers Direct Memory Access functions: malloc(), calloc(), sizeof(), free() and realloc(). Preprocessor directives.

Command line arguments Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Balaguruswami. E., “Programming in C”, TMH Publications,1997 2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar., “Let us C”, Fifth Edition

3. Gottfried , “Programming with C”, Schaums Outline Series, TMH publications,1997 4. Mahapatra , “Thinking in C”, PHI publications,2nd Edition. 5. Subburaj . R , “Programming in C” , Vikas Publishing, First Edition, 2000

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SCS1202 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the fundamental concepts of object oriented programming. Be familiar with concepts like abstraction, inheritance, polymorphism. To understand the concept of Classes.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs.

Object Oriented Programming Paradigms - Comparison of Programming Paradigms - Object Oriented Languages - Benefits of Object Oriented Programming - Comparison with C - Overview of C++ -Pointers- Functions - Scope and Namespaces - Source Files and Programs.

UNIT 2 CLASSES AND OBJECTS 9 Hrs.

Working with classes - Classes and objects - Class specification-Class objects-Accessing class members-Defining class members-Inline functions-Accessing member functions within class-Data hiding-Class member accessibility-Empty classes,

UNIT 3 CONSTRUCTORS AND OVERLOADING 9 Hrs.

Default constructors-Parameterized constructors-Constructor overloading-Copy constructors-new, delete operators-”this” pointer-friend classes and friend functions-Function overloading- Unary Operator overloading -Binary Operator overloading.

UNIT 4 INHERITANCE 9 Hrs.

Base class and derived class relationship-Derived class declaration-Forms of inheritance-Inheritance and member accessibility- Constructors in derived class-Destructors in derived class-Multiple inheritance-Multi level inheritance-Hybrid inheritance-Virtual base classes-Member function overriding-Virtual functions-Abstract classes-Pure Virtual functions.

UNIT 5 I/O AND LIBRARY ORGANIZATION 9 Hrs. I/O Stream - File I/O - Exception Handling - Templates - STL - Library Organization and Containers - Standard Containers - Overview of Standard Algorithms-Iterators and Allocators.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Balagurusamy, ”Object Oriented Programming with C++”, Tata McGraw Hill,4th Edition,2010

2. Venu Gopal.K.R, Ravishankar.T, and Raj kumar, ”Mastering C++”, Tata McGraw Hill,1999.

3. Bjarne Stroustrup, ”The C++ programming language”, Addision Wesley, 3rd Edition,1998.

4. John R Hubbard, “Programming with C++”, Schaums Outline Series, McGraw Hill, 2nd edition, 2009.

5. James Martin & James J.Odell,”Object Oriented methods-A foundation”,Prentice Hall,1997.



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks




COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE AND L T P Credits Total Marks

SCS1315 OPERATING SYSTEM 3 0 0 3 100

(For ECE and EIE)

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the organization of a computer, and the hardware-software interface. To know about the various components of a computer and their internals. To have an overview of operating system and its functionality


Central Processing Unit - Introduction - General Register Organization - Stack organization -- Basic computer Organization - Computer Registers - Computer Instructions - Instruction Cycle. Arithmetic ,Logic, Shift Microoperations- Arithmetic Logic Shift Unit -Example Architectures: MIPS, Power PC,RISC,CISC

UNIT 2 CONTROL UNIT DESIGN AND MULTIPROCESSORS 9 Hrs.

Microprogrammed Control : Control memory - address sequencing - Microprogram Example- Design of Control unit -Example Processor design Multiprocessors: Characteristics- Interprocessor Arbitration- Interprocessor Communication

UNIT 3 MEMORY AND I/O SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Memory Organization : Memory Hierarchy - Main memory - auxiliary Memory - Associative Memory - Cache Memory - Virtual memory

Input - Output Organization : Peripheral Devices - I/O Interface, Modes of transfer - Priority Interrupt - DMA - IOP - Serial Communication

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Operating system structures - System components - OS services

Process Management: Processes - Process concepts - Process schedulling-- CPU schedulling Scheduling algorithms - Preemptive strategies - Non-preemptive strategies.

UNIT 5 DEADLOCKS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

`The critical section problem - Semaphores - Deadlocks - Deadlock characterization - Prevention - Avoidance - Detection - Recovery. Storage Management Strategies - Contiguous vs. non-contiguous storage allocation- Paging - Segmentation - Paging/Segmentation systems - Page replacement strategies

Max. 45 Hours


1. M.Morris Mano, ;Computer System Architecture”,Prentice -Hall Publishers,Third Edition.

2. John P Hayes , ‘Computer Architecture and Organization’, McGraw Hill international edition, Third Edition.

3. Kai Hwang and Faye A Briggs ,‘Computer Architecture and Parallel Processing’, McGraw Hill international edition,1995.

4. Abraham Silberschatz,Peter Galvin and Gagne, “Operating System Concepts”, 6th Edition, Addison Wesley, 2002.

5. Harvey M.Deitel, ”Operating System”, 2nd Edition, Addison Wesley, 2000.



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each- No choice 20 Marks




SCS1611

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND EXPERT SYSTEMS

L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To impart adequate knowledge on the representation and structures of artificial intelligence and to study in depth about the expert systems and its tools

UNIT 1 AI & INTERNAL REPRESENTATION 9 Hrs.

The AI problem - What is AI technology - Level of the Model - Criteria for Success problems, Problem Spaces & Searches & Heuristic Search Technology Problem as a State Space Search - Production Systems - Production System Characteristics - Generate & Test - Hill Climbing - Best First Search - Constraint Satisfaction - Means End Analysis.

UNIT 2 KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9 Hrs.

Issues in Knowledge Representation - Using Predicate Logic - Representing Simple Facts in Logic, Representing Instance & Is a Relationship - Computable Functions & I Predicates - Representing Knowledge Using Rules: Procedural Vs. Declarative Knowledge - Forward Vs. Backward Reasoning.

UNIT 3 SLOT & FILLER STRUCTURES 9 Hrs. Weak Slot & Filler - Semantic Nets - Frames Strong & filler Structures - Scripts - CYC-CYCL

UNIT 4 EXPERT SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. What are Expert Systems - Knowledge Representation in Expert Systems - Symbolic Computation - Rule based Systems

UNIT 5 TOOLS FOR BUILDING EXPERT SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Using Domain Knowledge - Knowledge Acquisition - Design for Explanation - Black Board Architecture - Truth Maintenance Systems - Machine Learning - Case based Reasoning

Max. 45 Hours


1. Elaine Rich, Kevin Knight, “ Artifical Intelligence“ , 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992.

2. Peter Jackson, “Introduction to Expert Systems“, 3rd Edition, Addison Wesley, 1st Indian Reprint 2000







SME1208 APPLIED THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to EEE, EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To study about the basic concepts in thermodynamics, compressors and internal combustion engines. To

understand the Refrigeration and air conditioning concepts.

UNIT 1 FIRST LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Concepts - concept of continuum, macroscopic approach, thermodynamic systems - closed, open and isolated. Property, state, path and process, quasi-static process, work, modes of work, Zeroth law of Basic thermodynamics - concept of temperature and heat. Concept of ideal gas. First law of thermodynamics - application to closed and open systems, internal energy, specific heat capacities, enthalpy, steady flow process with reference to various thermal equipments.

UNIT 2 SECOND LAW OF THERMODYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Second law of thermodynamics - Kelvin’s and Clausius statements of second law. Reversibility and irreversibility. Carnot theorem, Carnot cycle, reversed Carnot cycle, efficiency, COP, Clausius inequality, concept of entropy, entropy of ideal gas, principle of increase of entropy.

UNIT 3 POWER CYCLES AND INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 9 Hrs.

Air standard cycles - Otto, Diesel and Dual cycles. Derivation of expression for air standard efficiency and mean effective pressure.IC Engines- Introduction-Classification, Comparison between four stroke and two stroke, Performance Testing on internal combustion engines, Performance curves.

UNIT 4 AIR COMPRESSORS 9 Hrs. Positive displacement compressor - reciprocating air compressor, work done, volumetric efficiency, Effect of clearance volume For qualitative treatment- rotary compressors - vane type, roots blower-centrifugal compressor

UNIT 5 HEAT TRANSFER & REGRIGERATION 9 Hrs.

Heat transfer-Modes of heat transfer- Fourier law of conduction, one dimensional steady state conduction heat transfer in composite walls. For qualitative treatment- Convection and Radiation Vapour compression refrigeration cycle, Calculation of coefficient of performance.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCES BOOKS

1. Nag P.K, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008 2. Rajput R.K, “Thermal Engineering”, 8th Edition, Lakshmi publications Ltd. New Delhi,2010 3. Rogers and Mayhew, “Engineering Thermodynamics”, 4th Edition, Addison Wesley 1999. 4. Manohar Prasad, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, 2nd Edition, New Age International (P) Ltd, 2003. 5. Domkundwar S, Arora S.C, “A Course in Heat and Mass Transfer, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,2005

6. Ganesan.V., ”Internal combustion Engines”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007



PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (80% Problem and 20% Theory)



SME1210 SOLID AND FLUID MECHANICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to EEE, E&C and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The subject of Mechanics of Solids cuts broadly across all branches of engineering profession. At the end of this course, the student will have knowledge about behavior of members To Understand Fluid Properties , flow characteristics and basic governing equations-mass , momentum , energy. To understand the analysis of roto dynamic machines and Velocity Triangles.

UNIT 1 STRESS STRAIN AND DEFORMATION OF SOLIDS, STATES OF STRESS 9 Hrs. Rigid bodies and deformable solids - stability, strength, stiffness - tension, compression and shear stresses -

strain, elasticity, Hooke’s law, limit of proportionately, modules of elasticity, stress-strain curve, lateral strain - temperature stresses deformation of simple and compound bars - shear modulus, bulk modulus, relationship between elastic constants - bi axial state of stress - stress at a point - stress on inclined plane - principal stresses and principal planes - Mohr’s circle of stresses

UNIT 2 BENDING AND SHEAR STRESS DISTRIBUTION, TORSION & BEAMS 9 Hrs. Stresses in Beams - Simple bending theory - Composite Beams - Combined bending and Direct stress - Shear

stress distribution for Rectangular and I section - Simple Torsion theory - Stresses and deformations in Solid and Hollow circular shafts- Double integration method - Macaulay’s method - Moment area method - Conjugate method for simply supported and cantilever beams, (only point loads & Uniformly distributed loads.)

UNIT 3 SLOPE AND DEFLECTION OF BEAMS 9 Hrs. Flow through orifices: Classification - Hydraulic co-efficient - Flow through rectangular orifice, Notches and weirs.

Laminar and Turbulent flow: Reynolds experiment - Major and minor losses in pipes - Darcy Weisbach’s equation, Chezy’s formula - pipes in series and pipes in parallel - total energy line - hydraulic gradient line - Equivalent pipe

UNIT 4 FLUID PROPERTIES & EQUATIONS OF MOTION 9 Hrs. Fluid Properties: Density - Specific Weight - Specific Gravity - Viscosity - Surface tension - Capillarity -

compressibility. Fluid Statics: Hydrostatic Law - Pressure Variation in static fluid - Hydrostatic force on a submerged plane-surfaces - Location of hydrostatic force. Manometers - Simple U tube and differential manometers - Buoyancy - Meta-centric height - determination of stability of floating bodies and submerged bodies- Basic equations of motion: Types of fluid flow - Continuity, momentum and energy equations - Euler’s and Bernoulli’s Equation and its applications.-Flow Measurement: Orifice meter, Venturi meter, Piezometer, Pitot Tube.

UNIT 5 PUMPS & TURBINES 9 Hrs. Centrifugal Pumps: Definition - Operations - Velocity Triangles - Performance curves - Cavitations -

Multistaging. Reciprocating Pumps: Operation - Slip - indicator Diagram - Separation - Air vessels. Hydraulic Turbines: Classification of hydraulic turbines - Working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan turbines - velocity triangles - draft tube - hydraulic turbine characteristics. Dimensional Analysis: Buckingham’s Theorem, Non-Dimension Numbers, Similarities of Flow- Model studies

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rajput.R.K. “Strength of Materials”4th Edition, S.Chand & co, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Khurmi, R.S, “Strength of Materials“, 23rd Edition,S.Chand & Co, 2008 3. Bansal.R.K,. “Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics Machines”, 9th Edition,Laxmi Publications, 2005. 4. Kumar K. L., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics”, 8th Edition, Eurasia Publication.2009

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max Mark: 80. Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each- No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SBA1101 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND PROFESSIONAL L T P Credits Total Marks

ETHICS 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To familiarize engineering students with the concepts of Management useful for Managing their own enterprise or

to work in a professional organization in Managerial capacity and to provide them an ethical outlook.

UNIT 1 MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS & STRUCTURE 9 Hrs.

Management - Definition -Role of managers- Levels of management-Basic Function - Contribution of Taylor & Fayol. Types of structures - Line, staff, Functional, Committee and Project & Matrix - Structures. Departmentalization - Centralization - Decentralization - Span of control. Management by Objectives (MBO)- Management by Exception (MBE).

UNIT 2 MANAGEMENT OF ORGINASATION 9 Hrs.

Forms of Business / Industrial Ownership - Sole Trader, Partnership, Joint stock Company, Performance Appraisal - Basic Principles - Pitfalls - Methods to Overcome. Industrial Safety - Causes of Accidents - Cost of Accidents - Measures to avoid Accidents. Plant Layout & Maintenance - Need, Types & Managerial Aspects.

UNIT 3 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR 9 Hrs. Organisational Behaviour - Definition - Nature & Scope - Contributing Disciplines - Importance of OB to Managers.

Personality - Definition - Theories - Factors Influencing Personality. Motivation - Definition - Theories. Transactional Analysis. Morale & Job Satisfaction - Factors Influencing Job Satisfaction.

UNIT 4 GROUP DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Group - Definition - Types - Determinants of Group Cohesiveness. Communication - Process - Barriers - Effective Communication. Leadership-Definition- leadership styles- Theories of leadership - Factors Contributing to Effective Leadership. Trade Unions- Role of Trade Union in Organizations - Types and Functions of Trade Unions.

UNIT 5 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS 9 Hrs.

Ethics in Workplace - Formulation of Ethics - Managerial Ethics - Managing Ethical Behaviour - Codes of Ethics - Encouraging Ethical Behaviour - Ethical Leadership - Ethical Decision making. Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) - Intellectual Property Rights (IPR)- Meaning- Laws relating to Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs)

Max. 45 Hours


1. Gupta C.B., “Management Theory and Practice”, 14th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2009.

2. Dr. Prasad L.M., “Principle & Practice of Management”, 7th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2008. 3. Aswathappa, “Organisational Behaviour”, 8th Edition, Himalaya Publishing House, 2010.

4. Dr. Prasad L.M., “Organisational Behaviour”, 4th Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons, 2008.

5. Harold Koontz, “Principles of Management”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004.






S P R 1 3 0 7 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES L T P C Total. Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To develop in a student efficient and effective deployment of an organization's resources when they are needed.

Such resources may include financial resources, inventory, human skills, production resources, or information technology.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND LINEAR PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs.

Operations Research(OR)- Nature – Characteristics – Phases - Role of OR in Decision making - Outline of OR Models Linear Programming – Formulation of L.P.problems –Solution by graphical method, simplex method, Two Phase Method, Big M methods, Dual Simplex method

UNIT 2 TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT MODEL 9 Hrs.

Transportation problem – Initial Basic feasible solution- Northwest corner method, Least Cost method, Vogel’s approximation method – Test for optimality-MODI method. Assignment problems- Hungarian assignment models-Travelling salesman problems

UNIT 3 RESOURCE SCHEDULING AND NETWORK ANALYSIS 9 Hrs.

Problem of Sequencing – Problem with N jobs and 2 machines N Jobs 3 machines N Jobs and m machines and 2 Jobs m machines (Graphical method). Project Management -Basic concepts–Network construction and scheduling Critical Path Method (CPM) & Program Evaluation Review Technique (PERT) and resource leveling by network techniques, time – Cost trade off.

UNIT 4 INVENTORY CONTROL 9 Hrs.

Inventory Control – Various Types of inventory models – deterministic inventory models – Production model, Purchase model– with and without shortage- Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) – Buffer stock – Shortage quantity, Probabilistic inventory models – Quantity Discount and Price Breaks

UNIT 5 QUEUEING THEORY AND REPLACEMENT MODELS 9 Hrs.

Queuing theory – Poisson arrivals and exponential service times, Single channel models only, Replacement policy for items whose maintenance cost increases with time- Consideration of time value of money - Replacement policy- Individual, Group replacement of items that fail completely and suddenly.

Max. 45 Hours


1.. R.Panneerselvam, “Operation Research”, 2nd Edn., Prentice Hall, 2001.

2. S.D Sharma, “Operation research Theory, Methods and Application”, 17th Edn., Kedar Nath Ram Nath Publication, 2010.

3. Nita H Shah, Ravi M Gor & Hardik Soni, “Operation Research”, 4th Edn., PHI, 2010. 4. Hamdy A.Taha, “Operation Research”, 8th Edn, PHI, 2008

5. Hiller & Liberman., “Introduction to Operations Research”, 5th Edition, Mc Graw Hill, 2001

6. Ravindran,Phillips &Solberg, “Operations Research: Principles and practice”, 2nd Edn., Wiley India Lts, 2007

7. Ronald L. Rardin, “Optimization in Operations Research”, Prentice Hall, 1998

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

Part A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks

Part B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice; each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1101 ELECTRONIC DEVICES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, E&C, EEE, ETCE, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To acquaint the students with the construction, theory and operation of the basic electronic devices such as PN junction diode, Bipolar and Field effect Transistors, special semiconductor devices and oscilloscopes. On completion of this course the student will recognize

Acquire knowledge about the semiconductor diodes

Acquire knowledge about Transistors

Acquire knowledge about Oscilloscopes

UNIT 1 SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 9 Hrs.

Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductor - Charge density, Mobility and Conductivity in Semiconductor, Drift and diffusion current, Continuity equation, PN junction - Energy band diagram of PN junction, Current components in PN junction, Junction capacitance - Application of diode - Diode switch, Clipper, Clamper and Voltage multipliers - Zener diode - Zener voltage regulators.

UNIT 2 BIPOLAR JUNCTION TRANSISTOR 9 Hrs.

Construction and Operation of NPN and PNP transistor - Current components in a transistor, Eber moll ’s Equation-Characteristics of CE,CB,CC configuration - Base width modulation, Transistor breakdown, Transistor biasing - Bias Stabilization and Compensation, Thermal runaway problems, Heat sinks, Switching characteristics.

UNIT 3 FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR 9 Hrs.

JFET- Construction, Operation and Characteristics, Expression for pinch off voltage and drain current - MOSFET- Enhancement and Depletion mode operation and characteristics, Handling precautions of MOSFET, Gate capacitance - FET as VVR - Comparison of MOSFET and JFET - Comparison of BJT and JFET.

UNIT 4 SPECIAL SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9 Hrs. SCR- UJT- Diac- Triac - Schotty barrier diode-Varactor diode - PIN diode - Tunnel diode - Gunn diode - Laser diode-Operation, Characteristics and Applications.

UNIT 5 PRINCIPLES OF CRT 9 Hrs. Force on charged particle in electric field and magnetic field - Motion of charged particle in electric and magnetic

field -Oscilloscopes-Features and uses, Types and models-CRO,Dual beam oscilloscope, Analog Oscilloscope, Digital oscilloscope Principles of CRT - Deflection and focusing of electron beam in CRT -Orientation of electric and magnetic field in CRT - Applications of CRO.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and circuits”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Publication, 2007.

2. G.K.Mithal, “Basic Electronic Devices and circuits” , 2nd Edition, G.K.Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 1998.__

3. David Bell, “Fundamentals of Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 5th Edition, Oxford University Press 2008.

4. Yang, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor devices”, McGraw Hill International Edition, 1978.

5. Theodre. F. Boghert, ‘Electronic Devices & Circuits’, Pearson Education, VI Edition, 2003.

6. Allen Mottershead, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits - An Introduction’, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New Delhi, 2003.

7. Ben G Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2005. 8. Roody and Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, Reprint 2007.

9. A.S. Sedra and K.C. Smith, “Microelectronic Circuits”, Saunder's College Publishing







SEC1201 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, E&C, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the operation of microprocessors and microcontrollers, machine language programming, interfacing

techniques and their applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MICROPROCESSORS 9 Hrs. Introduction, 8085 Architecture, Pin Diagram and signals, Addressing Modes, Timing Diagram- Memory read, Memory write, I/O cycle, Interrupts and its types, Introduction to 8086 microprocessors and its operation.

UNIT 2 PROGRAMMING 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs.

8085 assembly language programming, addressing modes, 8085 instruction set, Instruction formats, Instruction Classification: data transfer, arithmetic operations, logical operations, branching operations, machine control —Stack and subroutines, Example Programs

UNIT 3 PERIPHERALS AND INTERFACING 9 Hrs. Introduction, memory and I/O interfacing, data transfer schemes, Interface ICs’- USART (8251), programmable

peripheral interface (8255), programmable interrupt controller (8259), programmable counter/interval timer (8254), Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), and Digital to Analog Converter (DAC).

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO MICROCONTROLLER 9 Hrs. Introduction to microcontrollers, Difference between microprocessors and microcontrollers, Architectural features of 8051, I/O Ports, Interrupts, Addressing Modes and Instruction set of 8051, Programming examples.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS BASED ON 8085 AND 8051 9 Hrs. Interfacing Basic concepts, interfacing LED, 7 segment LED, Stepper motor control system, Temperature control system, Traffic light control system, Motor speed control system, Waveform generation, Interfacing LCD.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and applications with 8085”, 5th Edition, Penram International Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2010.

2. Kenneth J Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller”, 2nd Edition, Thomson, 2005. 3. Nagoor Kani A, “Microprocessor and Microcontroller”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2012.

4. Mathur A.P. ” Introduction to microprocessor .“

5. Muhammad Ali Mazidi.”The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems.”


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1202 DISCRETE ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of Rectifiers and power supplies, Transistor biasing circuits, Small signal analysis of FET and MOSFET amplifiers, Frequency Response and Multistage amplifiers and Large Signal Amplifiers.

On completion of this course the student will recognize.

Analysis of different types of Rectifiers and Power Supplies. Hybrid Model of BJT Amplifiers.

Small Signal Model of FET and MOSFET Amplifiers.

Frequency response and Multistage Amplifiers.

Large Signal Amplifiers.

UNIT 1 SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

BJT amplifiers : CE, CB and CC amplifiers - multistage amplifiers - differential amplifier - designing BJT amplifier networks.(analysis using hybrid -π model) FET amplifiers : CS, CG and CD amplifiers -designing FET amplifier networks Frequency response : low frequency response of BJT and FET amplifiers - Miller effect capacitance - high frequency response of BJT and FET amplifiers.

UNIT 2 LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Class A, B, C, AB and D type of operation - efficiency of class A amplifier with resistive and transformer coupled load, efficiency class B, complementary symmetry amplifiers - distortion in power amplifiers - Thermal stability of power amplifier.

UNIT 3 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS & OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs.

Block diagram, Four types of negative feedback connections - voltage series feedback, voltage shunt feedback, current series feedback and current shunt feedback, Oscillators - Classification, Barkhausen Criterion - Analysis of LC oscillators - Hartley, Colpitts, Clapp, RC oscillators - phase shift – Wien bridge - Frequency range of RC and LC Oscillators, Miller and Pierce Crystal oscillators.

UNIT 4 TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Small signal tuned amplifiers - Analysis of capacitor coupled single tuned amplifier & inductively coupled single tuned amplifier - double tuned amplifier - effect of cascading single tuned and double tuned amplifiers on bandwidth - Stagger tuned amplifiers - large signal tuned amplifiers - Class C tuned amplifier - Efficiency and applications of Class C tuned amplifier.

UNIT 5 WAVE SHAPING AND MULTI VIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9 Hrs.

High Pass and Low Pass RC Circuits and their Response for Sine, Step, Pulse, Square, Ramp and Exponential Input. Multivibrators - Astable Multivibrators - Emitter and Collector Coupled - Monostable, Bistable Multivibrators, and Schmitt Trigger Circuits ,Blocking oscillator-Monostable & Astable blocking oscillator.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. S. Salivahanan, N. Suresh Kumar and A. Vallavaraj, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2007. 2. Mithal G.K, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Khanna Publishers, 23rd Edition, 2004. 3. David A., Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits”, PHI, 2002. 4. Venkatraman R., “Pulse, Digital Circuits and Computer Fundamentals”, Dhanpat Rai, (Paper Back), 2013. 5. Jacob Millman and C. Halkias, “Integrated Electronics, Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.







SEC1203 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of Rectifiers and power supplies, Transistor biasing circuits, Small signal analysis of FET and MOSFET amplifiers, design and analysis of feedback amplifiers, oscillators, tuned amplifiers and multivibrators

UNIT 1 RECTIFIERS AND POWER SUPPLIES 9 Hrs.

Half Wave Rectifier - Full Wave Rectifier - Bridge Rectifier - Performance of Rectifiers - Filters - Types of Filters - L, C, LC and π Filters - Ripple Factor Calculation for C, L, LC and π Filter - Regulators - Shunt and Series Voltage Regulator - SMPS.

UNIT 2 SMALL SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing circuit of BJT, DC equivalent circuit of BJT,DC and AC Load Lines, Stability factor analysis, Two port devices and hybrid model - transistor hybrid model and h parameters - determination of h-parameters from the characteristics - Analysis of transistor amplifier using h-parameters - Low frequency FET model -Common Source and Common drain amplifiers.

UNIT 3 MULTI STAGE AMPLIFIERS AND LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Cascading amplifiers - direct coupled and capacitor coupled two stage CE amplifiers - Darlington Pair - Cascode Amplifier- Bootstrap amplifier- Classification of Power amplifiers - Class A Power Amplifier- direct and Transformer coupled amplifiers - Class B Push-pull arrangements and Complementary symmetry amplifiers - efficiency calculations, Amplifier distortion, power dissipation - Class AB amplifier - Power transistor heat sinking - Class C and D amplifiers.

UNIT 4 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS AND OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs. Feedback Amplifiers: Feedback concept - General characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers - Four basic types of feedback topologies - Voltage and current feedback amplifiers.

Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion - LC oscillators - Analysis of Hartley, colpitts - RC oscillators - Phase shift and wein bridge types and analysis - Crystal oscillators and frequency stability.

UNIT 5 TUNED AMPLIFIERS AND MULTI VIBRATORS 9 Hrs.

Tuned Amplifiers - single tuned -double tuned -stagger tuned amplifiers - Instability of Tuned Amplifier - Neutralization and Unilateralization - Multivibrators - Collector coupled Astable, Monostable and Bistable Multivibrators.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. S Millman and Halkias, “Integrated Electronics”, Tata McGraw Hill International,2008.

2. R.L. Boylestad and L. Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, India, 9th edition, 2008.

3. D.Roy Choudhury &Shail B Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, 3rd edition. 2007.

4. David. A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, PHI Learning Private Ltd, India, 4th edition 2008.

5. R.A. Gayakwad, “Op-Amps and Linear integrated circuits”, PHI, 2008.







SEC1204 ELECTRONIC DEVICES AND CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE,CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the analysis of Semiconductor diodes and regulators, Transistor biasing circuits, switching characteristics of FET and MOSFET devices, and knowledge on special semiconductor devices.

UNIT 1 SEMICONDUCTOR DIODES 8 Hrs.

Intrinsic and Extrinsic semiconductor - charge density, Mobility and conductivity, Drift and diffusion current, Continuity equation, PN junction - Energy band diagram of PN junction, V-I characteristics, Current components in PN junction, Application of diode - Diode switch, Clipper, Clamper, Zener Diode-, V-I characteristics ,Zener Regulator

UNIT 2 TRANSISTORS 8 Hrs.

Operation of NPN and PNP transistor - Current components in a transistor, Characteristics of CE,CB,CC configuration - Switching characteristics. JFET- Construction, Operation and Characteristics, Expression for pinch off voltage and drain current - MOSFET- Enhancement and Depletion mode operation and characteristics- Comparison of MOSFET and JFET - Comparison of BJT and JFET.

UNIT 3 BIASING CIRCUITS AND SMALL SIGNAL ANALYSIS 10 Hrs.

Biasing Circuit Of BJT, Dc Equivalent Circuit Of BJT, DC And AC Load Lines, Stability Factor Analysis, Equivalent Circuits of transistor - Input-Output Characteristics - Small Signal Equivalent Circuit , Small signal model of JFET and MOSFET.

UNIT 4 SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 10 Hrs.

SCR- UJT- Diac- Triac - Varactor diode - PIN diode - Tunnel diode - Gunn diode - Principle of photo electronic devices - Solar cell, Photo diode and Photo transistor - LED, LCD, LASER diode, CCD - Operation, Characteristics and Applications.


Half Wave Rectifier - Full Wave Rectifier - Bridge Rectifier - Performance of Rectifiers - Filters - Types of Filters - L, C, LC, Filters - Ripple Factor Calculation for C, L, LC Filters - Regulators - Shunt and Series Voltage Regulator - IC Regulator - SMPS - Power Control using SCR.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Millman and Halkias, “Electronic devices and circuits”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill Publication, 2007.

2. G.K.Mithal, “Basic Electronic Devices and circuits”, 2nd Edition, G.K.Publishers Pvt. Ltd., 1998

3. David Bell, “Fundamentals of Electronic Devices and Circuits”, 5th Edition, Oxford University Press 2008.

4. Robert L. Boylestad, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, 6th Edition, PHI, 1998..

5. Ben G Streetman and Sanjay Banerjee, “Solid State Electronic Devices”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2005.

6. Gupta. J.B, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Katson Publishers, 2009.

7. Salivahanan. S, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, TMH, 2008.



PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks

PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1205 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE and ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of Rectifiers and power

supplies, Transistor biasing circuits, Small signal analysis of FET and MOSFET amplifiers, Frequency Response and Multistage amplifiers and Large Signal Amplifiers. On completion of this course, the student will recognize

Analysis of different types of Rectifiers and Power Supplies. Hybrid Model of BJT Amplifiers and Small Signal Models of FET and MOSFET Amplifiers.

Frequency response and Multistage Amplifiers and also Large Signal Amplifiers


Half Wave Rectifier - Full Wave Rectifier - Bridge Rectifier - Performance of Rectifiers - Filters - Types of Filters - L, C, LC, π Filters - Ripple Factor Calculation for C, L, LC and π Filter - Regulators - Shunt and Series Voltage Regulator - IC Regulator - SMPS.

UNIT 2 TRANSISTOR BIASING CIRCUITS ANS SMALL SIGNAL ANALYSIS OF BJT AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing- Types of biasing- DC equivalent circuit of BJT- Load Line-DC and AC Load Line Analysis - Hybrid Model of BJT- Hybrid Model Analysis of CE, CB, CC - Calculation of Input Impedance, Output Impedance, Voltage Gain, Current Gain using hybrid model- Approximate Model of BJT- CE, CB and CC Analysis- Small signal equivalent circuit of BJT- Small Signal Analysis of CE, CB and CC.

UNIT 3 SMALL SIGNAL ANALYSIS OF FET AND MOSFET AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Biasing of FET Amplifiers- Types- Small Signal Model of FET- Small Signal Analysis of CS-CD-CG FETCalculation of Input Impedance-output impedance-voltage gain using small signal model- MOSFET Biasing-Types-Small Signal Model of MOSFET-Small Signal Analysis of CS-CD-CG MOSFET- Calculation Input Impedance-output impedance-voltage gain using small signal model

UNIT 4 FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND MULTISTAGE AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs. Frequency Resonance- Low Frequency response and High Frequency Response equivalent circuit analysis of

BJT- Low Frequency response and High Frequency Response equivalent circuit analysis of FET- Miller’s Effect - Multistage amplifiers-need for multistage amplifiers- methods of interconnecting multistage amplifiers - Types of Multistage amplifiers - Analysis of RC coupled Amplifiers -Analysis of Direct Coupled Amplifiers-Analysis of Transformer Coupled Amplifiers-cascade amplifier- Cascode amplifier- Darlington Emitter Follower Amplifier.

UNIT 5 LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Class A power amplifier with resistive and transformer coupled load- calculation of efficiency- Class B-Push pull-complementary symmetry - efficiency calculation- Class C Power Amplifier- Class AB operation and Class D type of operation- distortion in power amplifiers - Thermal stability of power amplifier..


1. Donald. L, Schilling and C.Belove, “Electronic Circuits - Discrete and Integrated”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1989.

2. David A. Bell, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, PHI, 1998.

3. Gupta. J.B, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Katson Publishers, 2009.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1206 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - II L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The objective of this course is to publicize the student with the design and analysis of feedback amplifiers,

oscillators, tuned amplifiers, wave shaping circuits, multivibrators and blocking oscillators.

On completion of this course the student will recognize

Analysis of different types of feedback amplifiers and oscillators. Frequency response and design of tuned amplifiers.

Basic operation and design of wave shaping circuits and multivibrators.

Analysis of time base generators and blocking oscillators.

UNIT 1 FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Basic concept of feedback-Types of Feedback - Properties of negative feedback - Basic Feedback Topologies - Types of negative feedback connection - effect of negative feedback on stability, noise, distortion, gain, input and output impedance, bandwidth- analysis of voltage and current feedback amplifier.

UNIT 2 OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs.

Condition for Oscillation (Barkhausen Criterion) -Classification of Oscillators -General form of LC Oscillator - Analysis of LC Oscillator, Colpitts, Hartley, Clapp , Armstrong, Crystal Oscillator - Analysis of RC Oscillator, RC Phase Shift Oscillator - Wein Bridge Oscillator.

UNIT 3 TUNED AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Resonance Circuits, Unloaded and Loaded Q of Tank Circuit - Bandwidth - Types of Tuned Amplifiers - Analysis of Capacitive coupled and inductive coupled Single Tuned Amplifier - Double Tuned Amplifier-Stagger Tuned Amplifier - Instability of Tuned Amplifier -Stabilization Techniques, Neutralization and Unilaterlization - Class C Tuned Amplifiers.

UNIT 4 WAVE SHAPING AND MULTI VIBRATOR CIRCUITS 9 Hrs. High Pass RC, RL Circuits and their Response for Step, Ramp and Exponential signal -Low Pass RC, RL

Circuits and their Response for Step, Ramp and Exponential signal -Multivibrators- Collector Coupled Astable, Monostable, Bistable Multivibrators and Schmitt Trigger Circuits.

UNIT 5 TIME BASE GENERATORS AND BLOCKING OSCILLATORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Time Based Generator - Voltage Time Based Generator -Current time Based Generator- Astable Blocking Oscillator using Emitter Timing -Astable Blocking Oscillator using Base Timing-Monostable Blocking Oscillator using Emitter Timing- Monostable Blocking Oscillator using base Timing.


1. Millman. J And Taub.H, “Pulse, Digital and Switching Waveforms”, TMH, 2000.

2. Mithal G.K, “Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Khanna Publishers, 23rd Edition, 2004. 3. David A. Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits”, PHI, 2002.

4. Venkatraman. R, “Pulse, Digital Circuits and Computer Fundamentals”, DhanpatRai Publications (P) Ltd., 1986

5. Jacob Millman and C. Halkias, “Integrated Electronics, Analog and Digital Circuits and Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1997.







SEC1207 DIGITAL LOGIC CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To publicize the student with the design and analysis of Boolean algebra, logic gates, combinational circuits,

sequential circuits, digital logic families and programmable logic devices.On completion of this course the student will recognize

Various number systems and to simplify the mathematical expressions using Boolean functions- simple problems. Implementation of combinational circuits and Design of various synchronous and asynchronous circuits. Expose to various digital logic families and the students to various memory devices and programmable logic devices

UNIT 1 BOOLEAN ALGEBRA AND LOGIC GATES 9 Hrs.

Review of number systems - Binary arithmetic - Binary codes - Boolean algebra and theorems - Boolean functions -Minimization of Boolean functions-Sum of Products(SOP)-Product of Sums(POS)-Simplifications of Boolean functions using Karnaugh map and tabulation methods - Logic gates- NAND and NOR implementation.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS 9 Hrs. Introduction to Combinational circuits - Analysis and design procedures - Half Adder, Full Adder-Half

Subtractor, Full Subtractor- Parallel binary Adder, Parallel binary Subtractor- Carry look ahead Adder- BCD Adder-Decoders- Encoders-Priority Encoder- Multiplexers- MUX as universal combinational modules- Demultiplexers- Code convertors- Magnitude Comparator.

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS Introduction to Sequential circuits - Flip flops - SR, JK, D and T flip flops, Master

Characteristic and excitation table - Realization of one flip flop with other flip flops - Registers - Counters - Synchronous and Asynchronous counters - Modulus counters, Up/Down counters Johnson Counter - State diagram, State table, State minimization - Hazards.

9 Hrs. Slave flip flops, Shift registers - - Ring Counter -

UNIT 4 DIGITAL LOGIC FAMILIES 9 Hrs.

Classification and characteristics of logic family - Bipolar logic family - Saturated logic family - RTL, DTL,DCTL, I2L,TTL, HTL - Non saturated family - Schottky TTL, ECL - Unipolar family - MOS, CMOS logic families. Tristate logic. Interfacing of CMOS and TTL families. Comparison of logic families.

UNIT 5 MEMORIES AND PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES 9 Hrs. Classification of memories - ROM - ROM organization - PROM - EPROM - EEPROM - RAM - RAM organization

- Write operation - Read operation - Memory decoding - Memory expansion - Static RAM - Dynamic RAM - Programmable Logic Devices - Programmable Logic Array (PLA) - Programmable Array Logic (PAL) - Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA) - Implementation of combinational logic circuits using ROM, PLA, PAL.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Milos Ercegovac, Jomas Lang, “Introduction to Digital Systems”, Wiley publications, 1998. 2. John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas - Vikas Publishing House, 2002. 3. R.P.Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”,3rd Edition, TMH, 2003. 4. William H. Gothmann, “Digital Electronics”, Prentice Hall, 2001. 5. Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2008.






SEC1208 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS L T P

Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce the concepts and techniques associated with the understanding of signals and systems.

To impart Knowledge of time domain representation and analysis concepts as they relate to difference eq uations, impulse response and convolution, frequency domain representation and analysis concepts using Fourier analysis tools, Z-transform.etc.

To Characterize and analyze the properties of CT and DT systems

UNIT 1 CLASSIFICATION OF SIGNALS 9 Hrs. Continuous time signals (CT signals) and Discrete time signals (DT signals) - Basic operations on

signals-elementary signals- Step, Ramp, Pulse, Impulse, Exponential - Classification of CT and DT signals - Periodic, aperiodic signals-Deterministic and Random signals-even and odd signals - Real and Complex signals - Energy and power signals.

UNIT 2 ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SIGNALS 9 Hrs.

Continuous time Fourier Transform -Properties of CTFT-Inverse Fourier transform- unilateral and bilateral Laplace Transform analysis with examples - Basic properties - Parseval’s relation - Convolution in time and frequency domain-Inverse Laplace transform using partial fraction expansion method - Relation between Fourier transform and Laplace transform-Fourier series analysis.

UNIT 3 LINEAR TIME INVARIANT CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Concept of CT systems - Linear Time invariant Systems - Basic properties of continuous time systems - Linearity,

Invertilibity, Causality, Time invariance, Stability - Frequency response of LTI systems - Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Laplace transform - Differential equation- Computation of impulse response, step response, natural response ,forced response and transfer function using Laplace transform --Convolution integral -Properties of convolution integral.

UNIT 4 ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS 9 Hrs. Spectrum of DT signals, Discrete Time Fourier Transform (DTFT)- Properties of DTFT - z-transform -Basic

properties of Z transform - Region of convergence - Properties of ROC - Poles and Zeros - Inverse z-transform using Contour integration - Residue Theorem, Power Series expansion and Partial fraction expansion -Relation between DTFT and Z transform.

UNIT 5 LINEAR TIME INVARIANT DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

Concept of LTI-DT systems - Properties and types of LTIDT systems- causality, stability, invertibility, time invariant, linearity -interconnection of LTI Systems -Difference equation - Computation of Impulse response, Frequency response, step response, natural response, forced response and Transfer function using Z Transform, Convolution Sum using matrix, graphical and tabulation method-Properties of convolution sum.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Allan V. Oppenheim et al, ‘Signals and Systems, 2nd Edition., Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1997.

2. P.Ramesh Babu et al, ‘Signals and Systems’, 4th Edition, Scitech publishers, 2010. 3. Haykin. S and Van Been. B., ‘Signals and Systems’, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2003. 4. Rao.P, "Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

5. Lathi, B. P., "Linear Systems and Signals", 2nd Edition, Oxford University Press 2006. 6. Mrinal Mandal, Amir Asif, "Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Cambridge University Press, 2007. 7. Roberts, M.J., "Fundamentals of Signals and Systems", 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2007.

8. S. Salivahanan et al., "Digital Signal Processing", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2009. 9. H P Hsu, "Signals and Systems", 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1209 ANALOG COMMUNICATIONS L T P

Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVE On completion of this course the student can understand the basics of various analog modulation techniques,

transmitters, receivers and the concepts of analog communication systems

UNIT 1 BASICS OF ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION AND NOISE THEORY 9 Hrs. Review of time and frequency domain description of signals - Communication system: point to point and broad cast

- Basic model of a communication system: transmitter, receiver and channel - Fundamental limitations: Technological, Physical; Noise, bandwidth (signal and channel) and information capacity - Need for modulation and types - classification of communication based on modulation and channel - Base band and Pass band transmission - Electromagnetic spectrum allocation for various communication systems. Noise in Communication systems: Types and sources of noise; Atmospheric Noise, Thermal Noise, Shot noise, Partition noise, Flicker noise, Transit time noise - noise factor, noise factor for cascaded amplifier (Friss formula) -Noise figure - Equivalent noise temperature and bandwidth - Signal to Noise Ratio.

UNIT 2 AMPLITUDE MODULATION AND DEMODULATION 9 Hrs. STD-AM (DSB-FC) Mathematical representation - waveform, frequency spectrum, bandwidth, power relations and

Modulation index - Multi tone modulation - Limitations and Modifications in STD-AM: DSB-SC, SSB-SC and VSB AM Generation (Modulators): DSB-FC; square law modulator, Collector and base modulator circuits - DSBSC;

Balanced modulator circuit using BJT/FET - SSB: Phase shift method and Filter method - VSB; Filter method-Application and Comparison of various AM schemes - AM transmitter: Low and high level Modulation. AM Detection (Demodulators) - Envelope detector, Significance of RC time constant - Square law detector - Costa’s PLL detector

UNIT 3 ANGLE (FM & PM) MODULATION AND DEMODULATION 9 Hrs. Single tone FM: Mathematical representation, waveform, frequency spectrum, modulation index, bandwidth and

power - Multi-tone FM - Types and comparison of FM: Narrowband and Wideband - Compare FM and AM Phase modulation (PM): Mathematical representation and waveform - Relation between FM and PM - Conversion: FM to PM and PM to FM - Application of FM and PM. FM Generation: Direct method using Varactor diode and indirect method (Armstrong modulator) - Pre-emphasis - FM stereo broadcast transmitter. FM Detector: Balanced slope detector, Foster seelay frequency discriminator and Ratio detector - De- emphasis

UNIT 4 ANALOG PULSE MODULATION, DEMODULATION AND MULTIPLEXING 9 Hrs. Analog pulse modulation - Sampling theorem - Nyquist rate - Concepts of PAM, PWM (PDM) and PPM -

Modulators and demodulators. Multiplexing- classifications: Frequency Division Multiplexing, Time Division Multiplexing and Quadrature Multiplexing - Comparison of multiplexing. UNIT 5 RECEIVERS AND SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

AM Receivers: TRF receivers -Super heterodyne receivers: choice of IF, double conversion technique, tracking, AGC- characteristics of receiver - noise in AM receiver. FM Receivers: FM stereo broadcast receivers - AFC - Noise in FM - Capture effect, FM threshold effect. Communication Receivers: Sensitivity, fidelity and selectivity - Squelch circuit - Beat frequency Oscillator. Overview of Telephony, Telegraphy, Television, CCTV and Cable television.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R.P and Sapre, "Communication Systems: Analog and Digital", 2nd Edition 1995 / 5th Edition Reprint 2000, McGraw Hill Publishers. 2. Deshpande, N.D, Communication Electronics, Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,1989. 3. Wayne Thomasi, "Advanced Electronic Communication Systems", 6th Edition, PHI Publishers, 2003. 4. Sanjay Sharma, “Analog Communication Systems”, 2009. 5. Dennis Reddy and John Coolen, "Electronic Communications", 4th Edition, Prentice Hall Publishers, 1995. 6. Kennedy, "Electronic Communications Systems", 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1992.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1210 TRANSMISSION LINES AND WAVEGUIDES L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the concept of transmission lines types, various line parameters, waveguide types and

resonators. On completion of this course the student will recognize. Characterize and analyze the transmission line parameters and Acquire knowledge about the waveguides and

resonators. Analyze transmission lines for various frequencies and also smith-charts.

UNIT 1 TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY 9 Hrs. Introduction - Types of transmission lines - General theory of transmission line - Line constants – Transmission

line equation - Physical significance of the equations - The Infinite line - Distortion in a line - Distortion-less line -Telephone cables - Loading of lines - Types of loading - Campbell’s formula - General equation for line with any termination - Input impedance - Open and Short circuited line. Numerical problems.

UNIT 2 RADIO FREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINES 9 Hrs. Line approximations - Parameters of open wire line at radio frequency, parameters of coaxial lines at

radiofrequencies, constants for the line of zero dissipation - Voltages and Currents on the dissipation-less lines - input impedance of a lossless line - Wavelength and velocity of propagation - Reflection phenomena - Line losses - Return loss - reflection loss- insertion loss.- Reflection coefficient, Reflection factor, Standing wave ratio, Input impedance in terms of reflection coefficient - Practical types - Microwave Transmission line, Super Conducting transmission line, Characteristics of different printed transmission lines.

UNIT 3 MATCHING, MEASUREMENTS AND INTERFERENCES 9 Hrs. Types of transmission line sections - Half wave line - One eighth wave line - Quarter wave line - Properties of

quarter wave transformer - Location of Vmax and Vmin - Impedance matching - Single and double stub matching- Smith chart - Solutions of problems using smith chart - Applications of smith chart - Measurement of line parameters-Measurement of VSWR, Wavelength, Impedance and Power - Phenomenon of corona, Methods of reducing corona and interference.

UNIT 4 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9 Hrs. Waves between parallel planes - Transverse electric waves -Transverse magnetic waves - Characteristics of TE

and TM waves - Transverse electromagnetic waves - Velocities of propagation - Attenuation in parallel plane waves - Wave impedance.

UNIT 5 GUIDED WAVES AND WAVEGUIDE THEORY (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY). 9 Hrs. Rectangular wave guides - TE and TM waves in rectangular wave guides - Dominant mode - Cut off frequency

in wave guides - Impossibility of TEM waves in wave guides - Circular wave guides- TE and TM waves in circular wave guides - Attenuation factor and Q of wave guides-Microwave resonators introduction - rectangular cavity resonator - Q-factor of micro wave cavities.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Edward Jordan and K.G.Balmain, “Electromagnetic waves and radiating system”, 2nd Edition, PHI, 2005. 2. Umeshsinha, “Transmission lines and networks”, 8th Edition, Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 2003. 3. John D. Ryder, “Network lines and fields”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. 4. Samuel Y. Liao, “Microwave devices and circuits”, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003. 5. David M.Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley, 2002. 6. Seth S.P., “Elements of Electromagnetic Fields”, 2nd Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2007.




SEC1213 PROBABILITY THEORY AND RANDOM PROCESS L T P

Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To have a fundamental knowledge of the basic probability concepts. To have a well-founded knowledge of standard distributions which can describe real life phenomena To acquire skills in handling situations involving more than one random variable and functions of random variables.

To understand and characterize phenomena which evolve discrete and continuous Markov chain.

UNIT 1 PROBABILITY THEORY 12 Hrs. Scheme of Instructions, Introduction to Subject, Axioms of Probability, Probability Space, Conditional Probability,

Bays Theorem, Repeated Trails , Bernoulli’s Trails , Problems, Concept of a Random Variable, Distribution and density functions, Properties of distribution functions, Continuous type random variable, Normal, Exponential , chi-square, Rayleigh, Nakagami-m, uniform etc distributions , Problems, Bernoulli, Binomial, Poisson distributions, Negative binomial distributions.

UNIT 2 RANDOM VARIABLE 12 Hrs.

Conditional distributions, Total probability and bays theorem, passion approximation Problems, Functions of one random variable: Expectation, Variance, Moments, Characteristic functions Problems, One function of two random variable, joint moments, joint characteristic functions, conditional distributions, conditional expected values.

UNIT 3 RANDOM PROCESS 12 Hrs. Random Process concept, Stationarity and independence Distribution and density functions, statistical

independence, First-order stationary processes, Second order and wide sense stationary process, N- order and strict- sense stationary process Problems Time averages and ergodicity , Mean ergodic process, Auto correlation function and its properties, Cross- correlation function and its properties, Covariance functions, discrete time processes and sequences, Power density spectrum and its properties, Problems, Weiner Kinchine theorem.

UNIT 4 DISCRETE PARAMETER MARKOV CHAINS 12 Hrs. Introduction, Computation of n-step transition probabilities Chapman - Kolmogorov equation State classification and limiting Probabilities M/G/1 queueing system, Pollaczek-Khinchin transform equation.

UNIT 5 CONTINUOUS PARAMETER MARKOV CHAIN 12 Hrs.

The Birth and Death process (MM/1, M/M/c, M/M/1/N, MM/c/N (c<N), MM/c/c, M/M/ models only, derivation of mean number of customer in the system, in the queue and waiting time Simple applications) Special case of Birth and Death model (Pure Birth and Pure Death Processes).


1. P.Z. Peebles.Jr., “Probability, random variables and random signal principles”, Tata McGraw Hill Education, 3rd edition, 2002.

2. A.Papoulis, “Probability, Random variables and Stochastic Processes”, McGraw Hill, 3rd edition, 1991. 3. Kishor S.Trivedi, “Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queuing and Computer Science Applications”, John Wiley

& SonsInc. Second Edition, 2002.

4. D.Gross and C.M.Harris, “Fundamentals of Queuing Theory,” Wiley Students Edition, Third Edition,1985. 5. T. Veerarajan, “Probability, statistics and Random Processes”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., 2005 6. J.Medhi, “Stochastic Processes”, New Age International (P) Ltd., Second Edition, 1994.






SEC1301 ANTENNAS AND WAVE PROPAGATION L T P

Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the concept of antenna and its elements. To acquire knowledge about various antennas used for various frequencies. To acquire knowledge about various antenna parameters measurements. To understand the concept of RF wave propagation.

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ANTENNA 9 Hrs. Basic concepts of Retarded Potentials - Antenna Fundamentals and Physics - Radiation from an alternating

current element, Half wave Dipole, quarter wave mono pole - Fields, Power radiated and Radiation Resistance - Antenna Parameters(definition only): Field Patterns, Gain and Directivity, Effective Length, Effective Aperture, Radiation Resistance, Antenna Terminal (self and mutual) Impedance, Polarization, Beam width, Bandwidth.

UNIT 2 ANTENNA ARRAYS 9 Hrs. Arrays of two point sources. Linear arrays of point sources - Direction of Maxima, Direction of Minima and Beam Width - Types of arrays - Broad side, End fire, Colinear, Parasitic arrays. Pattern Multiplication - Binomial arrays.

UNIT 3 SPECIAL PURPOSE ANTENNAS (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 9 Hrs. Antennas for low, medium and high frequencies. Effects of earth on radiation patterns of antennas. Practical

antennas and methods of excitation. Loop antennas, Traveling Wave antennas - V and rhombic antennas, Folded Dipole, Reflector antennas, Yagi arrays and its applications. Slot radiators, Horn antennas, Parabolic Antenna, Lens Antenna and Wide band antennas - Log-periodic antennas and its applications. Analysis of rectangular and circular microstrip antenna. Smart antennas for mobile communications. Antenna for infrared detectors.

UNIT 4 PROPAGATION 9 Hrs. Factors involved in the propagation of Radio Waves. The ground wave, Ionosphere and its effects on radio waves.

Mechanism of Ionospheric propagation. Refraction and Reflection of sky wave by the ionosphere, Ray paths, skip distance, Maximum usable frequency, Fading of signals. Selective fading - Diversity reception. Space wave propagation, Considerations in space wave propagation. Atmospheric effects in space wave propagation. Super Refraction - Duct Wave Propagation.

UNIT 5 MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs.

Measurement of Impedance, Field/Radiation Pattern and gain of antennas,Measurement of Directivity,Measurement of Antenna efficiency-Antenna Radiation Efficiency,Aperture Efficiency Ionospheric measurements - Vertical incidence measurements of the ionosphere - Relation between oblique and vertical incidence transmission - System Issues - antenna noise.


1. K.D.Prasad, “Antennas and Wave Propagation”, Satya Prakasan, 3rd Edition, New Delhi,2001. 2. C A Balanis, “Antenna Theory Analysis and Design”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley Publishers, 2005. 3. J.D.Kraus, “Antennas”, 3rd Edition, Mc-Graw Hill book company, 2002. 4. F.E.Terman, “Electronic and Radio Engineering”, Mc Graw Hill book company, 2004.

5. Rajeshwari Chatterjee, “Antenna Theory and Practice”, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1988 6. Robert E.Collin, “Antennas and Radio wave propagation”, McGraw Hill, 2002 7. Edward C.Jordan, “EM Waves and Radiating Systems”, PH1, 2003



PRT B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1302 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, EIE, ETCE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To comprehend the concepts of Op-Amp and its application To study the various Filters and signal generators To acquire knowledge about ADC and DAC

To study the basic principles of PLL and Timer Circuit To understand the concept of Special function ICs

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OP- AMP AND ITS APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

OP-AMP- DC and AC Characteristics- Input offset voltage- Input bias current-Input offset current- Total output offset voltage- Thermal drift- Slew rate- CMRR -Inverting amplifier- Non-inverting amplifier- Voltage follower-Summing and differential amplifier- Integrator- Differentiator- Logarithmic and Anti logarithmic amplifiers-Comparator and Schmitt trigger.

UNIT 2 FILTERS AND SIGNAL GENERATORS 9 Hrs.

First order and Second order Butterworth filters- low pass, high pass, band pass and band reject filters -RC phase shift, Wein’s bridge oscillator- Astable and Monostable multivibrator-Precision half wave and full wave rectifiers.

UNIT 3 A/D AND D/A CONVERTERS 9 Hrs.

Sample and Hold circuit - Digital to analog converters: R-2R ladder network and Binary weighted - Characteristics of D/A converters - Analog to digital converters: Flash converter - Successive approximation converter - Dual slope ADC.

UNIT 4 PLL AND TIMER CIRCUITS 9 Hrs. Phase Locked Loop IC 565- Block schematic - Applications of PLL: FM demodulator and Frequency synthesizer-FSK Demodulator- VCO IC LM 566 - Timer IC LM 555 and its applications: Astable and Monostable multivibrator.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL FUNCTION ICS 9 Hrs. Integrated circuit Tuned amplifier, Instrumentation Amplifier, Series and shunt voltage regulator, Opto coupler, CMOS Operational Amplifier- Dc analysis- small signal analysis- specifications of IC MC 14573.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Ramakant A.Gayakwad, “OP-AMP and Linear ICs”, 4th Edition, Prentice Ha ll / Pearson Education, 1994.

2. D.Roy Choudary, Shail Jain, “Linear Integrated Circuits”, New Age International Pvt. Ltd., 2000.

3. Grey and Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits, 4th Edition, Wiley International, 2001.

4. Michael Jacob, “Applications and Design with Analog Integrated Circuits, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1993.

5. S. Salivahanan, V.S. Kanchana Bhaaskaran, “Linear integrated circuits”, 3rd Edition, McGraw -Hill, 2011.

6. William D.Stanely, “Operational Amplifiers with Linear Integrated Circuits”, 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.







SEC1303 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquire knowledge about telephone, television.

To gain the concepts in Radar and wireless communication. To Know about satellite communication.

UNIT 1 TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Telephones - Standard Telephone and local loop - Electronics Telephone - Telephone System- Cordless Telephone -Telephone Facsimile - Fax Machine Operation - Paging System -Cellular Telephone system - Digital cellular Telephone system - ISDN.

UNIT 2 TELEVISION COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Conditional distributions, Total probability and bays theorem, passion approximation Problems, Functions of one random variable: Expectation, Variance, Moments, Characteristic functions Problems, One function of two random variable, joint moments, joint characteristic functions, conditional distributions, conditional expected values.

UNIT 3 SATELLITE COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Satellite basics - Orbit dynamics - Types of Satellite Orbits - Satellite system - System calculation - satellite sub system and earth station sub system - Satellite Frequency band -Satellite Applications - Noise in satellite communication system - multiple access method - FDMA and TDMA system.

UNIT 4 RADAR COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

RADAR basics - RADAR block diagram and operation - Range equation -RADAR scanning system - Types of RADAR - Doppler effect CW radar - FM CW radar - MTI radar- Pulsed radar - tracking - detection of radar signals in noise - correlation detection.

UNIT 5 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Review of IEEE standards - Bluetooth - Piconet - Bluetooth Usage models - Bluetooth Architecture - IR - Ultrasonic- Ultrasonic Production - Applications of Ultrasonic - RF - WiFi - ZigBee - ZigBee Architecture - ZigBee Network Topologies.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Louis. E. Frenzel, “Communication Electronics Principles and applications”, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002..

2. Dennis Roody and John Coolen, “Electronic Communications”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2002

3. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 1984

4. Merill I Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill 2002.. 5. R.Gulati, “Monochrome and colour television”, 2nd edition, New age international 2005.




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1304 FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the basic concepts of a communication system and acquire knowledge about amplitude modulation and demodulation methods. To study about the principles of Frequency Modulation and Phase modulation schemes along with its types. To provide an understanding about sampling, pulse modulation concepts, digital modulation techniques and multiplexing methods.

To know about the working principles of Transmitters and Receivers. To enrich knowledge the about optical communication system, satellite communication and power line carrier communication.

UNIT 1 BASICS AND AMPLITUDE MODULATION 9 Hrs. Electromagnetic Spectrum and communication applications-Elements of communication systems-baseband and

pass band signals-need for modulation-amplitude modulation-modulation index of AM-frequency spectrum-AM power distribution in AM_DSB_ FC- generation of AM_DSB_SC using FET balanced modulator-Generation of AM_SSB using phase shift and filter method-AM VSB-Comparison of AM schemes. - AM demodulation-Envelope detector-significance of RC time constant in envelope detector.

UNIT 2 ANGLE MODULATION 9 Hrs. Principle of angle modulation-Frequency modulation-modulation index of FM-frequency deviation-deviation

ratio-Carson’s rule for bandwidth of FM-Comparison of AM and FM-narrow band and wideband FM-comparison-Generation of FM using varactor diode modulator (direct method)-Indirect method of FM generation. Phase modulation-Generation of PM using frequency modulator.FM demodulation-Principle of slope detection-balance slope detector-Foster Seely discriminator-ratio detector-amplitude limiting using ratio detector.

UNIT 3 PULSE MODULATION AND MULTIPLEXING 9 Hrs. Pulse modulation-Sampling process-sampling theorem- concepts of PAM-PWM-PPM-Generation and

demodulation of PAM, PWM, PPM-comparison-PCM system-quantization-DPCM-Adaptive Delta Modulation-Digital modulation techniques-ASK-FSK-PSK-QPSK.Concept of multiplexing-frequency division multiplexing-time division multiplexing-code division multiplexing-space division multiplexing.

UNIT 4 TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. AM transmitter -low level modulator- high level collector and base modulator- FM transmitter-preemphasis

concept- FM stereo broad cast transmitter. AM Receivers-super heterodyne receiver- AGC- choice of IF- tracking - alignment - receiver characteristics-FM receiver- Deemphasis concept-FM stereo broad cast receiver- AFC.

UNIT 5 BROAD BAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Facsimile system - optical communication system-fiber optic cable modes -mobile telephone

communication-cellular concept- satellite communication system-satellite frequency plans and allocations-frequency reuse-satellite system link models- computer communication - electronic mail- power line carrier communication-SCADA.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication Systems”, Third Edition, TMH, New Delhi,1991 2. Anokh Singh, “Principles of Communication Engineering”, S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2006 3. Taub and Schilling, “Principles of Communication Systems”, Third Edition, TMH, New Delhi, 2008. 4. Louis Frenzel, "Communication Electronics”, McGraw-Hill Companies,1999. 5. Bruce Carlson, “Communication Systems”, McGraw Hill, 2010


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying12 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 80% Theory & 20% Numerical)



SEC1306 DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The aim of the course is to provide The basic details about the data communication and networking A clear understanding of various IEEE networking standards An in depth knowledge about the various layers of ISO model data communication system

UNIT 1 DATA COMMUNICATION- BASICS 9 Hrs. Digital data - digital signals - Bit rate - Bit length - Data rate limits - noise less channels - Noisy channel - Shanon

capacity - Performance - Bandwidth - throughput - latency - Bandwidth delay product - jitters.

Circuit switched networks - Datagram networks - virtual circuit networks - connection oriented and connection less services - Structure of circuit switches and packet switches - OSI reference model - TCP/IP reference model - comparison of both models.

UNIT 2 NETWORKING 9 Hrs. Network Topologies - mesh, star, bus, and ring - hybrid topology - Network Standardization - De facto and De jure

standards of networks - ITU - ISO - IETF - NIST - IEEE - Different IEEE802 working groups - internet-Architecture of the internet - Third generation mobile networks - UMTS Architecture - Wired Ethernet - Wireless LANs IEEE 802.11 - RFID - Different types - sensor networks - Multi hop topology of sensor networks.

UNIT 3 PHYSICAL LAYER AND DATALINK LAYER 9 Hrs. The Physical layer - Media - Twisted pair - coaxial cable - microwave - infrared - millimetre wave - PSTN - The local loop modem - ADSL - Switching - Internet over cable - cable modems

The Data link layer - design issues - Error detection and control - data link protocols - HDLC - PPP - IEEE standards for data link layer.

UNIT 4 MAC SUB LAYER AND NETWORK LAYER 9 Hrs. MAC sub layer for Standard Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Wireless LAN and broadband wireless.Design issues of

network layer - Routing algorithm - shortest path routing - Distance vector routing - Broadcast routing - Congestion control algorithm - Congestion control in virtual circuit and datagram switches - The network layer in the internet - The IP protocol - IP Addresses - Mobile IP - IPv6.

UNIT 5 TRANSPORT LAYER AND APPLICATION LAYER 9 Hrs. The transport layer - service provided to the upper layer - Elements of transport protocols - Addressing - connection establishment - connection release - UDP - TCP

TELNET - E mail - The user agent - Message transfer agent-SMTP - Message access agent: POP and IMAP - File Transfer Protocol - HTTP - SNMP - VOIP.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Andrew S Tanenbaum “Computer Networks” 5th Edition. Pearson Education/PH I/2011. 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data Communications and Networking” Fourth Edition, Mc GrawHill HIGHER Education 2007. 3. Michael A.Gallo, William Hancock.M, Brooks/Cole Computer Communications and Networking Technologies,2001 4. Richard Lai and Jirachief pattana, “Communication Protocol Specification and Verification”, Kluwer Publishers, Boston, 1998. 5. Pallapa Venkataram and Sunilkumar S.Manvi, “Communication protocol Engineering”, PHI Learning, 2008


PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1307 EMBEDDED PROCESSORS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES

This course shall impart

All aspects of the design and architectural development of embedded processors for real time applications. The design, instruction set and applications of PIC microcontroller.

The basics of ARM processor and DSP processors

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PIC MICROCONTROLLERS 9 Hrs.

Introduction to PIC - Evaluation of hardware architectures - Princeton architecture - Von Neumann architecture- Harvard architecture - SHARC - RISC Vs CISC - Features of PIC - instruction parallelism- Architecture of PIC 16F887- Pin Configuration - Addressing modes - Instruction set - Simple arithmetic and logical Programs.

UNIT 2 PIC ONCHIP PERIPHERALS 9 Hrs. Memory - Core SFR - Interrupts - I/O Ports-Timers - CCP modules - Capture Mode - Compare Mode-PWM Mode - Serial communication module - USART - SPI interface - I2C interface Analog Comparator, ADC.

UNIT 3 APPLICATIONS USING PIC 9 Hrs.

Assembly & C programming - Compilers - Assemblers - Directives - Switches & Push buttons - Relay- LEDs - Interfacing seven segment displays - LCD interfacing - Keypad Interfacing, Timer Applications- Case study Temperature monitoring System - Case study Digital Clock.

UNIT 4 ARM PROCESSOR 9 Hrs.

ARM family design - Registers - Pipeline organization 3 stage & 5 stage - Exceptions - Interrupts - Core extensions - ARM processor families - ARM7 TDMI architecture - Memory hierarchy - Advantages of Thump instructions.

UNIT 5 DSP PROCESSORS 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Applications Overview -fixed and floating point - Functional Diagram of TMS320C54XX- Bus structure - Barrel Shifter - MAC unit - Memory - On-chip peripherals - Functional diagram of ADSP 218X - DAG Unit-Memory architecture.


1. Danny Causey, Rolin McKinlay, Muhammad Ali Mazidi , “PIC Microcontroller and Embedded Systems : Using assembly and C for PIC 18 1st Edition “- Pearson Education.

2. Andrew Sloss, Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, “ARM System Developer's Guide: Design ing and Optimizing System Software” - Elsevier.

3. B Venkataramani M Bhaskar, “Digital Signal processors Architecture, Programming and Applications” - Tata McGrawHill Second Edition.

4. John Peatman, “Design with PIC microcontrollers” - Pearson Education. 5. www.microe.com.

6. www.analog.com.

7. www.ti.com.

8. www.dspguide.com.






SEC1309 MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart basic knowledge about 8051 and PIC microcontrollers.

To introduce about microcontroller interfacing with external systems. To provide basics of 8051 and PIC programming with the knowledge of instructions and interfacing chips.

UNIT 1 ARCHITECTURE OF 8051 9 Hrs.

Comparison of Microprocessor and Microcontroller - Block diagram of Microcontroller -Architecture of 8051-Pin details of 8051 - Memory Organization of 8051 - Special function registers - Interfacing of external Memory- I/O Ports- Oscillator and Clock - Timer - Interrupts - Serial Port.

UNIT 2 INSTRUCTION SET OF 8051 8 Hrs.

Addressing modes of 8051- Instruction set of 8051 - Classification of 8051 Instructions - Data transfer instructions - Arithmetic Instructions - Logical instructions -Branching instructions - Bit Manipulation Instructions - Simple programs with 8051.

UNIT 3 PIC MICROCONTROLLER 10 Hrs.

PIC Microcontrollers and Instruction Set: PIC Micro-controllers - overview; features, PIC-18Fxxx architecture, file selection register, Memory organization, Addressing modes, Instruction set, Interrupt handling. PIC -18Fxxx - Reset, low power operations, oscillator connections, I/O ports - serial; parallel, Timers, Interrupts, ADC.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM 10 Hrs.

Embedded system- characteristics of embedded system- categories of embedded system- requirements of embedded systems- challenges and design issues of embedded system- trends in embedded system- system integration- hardware and software partition- applications of embedded system- control system and industrial automation-biomedical-data communication system-network information appliances- IVR systems- GPS systems.

UNIT 5 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND TOOLS 8 Hrs.

Software architectures, Round - Robin, Round-Robin with Interrupts, Function Queue Scheduling architecture, Introduction to assembler - Compiler -Cross compilers and Integrated Development Environment IDE, Linker/ Locators, Simulators, Getting Embedded software into target System- Debugging Strategies.


1. Mazidi & McKinlay, “The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems using Assembly and C”, PHI. 2. Myke Predko, “Programming and Customizing the 8051 Micro -controller”, Tata McGraw-Hill edition.

3. R A Gaonkar, “Fundamentals of Microcontrollers and Applications in Embedded Systems (with the PIC18 Microcontroller Family)”, Penram Publishing India.

4. Kenneth Ayala ,”The 8051 Microcontroller”, 3rd Edition,Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004. 5. Kenneth J. Ayala, Dhananjay V. Gadre, “The 8051 Microcontroller & Embedded Systems Using Assembly and C”,

Cengage Learning India Publication.

6. Ajay V Deshmukh, “Microcontrollers: Theory and Applications”, Tata McGraw -Hill, 2005. 7. K.V. Shibu, “Introduction To Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw, 2009.

8. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming, and Design”. (2/e), Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

9. Technical references on www.mikroe.com.

10. Technical references on www.microchip.com.






MICROPROCESSOR, INTERFACING L T P Credits Total Marks

SEC1310 AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3 100

(For EEE)

COURSE OBJECTIVE To enhance the idea of computer architecture, Assembly language programming and interfacing of various peripherals for system design, two different processors such as 8085 and 8086 were incorporated

UNIT 1 8085 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs. 8085 Architecture- Timing Diagram- Interrupts-Addressing Modes- Instruction Formats- Instruction Set-Programming of 8085.

UNIT 2 8086 MICROPROCESSOR 9 Hrs. 8086 Architecture- Maximum and Minimum Mode- Memory Banks- Memory Segmentation- Programming Model - Instruction Set- Programming of 8086.

UNIT 3 PERIPHERALS INTERFACING USING 8085/8086 9 Hrs.

Introduction, memory and I/O interfacing, data transfer schemes, programmable peripheral interface (8255), programmable DMA controller (8257), programmable interrupt controller (8259), Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver transmitter (USART) (8251), programmable counter/interval timer (8254).

UNIT 4 INTERFACING CONCEPTS WITH 8085/8086 9 Hrs. Switches- Matrix Keyboard- interfacing LED, 7 segment LED, LCD, Analog to Digital Converter (ADC), Digital to Analog Converter (DAC), Memory Interfacing (RAM and ROM).

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS USING 8085/8086 9 Hrs.

Stepper motor interfacing with ULN2003- specific angle rotation, Motor speed control, Temperature control system, Traffic light control- 6V relay to control AC Bulb- PWM generation for Single phase controlled rectifier with specific firing angle.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Ramesh Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and applications with 8085”, 5th Edition, Penram International Publishing Pvt Ltd, 2010.

2. D. V. Hall, “Microprocessor Interfacing, Programming and Hardware”, McGraw Hill, 1993. 3. Nagoor Kani A, “Microprocessor (8085) and its Applications”, 2nd Edition, RBA publications.

4. Mathur A.P, “Introduction to Microprocessor”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1311 SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES This course is to provide

An in-depth understanding of different concepts used in a satellite communication system. Detail description about orbital dynamics, Earth segment, space segments and space links Knowledge about link budget calculation and satellite accessing techniques

An overview of satellite applications and networking of satellites


Introduction, Types -Active and Passive Satellite, Frequency allocation, types of Satellite orbits, Kepler’s laws, Definitions of terms for earth-orbiting satellites, orbital parameters Two line elements, Apogee and Perigee heights, Orbit perturbations, Geo stationary orbit, Antenna look angles, Limits of visibility, Sub satellite point and prediction of satellite position, Earth Eclipse of satellite, Sun transit outage, launching orbits - Launch vehicle - expendable and reusable types.

UNIT 2 THE SPACE SEGMENT AND ANTENNAS 9 Hrs. Introduction, The Power supply, Attitude control, Spinning satellite stabilization, Momentum wheel stabilization,

Station Keeping, Thermal control, TT&C subsystem, Transponders, The wide band receiver, The input demultiplexer, the power amplifier, the antenna subsystem. The isotropic radiator and antenna gain, horn antenna, parabolic reflector, double reflector- Cassie grain antenna- Gregorian antenna.

UNIT 3 THE EARTH SEGMENT AND THE SPACE LINK 9 Hrs. Transmit receive earth station subsystems-up converters-High power Amplifier- Receive chain-LNA & LNB.

TVRO Earth station EIRP, Transmission losses, the link budget equation, System noise, Effect of rain,combined uplink and downlink C/N ratio.

UNIT 4 SATELLITE ACCESS AND SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Multiple access techniques- Concepts and types of TDMA, FDMA and CDMA.DBS, VSAT, Remote sensing, Satellite Mobile services, GPS, INMARSAT, INSAT, Video tele conferencing.

UNIT 5 SATELLITE IN NETWORKING 9 Hrs.

Satellite digital transmission and on-board switching, PDH & its limitation, SDH: development, standards, SONET, SDH over satellite, ISDN over satellite. Different viewpoints of satellite networking, IP packet encapsulation, Satellite IP networking, IP multicast over satellite, IP multicast routing, IP multicast security, DVB over satellite (DVB-S).


1. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite communication”, 4th edition - Tata Mc Graw Hill Co.Special Indian print, 2009. 2. Zhili Sun-John, “Satellite Networking Principles and Protocol”, W.& Sons 2005.

3. Timothy pratt & C W. Bostain, “Satellite communication”, Wiley 3rd edition 2006.

4. K.N.Raja Rao, “Fundamentals of Satellite communication”. PHI 2004.






SEC1313 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To know the principles of sampling & quantization.

To understand the various Base Band signaling schemes.

To introduce the basic concepts of digital modulation of baseband signals. To learn the various synchronization schemes.

To discuss about the spread spectrum modulation schemes.

UNIT 1 SAMPLING AND QUANTIZATION 9 Hrs.

Review of Sampling process -Natural Sampling-Flat Sampling - Aliasing - Signal Reconstruction-Quantization - Uniform & non-uniform quantization - quantization noise Bandwidth -Noise trade off-PCM- Noise considerations in PCM- differential pulse code modulation - Delta modulation -Linear prediction - Adaptive Delta Modulation.

UNIT 2 BASEBAND PULSE TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs.

Base band transmission - Wave form representation of binary digits -Matched Filter- Error Rate due to noise - - Nyquist’s criterion for Distortionless Base band Binary Transmission- Inter symbol Interference - Ideal Nyquist channel - Raised cosine channels- Correlative level coding - Baseband M-ary PAM transmission- Equalization - Eye patterns- Companding - A law and µ law- correlation receiver.

UNIT 3 DIGITAL MODULATION TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

Introduction - ASK- FSK - PSK- coherent modulation techniques-BFSK-BPSK-signal space diagram-robability of error-Coherent Quadrature modulation techniques- QPSK-signal space diagram-probability of error- Non coherent modulation techniques-M-ary modulation techniques - Vectorial view of MPSK and MFSK - error performance.

UNIT 4 SYNCHRONIZATION 9 Hrs.

Synchronization: Receiver synchronization - Coherent systems - Symbol and frame synchronization - Network synchronization - Open and closed loop transmitter synchronization - Tracking and acquisition in spread spectrum system.

UNIT 5 SPREAD SPECTRUM MODULATION 9 Hrs.

Pseudo- noise sequences - a notion of spread spectrum - Direct sequence spread spectrum with coherent binary phase shift keying - Signal space Dimensionality and processing gain -Probability of error - Frequency -hop spread spectrum- Use of spread spectrum with code division multiple access.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Simon Haykins, “Communication Systems” John Wiley, 5th Edition, March 2009.

2. Taub. HDL Schilling, G Saha, ”Principles of Communication”3 rd edition,2007.

3. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi, “Digital Communication”, McGraw Hill 5th edition November 6, 2007.

4. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communication, Fundamentals and Application”, Pearson Education Asia, 2nd Edition, Jan. 21,

2001.







SEC1314 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P

Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, E&C and ETCE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge of signal representation in time domain, Fourier transform, sampling theorem, linear time-invariant system, discrete convolution, z-transform, discrete Fourier transform, discrete filter design, finite word length effects and multi-rate signal processing To analyze signal processing and designing a signal processors (digital filters).

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS 12 Hrs. Representation, Characterization and Classifications of Continuous Time (CT) & Discrete Time (DT) signals,

Sampling theorem - Aliasing effect, Operations on DT signals , Convolution, Advantages of DSP over ASP , Classification of CT & DT systems , properties of Discrete time systems-Linearity-Time invariance- causality -stability -Linear time Invariant systems, Difference equation representation of LTI systems-The Z transform- properties of Z transform- Inverse Z transform-System transfer Function.

UNIT 2 DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM (DFT) AND FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM (FFT) 12 Hrs. DFT and its properties, Relation between DTFT and DFT, FFT computations using Decimation in time (DIT)

algorithms and Decimation in frequency (DIF) algorithms, Auto correlation, Cross correlation, and their properties. Realization of Discrete Time System: introduction, Basic Realization block diagram and the signal flow graph, Realization of recursive and non recursive systems - Direct Form I and Form II - Cascade and parallel realization.

UNIT 3 DIGITAL FILTER DESIGN 12 Hrs. Design of Digital Filters: General considerations: causality and its implications, characteristics of practical

frequency selective filter. Design of FIR filter using window method - Rectangular, Hanning and Hamming Windows. Design of IIR filters using Impulse invariant and Bilinear transformation method. Review of Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations, Frequency selective filters: Ideal filter characteristics, low pass, high pass and band pass filters, Properties of IIR and FIR filters

UNIT 4 FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS 12 Hrs. Fixed point and floating point number representations - Comparison - Truncation and Rounding errors -

Quantization noise - derivation for quantization noise power -coefficient quantization error - Product quantization error - Overflow error - Round off noise power - limit cycle oscillations due to product round off and overflow errors - signal scaling.

UNIT 5 MULTIRATE SIGNAL PROCESSING 12 Hrs. Introduction to Multirate signal processing-Decimation-Interpolation- Polyphase implementation of FIR filters for

interpolator and decimator -Multistage implementation of sampling rate conversion- Design of narrow band filters - Applications of Multirate signal processing, Speech compression, Adaptive filter, Musical sound processing, Image enhancement.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John C. Proakis & Dimities G. Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing, Algorithm and Applications”, 4th Edition, PHI, 2009. 2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing”, 2n d Edition, TMH, 1997. 3. B.P.Lathi, “Signal Processing & Linear systems”, Oxford, 2000. 4. Lyons, “Understanding Digital Signal Processing”, Addison Wesley, 1999. 5. Rabiner and Gold, “Theory and Application of Digital Signal Processing”, PHI, 1975. 6. Johny R. Johnson, “Introduction to Digital Signal Processing”, PHI, 7. Oppenhein & Schaffer, “Discrete Signal Processing”, PHI, 1975 8. Salivahanan, “Digital Signal Processing, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2010




DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

SEC1315 AND ITS APPLICATIONS 3 0 0 3 100

(For EEE)

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart basic ideas in signals and systems

To give basic idea of Analog and Digital filter design with various structures of realying it. To learn about the effects of finite word length in signal processing

To learn a DSP controller pertaining to Power Eletronics via Progrmming.

UNIT 1 SIGNALS, SYSTEMS & TRANSFORMS 9 Hrs.

Sampling theorem- Aliasing-Classifications of Signals and Systems - Review of Z transform & Inverse Z Transform-ROC - Time and frequency response analysis using standard test signals ( step and ramp) - Convolution-Correlation -DTFT- DFT- Properties of DFT- FFT computations using Decimation algorithms.

UNIT 2 DESIGN OF INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE FILTER (IIR) 9 Hrs. Design of IIR filters using Impulse invariant and Bilinear transformation method- Prewarping. Review of

Butterworth and Chebyshev approximations- Frequency transformation in analog domain- Filter design using butterwoth and chebyshev- Realization of recursive structures-Direct form-I-Direct form-II-Cascaded-Parallel Form.

UNIT 3 DESIGN OF FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE (FIR) FILTER 9 Hrs.

. Properties of IIR and FIR filters - Filter design using windowing techniques - Hamming, Hanning, Blackman, Rectangular, Triangular windows- Digital filter design using Frequency sampling technique- Realization of Structures for FIR and Linear phase FIR filter- Direct form-Transposed form- Cascaded form .

UNIT 4 FINITE WORDLENGTH EFFECTS 9 Hrs. Finite word length effect- Quantization- Truncation, Rounding-Quantization error- Input quantization error-Coefficient of quantization- Product quantization- Limit Cycle oscillations- Overflow- Signal scaling.

UNIT 5 TMS320C2407 DSP CONTROLLER & PROGRAMMING

FOR POWER ELECTRONICS APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Nomenclature- TMS 320 family overview -Architectural Overview-Central Processing unit - Addressing modes- Event Manager- General purpose timers (GPR)- Full compare Unit (FCU)- Dead band unit- simple programs for PWM generation using GPR and FCU pertaining to Power electronic applications.


1. John G. Proakis & Dimitris G.Manolakis, “Digital Signal Processing - Principles, Algorithms & Applications”, Fourth edition, Pearson education / Prentice Hall, 2007

2. Emmanuel C.. Ifeachor, & Barrie.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second edition, Pearson Education / Prentice Hall, 2002.

3. Alan V.Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer & Hohn. R.Back, “Discrete Time Signal Processing”, Pearson Education, 2nd edition, 2005

4. Andreas Antoniou, “Digital Signal Processing”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001







SEC1316 CMOS VLSI DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, E&C, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To focus on Key elements of semiconductor physics, Predominant CMOS technology and circuit style.

To study challenges of digital VLSI design, Conceptual thinking and design methodology over detailed circuit analysis techniques.

UNIT 1 MOS TRANSISTOR THEORY The MOS transistor-Current Voltage Relations-Threshold Voltage-Second order effects-Capacitances in MOSFET -

Scaling of MOS circuits -Review of CMOS - DC characteristics - Dynamic behavior- Power consumption .

UNIT 2 COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 Hrs.

nMOS depletion load and Static CMOS design - Determination of Pull-up and Pull-down ratio-Design of Logic gates- Sizing of transistors -Stick diagrams-Lay out diagram for static CMOS - Pass transistor logic - Dynamic CMOS design - Noise considerations - Domino logic, np CMOS logic - Power consumption in CMOS gates - Multiplexers - Transmission gates design.

UNIT 3 SEQUENTIAL LOGIC DESIGN 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Static sequential circuits- CMOS static flip-flop - Dynamic sequential circuits -Pseudo static latch- Dynamic two phase flip-flop - clocked CMOS logic - Pipelining - NORA CMOS logic -True single phase clocked logic - Realization of D-FF in TSPC logic.

UNIT 4 SUBSYSTEM DESIGN 9 Hrs.

Introduction-Designing Static and Dynamic Adder circuits - The Array Multiplier - Multiplier structures-Baugh-Wooly - Booth Multiplier - Barrel shifter - Memory structures - SRAM and DRAM design - Design approach of Programmable logic devices - PLA,PAL and FPGA.

UNIT 5 ASIC CONSTRUCTION 9 Hrs.

Physical design - Goals and Objectives - Partitioning methods - Kernighan Lin algorithm - Hierarchical Floor planning - Floor planning tools -input, output and power planning -Min-cut placement, Force directed placement algorithm -Placement using simulated annealing - Greedy channel routing.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Jan M.Rabaey ,“Digital Integrated Circuits” , 2nd edition, September,PHl Ltd. 2000

2. M.J.S.Smith ,“Application Specific Integrated Circuits “, Ist edition,Pearson education. 1997

3. Douglas A.Pucknell,”Basic VLSI design”, PHI Limited, 1998.

4. E.Fabricious, “Introduction to VLSI design”, Mc Graw Hill Limited, 1990.

5. Neil Weste , “Principles of CMOS VLSI design”, Addison Wesley 1998.

6. Wayne Wolf,”Modern VLSI design ‘2nd Edition, Pearson education. 2003

7. Sung-Mo Kang & Yusuf,”CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits- Analysis & Design”, 2nd Edition, MGH.







SEC1317 PRINCIPLES OF EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To impart knowledge about 8 bit microcontroller, PIC microcontroller, comparison of CISC, RISC and Embedded system design.

UNIT 1 8051 MICROCONTROLLER ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs. Comparison of microprocessors and microcontrollers - 8051 architecture - hardware, I/O pins, Ports, Memory, counters, timers, serial I/O interrupts.

UNIT 2 PROGRAMMING OF 8051 9 Hrs. Addressing modes - instruction sets - simple programs with 8051 -I/O Programming.- Timer programming-Serial communication programs- Interrupt programming- Memory programming- Delay Programs.

UNIT 3 RISC EMBEDDED CONTROLLERS 9 Hrs. Comparison of CISC and RISC controllers - PIC 16F877 architecture - memory organization - addressing modes - assembly language instructions- ARM 7 Architecture-Register organization- Modes and states.

UNIT 4 DISTRIBUTED EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN 9 Hrs. Distributed Embedded system - Embedded networking -RS 232 - RS485 - Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) - Universal Serial Bus (USB) - Controller Area Network (CAN)- Ethernet.

UNIT 5 REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Desktop OS versus RTOs - Task management - Task scheduling - Race conditions - Priority Inversion - ISRs and Scheduling - Intertask Communication.


1. Kenneth. J. Ayala, “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming and Apllications’, Penram International, 1996, 2nd Edition.

2. Sriram. V. Iyer, Pankaj Gupta, “Embedded Real Time Systems Programming”, 2004 Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing company limited, 2006.

3. D.P.Kothari, ShriramK. Vasudevan, Subashri.V, Sivaraman Ramachandran, “Analysis of Microcontrollers”, Scientific International Pvt Ltd, MEDTEC, ,1st Edition..

4. Frank Vahid, Tony Givargis, ‘Embedded system Design - A unified Hardware / software Introduction’, John Wiley and Sons,2002.

5. Todd D Morton, ‘Embedded microcontrollers’, Reprint by 2005, Low Price Edition.

6. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi, ‘The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems’, Low price Edition, Second Impression 2006.

7. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded Systems-Architecture, Programming and Design’, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing company limited 2003.

8. Muhammed Ali Mazidi, rolin D.Mckinlay, Dannycauscy, “ PIC microcontrollers and embedded systems using assembly and C”, 1st edition, Pearson,2007.



PART A: 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1318 INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To make students understand that Information theory is concerned with the fundamental limits of communication

and Coding theory is concerned with practical techniques to realize the limits specified by information theory.

UNIT 1 INFORMATION THEORY 12 Hrs.

Information - Entropy, Information rate, classification of codes, Kraft McMillan inequality, Source coding theorem, Code Efficiency and Redundancy. Shannon-Fano coding, Huffman coding, Extended Huffman coding - Joint and conditional entropies, Mutual information -Properties of mutual information. Generalization of Shannon’s first theorem.

UNIT 2 INFORMATION CHANNEL AND INFORMATION CODING 12 Hrs. Discrete memory less channels - BSC, BEC - Channel capacity, Shannon limit. Information Channels,

Probability relations in a channel, Apriori and Aposteriori Entropies, Mutual Information, Noiseless and Deterministic channels, Cascaded channels, Channel Capacity, Conditional Mutual Information, Source Coding, Lossless coding for discrete-valued sources, Discrete memory less source (DMS), Discrete stationary source.

UNIT 3 BLOCK CODES 12 Hrs. Block Codes: Introduction to block codes, A Galois field primer, Linear block codes, Binary linear block code

decoding & performance analysis -Soft-decision decoding- Hard-decision decoding -Comparison between hard & soft decision decoding, Nonbinary block codes -Reed-Solomon (RS) codes, Encoding RS codes, Decoding RS codes, Space-time block codes: multipath fading channels, diversity techniques, spatial/ temporal diversity.

UNIT 4 CONVOLUTIONAL CODES 12 Hrs. Convolutional Codes: Linear convolutional codes & their descriptions, Transfer function representation &

distance properties, Decoding convolutional codes, Soft-decision MLSE, Hard-decision MLSE, The Viterbi algorithm for MLSE, Performance of convolutional code decoders -Soft-decision decoding performance - Hard-decision decoding performance.

UNIT 5 LDPC AND TCM 12 Hrs.

Turbo & Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) Codes: Turbo codes, PCCC with interleaving & iterative decoding, Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding & decoding.Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM): Introduction- Trellis coding with higher order modulation, Set partitioning, Trellis coded modulation (TCM), TCM decoding and performance.

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John Proakis & Masoud Salehi, “Digital Communications”, 5th edition, by, McGraw- Hill, 2008.

2. Abrahamson. N, “Information Theory and coding”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1963

3. Gallagar. R.G., “Information theory and reliable communication”, Wiley New York, 1968

4. Richard.E.Balhut, “Principles of Practices of Information Theory”, Addison Wesley Pub.Co., 1987.







SEC1320 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, , E&C, CSE and IT) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the basics of Embedded System.

To explain the various development tools in embedded System.

To get a knowledge in embedded programming and acquire a knowledge in embedded system application

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEM 8 Hrs. Embedded system- characteristics of embedded system- categories of embedded system- requirements of

embedded systems- challenges and design issues of embedded system- trends in embedded system- system integration- hardware and software partition- applications of embedded system- control system and industrial automation-biomedical-data communication system-network information appliances- IVR systems- GPS systems.

UNIT 2 EMBEDDED SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT AND TOOLS 8 Hrs. Software architectures, Round - Robin, Round-Robin with Interrupts, Function Queue Scheduling architecture,

Introduction to assembler - Compiler -Cross compilers and Integrated Development Environment IDE, Linker/ Locators, Simulators, Getting Embedded software into target System- Debugging Strategies.

UNIT 3 EMBEDDED NETWORKING 9 Hrs. Embedded Networking: Introduction, I/O Device Ports - Serial Bus communication protocols- RS232 standard -

RS485 - CAN Bus - RS485 - Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) - Inter-Integrated Circuits (I2C) - PC Parallel port communication Protocols -Bluetooth-network using ISA, PCI- Wireless and Mobile System Protocols.

UNIT 4 EMBEDDED PROGRAMMING 10 Hrs. Programming in assembly language (ALP) vs High Level Language - C Program Elements:- Macros and functions,

Use of Date Types, Structure, Pointers, Function Calls - Concepts of Embedded Programming in C++-Objected Oriented Programming, Embedded Programming in C++,‘C’ Program compilers - Cross compiler - Optimization of memory needs-Java programming advantages, disadvantages and J2ME concept.

UNIT 5 EMBEDDED SYSTEM TESTING AND APPLICATION 10 Hrs.

Introduction to embedded system testing - Types of testing: Unit testing, Regression testing, Functional testing, Coverage tests, Gray box test and performance testing - Embedded applications: Case study of Smart card, Interfacing stepper motor, RFID-system, Application, Tag Reader - Handheld Device - Washing Machine.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. KVKK Prasad, “Embedded / Real Time Systems”, Dreamtech Press, 2005. 2. David Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000. 3. Raj Kamal, ‘Embedded system-Architecture, Programming, Design’, Tata McGraw Hill, 2011. 4. Arnold Berger, “Embedded system design”, CMP books, 1st Edition, 2005

5. Wayne Wolf, “Computers as components”, Morgan Kaufmann publishers, 2nd Edition, 2008. 6. Tammy Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture”, Elsevier, 2006 7. Steve Heath, “Embedded Systems Design”, Second Edition, Elsevier India Pvt.Ltd.,2007. 8. Narayan and Gong, “Specification and design of Embedded System”, Pearson Education, 2nd Edition, 1999.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1321 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the architecture, theory and operation of telecommunication systems, issues

related to telecommunication systems and the services rendered by the system to the end users. On completion of this course, the students will,

Acquire basic knowledge on telecommunication and various signaling related to it Acquire knowledge on traffic in telecommunication systems Acquire knowledge about QoS and various impairments

UNIT 1 BASICS OF TELECOMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. End users, nodes and connectivities, telephone numbering and Routing, use of Tandem switches in Local area

connectivity, Busy Hour and Grade of Service, Simple, Half duplex and full duplex, One-way and two-way circuits, Network topologies, variations in traffic flow, quality of service, Standardization in telecommunication.

UNIT 2 SIGNALLING IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction, purpose of signaling, Defining the functional areas-supervisory signaling, address signaling and

Call Progress-audio and visual. Signaling techniques - conveying signaling information, evolution of signaling subscriber call progress tones and push button codes, compelled signaling, concepts of Link-by-link and end-to-end signaling, effects of numbering on signaling, associated and disassociated channel signaling, signaling in the subscriber loop-background and purpose, metallic trunk signaling - basic loop signaling, reverse-battery signaling, stimulus signaling, functional signaling, Object-oriented signaling.

UNIT 3 TELECOMMUNICATION TRAFFIC 9 Hrs. Unit of Traffic, traffic measurement, a mathematical model, Lost- call systems: Theory, traffic performance, loss

systems in tandem. Queuing systems - Erlang Distribution, probability of delay, Finite queue capacity, systems with a single server, Queues in tandem, delay tables and application of Delay formulae. Traffic Characteristics - arrival distributions, Holding time distribution. Loss Systems - Lost calls cleared, lost calls returning, lost calls Held, lost calls cleared. Overflow Traffic.

UNIT 4 TELECOMMUNICATION SERVICES ENGINEERING 9 Hrs. Introduction, definition for service and service engineering. Telecommunication services

engineering-Telecommunication services on broad band networks - basics of ATM, connection oriented and connectionless services.

UNIT 5 QUALITY OF SERVICE AND TELECOMMUNICATION IMPAIRMENTS 9 Hrs. QoS (voice, data and image) - signal-to-noise ratio, voice transmission, data circuits, video. Basic impairments -

amplitude distortion, phase distortion and noise. Level - typical levels, echo and singing. QoS issues in video transmission - problems and solutions. Protocols for QoS support for audio and video applications - RSVP applications, Real-Time Streaming Protocol Applications and Active Streaming Format, Internet stream protocol (version 2), IP Multicast

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Roger L. Freeman, “Fundamentals of Telecommunications”, John Wiley & Sons, 1999. 2. Kornel Terplan, Patricia Morreale Boca Raton, “The Telecommunications Handbook”, CRC Press LLC, 2000.




SEC1322 CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce security concepts

To provide fundamental understanding about cryptography

To comprehend and apply relevant cryptographic techniques for network security

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs.

Terminologies of Cryptography: Principles of Security - Confidentiality, Authentication, Integrity, Non-repudiation, Access Control, Availability: Types of Attacks - Active and Passive: Classical Encryption Techniques: Substitution Cipher - Caesar Cipher, Play Fair Cipher, Hill cipher, One Time Pad: Transposition Cipher - Rail Fence and Simple Columnar Techniques.

UNIT 2 SYMMETRIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9 Hrs. Symmetric Key Cryptosystems: Comparison of Stream Ciphers and Block Ciphers: Feistel Block Cipher: Block Cipher Modes of Operation: Data Encryption Standard - Details of one round in DES:Advanced Encryption Standard.

UNIT 3 PUBLIC KEY CRYPTOGRAPHY 9 Hrs.

Modular Arithmetic: Euclidean Algorithm: Fermat’s and Euler’s Theorem; Chinese Remainder Theorem: Principles of Public Key Cryptosystems; Key Management - Distribution of Public Keys, Use of Public Key Encryption to Distribute Secret Keys: RSA Algorithm: Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange; Concepts of Elliptic Curve Cryptography.

UNIT 4 SECURITY FUNCTIONS & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Authentication Requirements: Message Authentication Codes - Requirements for MAC, Basic Uses of MAC: Hash Functions - Requirements for a Hash function, Simple Hash function, Basic Uses of Hash Function, MD-5: Kerberos: X.509 Authentication Service – Certificate: E-Mail Security - Pretty good Privacy, S/MIME.

UNIT 5 NETWORK & SYSTEM SECURITY 9 Hrs.

IP Security - IP Security Architecture, Authentication Header, Encapsulating Security Payload, Benefits, Applications; Web Security - Secure Socket Layer, Secure Electronic Transaction - Payment Processing; Firewalls - Design Principles, Characteristics, Types of Firewalls: Antivirus approaches.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography and Network Security”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Education Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2011.

2. William Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security - Principles and Practices”, 4 th Edition, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

3. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Cryptography & Network Security”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2007.

4. Niels Ferguson and Bruce Schneier, “Practical Cryptography”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

5. Niels Ferguson, Bruce Schneier, Tadayoshi Kohno, “Cryptography Engineering- Design Principles and Practical Applications”, Wiley Publishing, Inc, Indiana, 2010.




PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (60%Theory and 40% Numerical)



SEC1402 PROGRAMMING IN HDL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To focus on the basic concept of VHDL, styles and features of verilog HDL.

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS IN VHDL 9 Hrs. Digital system design process - Hardware simulation - Introduction to VHDL - Language elements of VHDL -

Data objects - Data types - Operators - Signal assignments - Inertial delay mechanism - Transport delay mechanism - Variable assignments - Concurrent and Sequential assignments- Delta delay.

UNIT 2 MODELING IN VHDL 9 Hrs.

Data flow modeling - Concurrent Signal Assignment statements - Structural modeling - Component declaration - Component Instantiation - Behavioral modeling - Process statement - wait statement - Conditional and loop statements - Generics and configurations - Examples for modelings.

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Basic concepts - Levels for design description - Module - Delays - Language elements - Compiler directives - value set - data types - Parameters - Expressions - Operands - operators in verilog HDL.

UNIT 4 STYLES OF MODELING 9 Hrs.

Gate level modeling -Primitive Gates- Multiple input and multiple output gates - User Defined Primitives - Combination UDP - Sequential UDP- Data flow modeling - Behavioral modeling - procedural constructs - procedural assignments - conditional and loop statements - Structural Modeling - Examples for modeling.

UNIT 5 FEATURES IN VERILOG HDL 9 Hrs. Tasks- Functions -systems tasks and functions - Verification - Modeling a test bench - timing and delays -

Switch level modeling - state machine modeling - Moore FSM - Melay FSM - Design of memories - Design of microcontroller CPUs.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. J.Bhaskar, “A VHDL Primer”, , Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

2. Douglas L. Perry, "VHDL", McGraw Hill, 2002.

3. J.Bhaskar, “A Verilog HDL Primer”, Prentice Hall of India Limited. 3rd edition 2004

4. Stphen Brown, "Fundamental of Digital logic with VHDL Design", Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.






SEC1403 OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce the principle of light propagation through optical fibers.

To understand signal distortion mechanisms in the fiber.

To introduce optical transmitters and receivers for fiber /free space links and the fiber optic couplers, connectors involved.

To introduce optical network concepts and components involved and its Applications.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL FIBERS 9 Hrs. Basics of optical communication system, light propagation in optical fibers, Optical spectral bands, Advantages of

optical fiber communication over other communication systems, Ray theory and mode theory. Total internal reflection, Acceptance angle, Numerical aperture, phase and group velocity, cutoff wavelength & group delay. Different types of optical fibers, refractive index profiles & mode transmission.

UNIT 2 TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS AND OPTICAL AMPLIFIERS 9 Hrs.

Characteristics of optical fibers: Attenuation due to absorption, scattering & bending, core and cladding loses, Signal Distortion in optical fibers: Intra modal Dispersion: Material & Waveguide dispersion; Intermodal dispersion: MMSI, MMGI & modal noise.

Optical Amplifiers: Basic concepts, Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier, Raman amplifier -principles of operation, amplifier noise, signal to noise ratio, gain, gain bandwidth, intermodulation effects and wavelength range of operation.

UNIT 3 OPTICAL TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs.

Fiber optic Transmitter module. Optical sources- LEDs, LASER diodes- Principles of operation: concepts of line width, phase noise. Optical detectors- PN, P-I-N, Avalanche photodiodes: Principles of operation: concepts of responsivity, sensitivity and quantum efficiency, noise in detection. Fiber optic Receiver module.

UNIT 4 COUPLERS, CONNECTORS AND OPTICAL LINK 9 Hrs.

Couplers: 2x2 coupler, Tap coupler, star coupler, Connectors: Cylindrical ferrule, Biconical Ferrule, Double eccentric, Splices: Fusion splices, Mechanical splices, Multiple splices. Design considerations in optical links, Point to point Links: Link Power budget, Rise Time budget, Analog Links: CNR, Multichannel transmission techniques-Multichannel Frequency Modulation, Subcarrier multiplexing.WDM Concepts and Components.

UNIT 5 OPTICAL NETWORKING PRINCIPLES AND APPLICATIONS. 9 Hrs. FDDI, WDM, SONET/SDH,ATM,IP over WDM, Optical LAN Standards-IEEE802.3,Broad band and select WDM networks, Applications- Military.


1. Gerd Kaiser , “Optical Fiber Communications”, 4 th edition, Sixth reprint, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi,2009.

2. John M. Senior,”Optical Fiber Communications- Principles And Practice”, Third Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.

3. Gerd Keiser, “Optical communications Essentials”, Special Indian Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi,2008. 4. Govind P. Agrawal, “ Fiber-Optic Communication Systems”, Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.

5. Rajiv Ramasamy & Kumar N. Sivarajan, “Optical Networks - A Practical Perspective”, 2 Ed, Morgan Kauffman 2002.






SEC1404 WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the overview of cellular system concept. To understand the concept of GSM and GPRS. To study the various characteristics of WAP and cable replacement devices. To understand the concept and characteristics of 3G and B3G systems.

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. History of wireless communication - Spectrum allocation for wireless communication - Standard bodies for wireless

communication - Evolution of wireless communication starting from 1G to 5G - Cellular system concepts - Circuit switched and Packet switched cellular systems - architecture and operation of cellular systems - Frequency reuse - Channel Assignment(Fixed ,Dynamic, Hybrid).Flat fading and frequency selective fading - Diversity techniques (time, frequency, space) - PCS network architecture - Handoff - inter BS handoff-Inter system handoff - Hard handoff and soft handoff.

UNIT 2 2G AND B2G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Global System for Mobile communications (GSM) - Functional architecture of GSM - Common control channels -

Dedicated control channels -Location tracking and call setup - GSM location update - Short Message Service (SMS) - Network architecture of SMS - Protocol hierarchy of SMS.

Evolving from GSM to General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) - Functional groups of GPRS - Architecture of GPRS - Interfaces of GPRS.

UNIT 3 WAP AND CABLE REPLACEMENT DEVICES 9 Hrs. Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) - WAP model - WAP Gateway - WAP Protocols-Wireless Datagram protocol

(WDP) - Wireless Transport layer security (WTLS)-Wireless Transaction protocol (WTP) - Wireless Session protocol (WSP) - Wireless Application Environment (WAE) - Wireless bearers for WAP.

Functional Architecture, Protocol and technical details of - Bluetooth - Zigbee - Ultra Wide Band (UWB)-IrDA (Infra red Data Association) - Radio Frequency Identification (RFID).

UNIT 4 3G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. 3G Networks - Features and Performance of 3G networks -Frequency allocation for IMT (International

Telecommunications Union) 2000 - IMT 2000 family - Architecture of Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) network - MAC layer-RLC layer-RRC layer - 3GPP release 99 network architecture. Network architecture of Enhanced Data rates for Global Evaluation (EDGE).CDMA 2000 - Physical channels - Radio Interface parameters of CDMA 2000 FDD- Transmission characteristics of CDMA 2000 TDD.

UNIT 5 B3G SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Features, operation and applications of Wi-Fi, WiMax, OFDM, OFDMA, OFDM-IDMA, MIMO, Cognitive Radio, LTE.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Andreas F. Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, 2n d Edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd, 2011. 2. William C.Y. Lee., "Wireless & Cellular Telecommunications", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill.2006. 3. Yibing Lin, "Wireless & mobile Network architecture", Wiley 2002. 4. Tao Jiang, Lingyang Song and Van Zhang, “Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access Fundamentals and

Applications” Taylor and Francis Group, 2010. 5. Yong Soo Cho, Jaekwon Kim, Won Young Yang and Chung G. Kang, “MIMO-OFDM Wireless Communications with

MATLAB”, John Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd, 2010.





SEC1405 RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES Analyze transmission-line circuits at RF and microwave frequencies and Perform Scattering parameter analysis of RF networks and microwave systems and assess the impact of microwave component performances on overall system performance Describe the operation and analyze the performance of basic microwave components and to Design basic microwave components Analyze Assess qualitatively and quantitatively the role of microwave components in the application areas of MIC, MEMS, wireless systems and UWB systems

UNIT 1 MICROWAVE NETWORKS AND COMPONENTS Introduction to microwaves and applications, advantages of microwaves, EM spectrum domain, Review of

Low frequency parameters, salient features of S-matrix, salient features of multiport network, losses in microwave circuits, Waveguide corners, bends and twists. Isolator, Circulator- S-matrix of series element in the transmission line, S-matrix for E-plane Tee junction, S-matrix for H-plane Tee junction, S-matrix for magic Tee junction, S-matrix for directional coupler, Strip lines , Micro strip lines and coplanar waveguides.

UNIT 2 POWER DIVIDERS AND COUPLERS Basic properties of dividers and couplers: three port networks, four port networks, The T junction power

divider: lossless divider, resistive divider, Wilkinson power divider: unequal power division and n- way Wilkinson power dividers, Quadrature hybrid (90°) coupler, Lange couplers, 180° Hybrid coupler, Even and odd mode analysis of the Wilkinson power divider, the quadrature hybrid, and ring hybrid, Filters design by image parameter and insertion loss method.

UNIT 3 MICROWAVE SOURCES MICROWAVE TUBES: Klystron, Reflex Klystron, Magnetron - schematic, Principle of operation, performance,

characteristics and application. MICROWAVE SOLID STATE DEVICES:PIN, Tunnel, Gunn, IMPATT and TRAPATT diodes, their construction and

Principle of operation. UNIT 4 MICROWAVE MEASUREMENTS

Microwave Bench general measurement set up, Measurement Devices and instrumentation: Slotted line, VSWR meter, power meter, spectrum analyser, Network analyser, Measurement of frequency, impedance, Attenuation, power and dielectric constant, measurement of VSWR, insertion loss ,EMI / EMC basics and measurement methods.

UNIT 5 MICROWAVE AND MILLIMETER WAVE SYSTEMS System aspects of antennas-microwave communication systems-the Friis power transmission formula-Microwave

transmitters and receivers-noise characterization of microwave receiver-Frequency multiplexed systems-Radar systems-Millimetre-Wave Radios in Backhaul Networks-The 60 GHz, 70 GHz,80 GHz,90GHz frequency bands and channel sizes , The FCC and NTIA licensing process, Multi GBPS data communication and system requirements.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. David M. Pozar “Microwave Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons - 3rd Edition, 2009. 2. Samuel Y Liao, “Microwave Devices & Circuits”, Prentice Hall of India, 3rd Edition, 2008. 3. Kulkarni M, "Microwave and Radar Engineering", Umesh Publication, 4th ed,2010.. 4. Annapurna Das and Sisir K Das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Inc., 2004. 5. M.M.Radmanesh , “RF & Microwave Electronics Illustrated”, Pearson Education, 2007 6. Robert E.Colin, 2ed “Foundations for Microwave Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 2001 7. Reinhold.Ludwig and Pavel Bretshko “RF Circuit Design”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2006




SEE1101 ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart sound knowledge on the analysis and application of electrical and magnetic circuits.

UNIT 1 D.C. CIRCUITS 10 Hrs. Electrical quantities, Ohm’s Law, Resistors - Series and parallel combinations, Kirchhoff’s laws, Node and Mesh Analysis, Star Delta Transformation.

UNIT 2 MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 7 Hrs. Definition of MMF, Flux and Reluctance - Leakage Factor - Reluctances in Series and Parallel (Series and Parallel Magnetic Circuits) - Analogy of Electric and Magnetic Circuits.

UNIT 3 A.C.CIRCUITS 11 Hrs.

Sinusoidal Functions - RMS(effective) and Average Values - Phasor Representation - J operator - Sinusoidal Excitation Applied to Purely Resistive - Inductive and Capacitive Circuits - RL - RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits- Power and Power Factor - Introduction to Three Phase Systems - Types of Connections, Relationship between Line and Phase Values.

UNIT 4 TRANSIENTS AND RESONANCE CIRCUITS 10 Hrs. Time Domain Analysis - Transient response of RL, RC & RLC Networks with DC Input and Sinusoidal AC input- Series and Parallel resonance - Quality Factor and Bandwidth.

UNIT 5 NETWORK TOPOLOGY 7 Hrs. Network Topology - Basic concepts of Graph Theory, Network Graph, Tree, Incidence & Reduced Incidence Matrices, Cut sets, Tie sets, Cut Set Schedule, Tie set Schedule - Duality and Dual Networks.


1. Mittle B.N., Aravind Mittle, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill", 2nd Edition Sep 2011.

2. Theraja B.L., "Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics", S.Chand & Co., First Multi colour Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2009).

3. Sudhakar & Shyammohan S Palli, "Electrical Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis", Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition, 2009.

4. V.K.Metha & Rohit Metha,” Principles of Electrical and Electronics”, Chand Publications

5. Charles Alexander, Mathew Sadiku,”Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th illustrated, Revised, Edition 2012.

6. Smarajit Ghosh, "Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering", PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2010.

7. Wadhwa C.L., "Basic Electrical Engineering", New Age International, 4th Edition, 2007, Reprint June 2010.

8. Abhijit Chakrabarti, Sudipta nath & Chandan Kumar Chanda, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill, 1st Edition,

2009.

9. Thyagarajan T., "Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering", Sci Tech Publications, 5th Edition, Reprint Jan 2010.




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 30% Theory & 70 % Numerical)



SEE1105 ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, E&C, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand and analyze the magnetic circuit.

To study the fundamental principle of electrical machines using the concepts of electro-mechanical energy conversion.

To learn the principle of operation and performance characteristics of D.C/A.C. Machines and Transformers.

UNIT 1 MAGNETIC CIRCUITS 8 Hrs.

Definition of MMF, Flux and Reluctance - Leakage Factor - Reluctances in Series and Parallel (Series and Parallel Magnetic Circuits) - Electromagnetic Induction - Fleming’s Rule - Lenz’s Law - Faraday’s laws - statically and dynamically induced EMF - Self and mutual inductance - Analogy of Electric and Magnetic Circuits.

UNIT 2 DC MACHINES 10 Hrs. Construction, Principles of operation of DC Machines - Types - EMF Equation - Performance Characteristics, of

Series and Shunt Generators - DC Motor - Torque - Speed - Torque Characteristics of Series and Shunt Motors - Speed Control and Applications -Auto Transformer.

UNIT 3 TRANSFORMERS 10 Hrs.

Constructional Details and Principle of operation of Single Phase Transformer - EMF Equation - Phasor Diagram on No Load and Loaded Transformer - Equivalent Circuit - Open Circuit and Short Circuit Test on Transformer - Regulation and Efficiency.

UNIT 4 INDUCTION MOTORS (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 8 Hrs.

Constructional Details of Three Phase Induction Motor - Slip Ring and Squirrel Cage Rotor- Principle of operation- Torque Equation - Torque / Slip Characteristics - Starters - Applications Introduction to Single Phase Induction Motors - Capacitor Start Capacitor Run Motor -Shaded Pole Motor.

UNIT 5 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES AND SPECIAL MACHINES (QUALITATIVE TREATMENT ONLY) 9 Hrs.

Principles of Alternator - Construction Details - Types Special Machines: Stepper motor- AC and DC Servomotor -Universal Motor - Hysteresis Motor -Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor - Switched Reluctance Motor - Brushless D.C Motor - Construction, Working And Applications.


1. B.L.Theraja & A.K.Theraja, “A Text Book of Electrical Technology, VOl II”, S.Chand & Company Ltd., 2009. 2. J.B. Gupta, “ Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria & Sons, 4th Edition, 2006.

3. R.K. Rajput, “Electrical Engineering” Lakshmi Publications Pvt Limited, 4th Edition, 2008.

4. S.K.Bhattacharya, “Electrical Machines” Tata Mc Graw Hill Company Ltd, 3rd Edition,2008.

5. D.P.Kothari & I.J.Nagrath, “Electrical Machines”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company Ltd, 3rd Edition,2004, Twelfth Reprint.






SEE1106 CIRCUIT THEORY AND NETWORK ANALYSIS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the principles of analysis and synthesis of electrical networks. To impart knowledge on the analysis of two port networks.

UNIT 1 NETWORK THEOREMS (BOTH DC & AC) 12 Hrs. Superposition Theorem - Reciprocity Theorem - Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorem - Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.

UNIT 2 NETWORK FUNCTION AND ITS PARAMETERS 12 Hrs.

Network Functions - Driving Point Impedance - Transfer Functions - Poles and Zeros, Significance of Poles and Zeros - Determination of Network Function of One Port and Two Port Network - Network Parameters - Z,Y, h and ABCD- Conditions for Reciprocity - Parameter Conversion.

UNIT 3 TWO PORT NETWORKS 12 Hrs.

Image Parameters - Iterative Parameter - Image and Iterative Parameters in terms of Open Circuit and Short Circuit Network - Parameters of Important Networks - Lattice Network - T Network ,π Network - Twin Network - Network Conversions - Bartlett’s Bisection Theorem and its Application - Interconnection of Two Port Networks.

UNIT 4 SYNTHESIS OF LC, RL AND RC NETWORK 12 Hrs.

Hurwitz polynomial - Routh Criterion - Positive Real function - Elementary Synthesis Procedure - Properties of LC, RC, and RL Driving Point Functions - Synthesis of LC, RC, RL and RLC Network using Foster and Cauer Forms - Constant Resistance Network - Synthesis of Transfer Admittance and Transfer Impedance with a One ohm Termination.

UNIT 5 FILTERS, ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERS 12 Hrs.

Filters - Constant K - Low Pass Filter - High Pass Filter - Band Pass Filter - Band Stop Filter - m-Derived Filters - Terminating Half Section - Composite Filter, Attenuators-Design of Attenuators, Equalizers -Design of Equalizers.


1. Sudhakar and Shyam mohan Palli, Circuits and Networks; Analysis and Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.

2. John.D.Ryder, Networks Lines and Fields, 2nd Edition, PHI Publications, 2003.

3. Kuo, ’Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 2nd Edition, PHI, 1995.

4. Soni and Gupta,’ Electric Circuits and Analysis’, 5th Edition, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1995.

5. Umesh Sinha, ‘Network Analysis and Synthesis’, 5th Edition, Sathya Prakashan Publishers, 1985.







SEE1107 ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and EIE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the fundamental principles on analysis of Electrical circuits and two port networks.

UNIT 1 D.C. AND AC CIRCUITS 12 Hrs.

Electrical Quantities, Ohm’s Law, Resistors - Series and parallel Combinations, Kirchhoff’s Laws, Node and Mesh Analysis - Sinusoidal Functions - RMS(effective) and Average Values - Phasor Representation - J operator - Sinusoidal Excitation Applied to Purely Resistive - Inductive and Capacitive Circuits - RL - RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits.

UNIT 2 NETWORK THEOREMS (BOTH DC & AC) 12 Hrs. Superposition Theorem - Reciprocity Theorem - Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorem - Maximum power transfer Theorem.

UNIT 3 NETWORK TOPOLOGY 12 Hrs.

Network Topology - Basic concepts of Graph theory, Network Graph, Tree, Incidence & Reduced Incidence Matrices, Cut sets, Tie sets, Cut set schedule, Tie set schedule - Application to network solutions - Duality and Dual Networks.


Network Functions - Driving point Impedance - Transfer Functions- Network Parameters - Z,Y, h and ABCD-Parameter Conversion Parameters of Important Networks - Lattice Network - T Network and π Network - Twin Network -Network Conversions - Bartlett’s Bisection Theorem and its Application - Interconnection of Two Port Networks.

UNIT 5 TRANSIENTS AND RESONANCE CIRCUITS 12 Hrs. Time Domain Analysis - Transient Response of RL, RC & RLC networks with DC Input and Sinusoidal AC Input- Series and Parallel Resonance - Frequency Response - Quality Factor and Bandwidth.


1. Sudhakar and Shyam Mohan Palli, Circuits and Networks; Analysis and Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.


3. Hayt W. H, Jack Kemmerly, Steven Durbin‘”Engineering Circuit Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 8th illustrated edition, 2011.


5. Soni and Gupta,’Electric Circuits and Analysis’, 5th Edition, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1995.








SEE1108 CIRCUIT THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C ) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the fundamental principles on analysis of Electrical circuits.

UNIT 1 D.C. CIRCUITS AND DC TRANSIENTS 14 Hrs. Electrical Quantities, Ohm’s Law, Resistors - Series and Parallel Combinations, Kirchhoff’s Laws, Node and Mesh Analysis, Transient Response of RL,RC,RLC with DC Input

UNIT 2 A.C CIRCUITS AND AC TRANSIENTS 12 Hrs.

Sinusoidal Functions - RMS(effective) and Average Values - Phasor Representation - J operator - Sinusoidal Excitation Applied to Purely Resistive - Inductive and Capacitive Circuits - RL - RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits - Power and Power Factor, Transient Response of RL,RC,RLC with Sine Input

UNIT 3 NETWORK THEOREMS (BOTH DC & AC) 14 Hrs. Superposition Theorem - Reciprocity Theorem - Thevenin’s Theorem - Norton’s Theorem - Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.

UNIT 4 RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS 10 Hrs.

Coupled Circuits - Coefficient of Coupling - Analysis of Coupled Circuits - Single Tuned and Double Tuned Circuits (Qualitative Treatment only), Resonance Circuits - Resonance in Series and Parallel Circuits - Q factor, Bandwidth of Resonant Circuits

UNIT 5 NETWORK TOPOLOGY 10 Hrs.

Network Topology - Basic Concepts of Graph Theory, Network Graph, Tree, Incidence & Reduced Incidence Matrices, Cut Sets, Tie Sets, Cut Set Schedule, Tie Set Schedule - Application to Network Solutions - Duality and Dual Networks.


1. Mittle B.N., Aravind Mittle, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill", 2nd Edition Sep 2005.

2. Theraja B.L., "Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics", S.Chand & Co., First Multi colour Edition, 2006, (Reprint 2009).

3. Sudhakar & Shyammohan S Palli, "Electrical Circuits and Networks Analysis and Synthesis", Tata McGraw Hill, 3rd Edition,2009.

4. Charles Alexander, Mathew Sadiku, ”Fundamentals of Electric Circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill,5th illustrated, Revised, Edition 2012.

5. Smarajit Ghosh, "Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering", PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2nd Edition, 2010.

6. Wadhwa C.L., "Basic Electrical Engineering", New Age International, 4th Edition, 2007, Reprint June 2010.

7. Abhijit Chakrabarti, Sudipta nath & Chandan Kumar Chanda, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill, 1st Edition,

2009.

8. Thyagarajan T., "Fundamentals of Electrical and Electronics Engineering", Sci Tech Publications, 5th Edition, Reprint Jan 2010.







SEE1201 NETWORK THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the principles of analysis and synthesis of electrical networks. To impart knowledge on the analysis of two port networks.


Network Functions - Driving Point Impedance - Transfer Functions - Poles and Zeros, Significance of Poles and zeros - Determination of Network Function of One Port and Two Port Network - Network Parameters - Z,Y, h and ABCD- Conditions for Reciprocity - Parameter Conversion.

UNIT 2 TWO PORT NETWORKS 9 Hrs.

Image Parameters - Iterative Parameter - Image and Iterative Parameters in terms of Open Circuit and Short Circuit Network - Parameters of Important Networks - Lattice Network - T Network and π Network - Twin Network - Network Conversions - Bartlett’s Bisection theorem and its Application - Interconnection of Two Port Networks.

UNIT 3 SYNTHESIS OF LC, RL AND RC NETWORK 9 Hrs.

Network Topology - Basic Concepts of Graph Theory, Network Graph, Tree, Incidence & Reduced Incidence Matrices, Cut Sets, Tie Sets, Cut Set Schedule, Tie Set Schedule - Application to Network Solutions - Duality and Dual Networks.

UNIT 4 FILTERS 9 Hrs.

Filters - Constant K - Low Pass Filter - High Pass Filter - Band Pass Filter - Band Stop Filter - m-Derived Filters - Terminating Half Section - Composite Filter - Design of First Order, Second Order Low Pass, High Pass, Butterworth and Chebyshev Filters.

UNIT 5 ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERS 9 Hrs.

Attenuators - Symmetrical and Asymmetrical - T and Attenuator - Design of Attenuators - Equalizer - Types - Series and Shunt Equalizer - Constant Resistance Equalizer - Types of Simple Four Terminal Equalizers - Full Series Equalizer, Full Shunt Equalizer, Bridged - T Equalizer and Lattice Equalizer - Characteristics of Equalizers.


1. Sudhakar and Shyam mohan Palli, Circuits and Networks; Analysis and Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.



4. Soni and Gupta,’Electric Circuits and Analysis’, 5th Edition, Dhanpatrai and Sons, 1995.








SEE1202 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE,EEE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To impart knowledge on the concepts of Electro-magnetic field which is essential for understanding the working principle, design and analysis of Electrical machines and Systems.

UNIT 1 ELECTRIC FIELDS 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Concepts of Different Co-Ordinate Systems - Coulomb’s Law, Electric Field Intensity, Electric Field due to Point Charge, Line Charge, Surface Charge and Volume Charge Distributions - Electric Flux Density - Gauss Law - Application of Gauss Law - Electric Potential - Potential Gradient - Divergence and Divergence Theorem - Poisson’s and Laplace equation.

UNIT 2 CONDUCTORS AND DIELECTRICS 9 Hrs.

Field due to Dipoles - Dipole Moment - Boundary Conditions at Dielectric and Conductor Surfaces - Capacitor and Capacitance of a System of Conductors - Energy Stored and Energy Density - Capacitance due to Spherical Shell, Coaxial cable and Two Wire Transmission Line - Electrostatic Potential Energy Associated with Different Charges.

UNIT 3 MAGNETIC FIELDS 9 Hrs.

Current and Current Density - Conduction and Convection Current - Force on a Current Element - Biot-Savart’s law - Force between Current Carrying Conductors - Torque on Closed Conductors - Ampere’s Law-Magnetic Flux Density - Curl and Stokes Theorem - Magnetic Vector Potential - Boundary Condition at the Magnetic surfaces.

UNIT 4 FARADAY’S LAWS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION 9 Hrs. Faradays’ Laws - Self and Mutual Inductance - Inductance of Solenoids, Toroids, Transmission Lines and Cables - Energy Stored and Density in Magnetic Circuits.

UNIT 5 MAXWELL’S EQUATION AND ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 9 Hrs.

Concept of Displacement and Conduction Current - Modified Ampere’s Circuital Law - Maxwell’s Equations in point and Integral Forms - Wave Equations - Plane Waves in Free Space - Polarization - Poynting’s Theorem and Poynting Vector and its Significance - Energy in Electromagnetic Field.


1. K.A. Gangadhar, “Electromagnetic Field Theory (Including Antenna Wave Propagation”, Khanna Publisher New Delhi, 2009.

2. Karl.E.Lonngren, Sava.V.Savov, “Fundamentals of Electromagnetics with MATLAB”, PHI, 2005.

3. William Hayt, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, Tata McGraw - Hill, New York, 7th Edition, 2006,

4. R.Meenakumari & R.Subasri, “Electromagnetic Felds”, New Age International Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2007.

5. E.C.Jordan & K.G.Balmain, “Electromagnetic Waves & Radiating Systems”, Prentice - Hall, 2006.




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEE1203 CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, ETCE, ECE, EIE and E&C) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study and familiarize the basic concepts of system design and analysis of system in different domains To analyse the time response of system in steady state

To impart knowledge about stability analysis and design of compensators

UNIT 1 SYSTEM CONCEPTS 14 Hrs. Types of System - Open Loop Systems, Closed Loop Systems, Basic Elements in Control System - Mathematical

Models of Physical System: Differential Equation- Transfer Functions of Single Input, Single Output and Multi Variable Systems - Simple Electrical Networks, Electrical Analogous of Mechanical Translational and Rotational System - D.C and A.C Servomotor - Mechanical System- Translational and Rotational System - Block Diagram Reduction Techniques - Signal Flow Graphs - Mason’s Gain Formula.

UNIT 2 TIME RESPONSE ANALYSIS OF CONTROL SYSTEMS 10 Hrs. Standard Test Signals -Time Response of First and Second Order System, Time Domain- Specifications - Generalized Error Series - Steady State Error - Static and Dynamic Error Constants.

UNIT 3 STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM 12 Hrs. Characteristics Equation - Location of Roots in S Plane for Stability - Routh Hurwitz Criterion - Root Locus Analysis - Effect of Pole Zero Additions on Root Locus - Nyquist Stability Criterion.

UNIT 4 FREQUENCY RESPONSE ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Frequency Response of the System - Correlation between Time and Frequency Response - Gain and Phase Margin - Bode Plot - Nyquist Plot (Polar Plot).

UNIT 5 COMPENSATION AND CONTROLLERS 12 Hrs. Introduction to compensation networks - Lag, Lead and Lag Lead networks - Effect of providing Lag, Lead and Lag-Lead compensation on system performance and design using bode plot - P, PI, PID Controllers design.


1. I.J.Nagarath and M.Gopal, “Control System Engineering” New Age International (p) Limited Publishers, 2nd edition, 2009. 2. Kausuhio Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Prentice Hall of India PVT. Ltd, 5th edition.

3. Richard Dorf, “Modern Control Systems”, Pearson Education Ltd, 11th Edition 2009.

4. M.N. Bandyo padhyay, “Control Engineering, Theory and Practice” PHI, 4th print, 2006.

5. N.K.Sinha, “Control Systems”, New Age International Private Limited Publishers, 3rd Edition, 1998, reprint 2004. 6. A.Nagoorkani, “Control System”, RBA Publications, 2nd edition, repnit 1998.

7. U.A.Bakshi and S.C.Goyal, “Control System Engineering”, Technical Publication, 2nd Revised reprint 2007.







SEE1204 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMERS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the fundamental principles of Electrical machines using the concepts of electro-mechanical energy conversion. To acquaint the constructional details, the principle of operation and prediction of performance characteristics of D.C Machines and Transformers.

To study about the various losses and different testing methods to determine the performance of D.C Machines and Transformers.

UNIT 1 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL CONVERSION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Principles of Energy Conversion - Field Energy and Co-energy in Linear Systems - Energy Flow -

Losses and Efficiency - Singly and Multiply Excited Magnetic Field Systems - Torque Production in Rotating Machines - General Analysis of Electromechanical system

UNIT 2 D.C. GENERATORS 9 Hrs. Constructional Details - Principle of Operation - E.M.F Equation - Methods of Excitation - Types - No load & Load

characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound generators - Armature Reaction, Effects, Methods of Compensation - Commutation : Methods of Improving Commutation - Applications.

UNIT3 D.C. MOTORS AND TESTING OF D.C. MACHINES 9 Hrs.

Principle of Operation - Back E.M.F & Torque Equation - Characteristics of Series, Shunt & Compound Motors - Starters - Speed Control of DC Series & Shunt Motors - Electrical Braking - Testing of DC Machines - Brake Test, Swinburne’s Test & Hopkinson’s Test .

UNIT 4 TRANSFORMERS 9 Hrs. Principle of Operation - Constructional Details - E.M.F. Equation - Transformation Ratio - Transformer on No Load

- Parameters Referred to HV / LV Windings - Equivalent Circuit - Transformer On Load - Phasor diagram - Regulation - Testing of Transformer - Open Circuit and Short Circuit Test - All day Efficiency - Sumpner’s Test.

UNIT 5 SPECIAL TRANSFORMERS AND THEIR APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Auto Transformer - Saving of copper in comparison with Two winding Transformer - Parallel Operation of Single

Phase Transformers - Construction of Three Phase Transformer - Transformer Connections - Scott connection - Three Phase to Single Phase Transformer conversion - Elementary Ideas on Instrument Transformers and Toroidal Transformer.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. A K Theraja & B L Thereja, “A Text book of Electrical Technology “ ( Vol II) S Chand & Co- 23 rd Edition 2008. 2. I J Nagrath and D P Kothari , “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.. 3. R.K.Rajput, “Electrical Machine”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition 2008. 4. J.B. Gupta, “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Reprint 2010. 5. S K Sen, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Reprint 2002. 6. Theodore Wildi, Electrical Machines, Drives and Power Systems, Pearson, 6th Ed, 2007. 7. Irving Kosow, Electric Machinery and Transformers, Pearson, 2nd Ed, 2007. 8. Albert E. Clayton and NN Hancock, “The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”, Oxford and

IBH.Publishing Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.


PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

(Distribution may be 70% Theory and 30% Numerical)



SEE1205 AC MACHINES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on construction and performance of salient and non - salient type synchronous generators.

To study the principle of operation and performance of synchronous motor.

To familiarize on performance, starting and speed control of three-phase induction motors. To study the working principle of various single-phase induction motors.

UNIT 1 SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS 10 Hrs.

Constructional features - EMF Equation - Armature Reaction - Synchronous Reactance - Voltage Regulation - Synchronous Impedance Method - MMF and Potier Methods - Synchronising & Parallel Operation - Two Reaction Theory - Determination of Xd and Xq (Slip test).

UNIT 2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Operation - Starting Methods - Effect of Increased Load with Constant Excitation - Effect of Changing Excitation on Constant Load - Different Torque - Power flow equation - Phasor diagram - V and inverted V curves - Hunting and suppression methods.

UNIT 3 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Construction - Types of 3- Phase Induction Motors - Rotating Magnetic Fields - Torque Equation - Condition for Maximum Torque - Slip, Torque Slip Characteristics - Power Stages in Induction Motors - Losses and Efficiency - Plugging - Cogging and Crawling - Concept of Induction Generator.

UNIT 4 CIRCLE DIAGRAM AND CONTROL METHODS OF 3- PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR 9 Hrs. No load and Blocked rotor tests - Equivalent circuit - Construction of Circle diagram - Starting methods - Speed control - Double cage Induction motor.

UNIT 5 SINGLE PHASE AC MOTORS 8 Hrs. Double Field Revolving Theory - Types of Single Phase Induction Motor - Equivalent Circuit (Qualitative) - Repulsion Motor - Series Motor - Universal motor, AC Servomotor, Linear Induction Motor, Hysteresis motor.


1. A K Theraja & B L Thereja, “A Text book of Electrical Technology ( Vol II)”, S Chand & Co- 23 rd Edition 2008.:

2. I J Nagrath and D P Kothari, “Electrical Machines”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2007.

3. R.K.Rajput, “Electrical Machine”, Laxmi Publications, 5th Edition 2008.

4. J.B. Gupta, “Theory and Performance of Electrical Machines”, S.K.Kataria and Sons, Reprint 2010

5. S K Sen, “Electrical Machinery”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, Reprint 2002 6. A Fitzgerald, C Kingsley, S Umans, Electrical Machinary, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private Limited, 6th Ed, 2002

7. M.G.Say,”Performance & Design A.C. Machines” CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2005




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 70% Theory and 30% Numerical)



SEE1206 TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand electric power transmission system.

To understand electric power distribution system.

Types and methods of power transmission and distribution.

To measure performance of transmission and distribution system.

UNIT 1 STRUCTURE OF ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Single Line Diagram - Distributors with Concentrated and Uniform Loading - DC Two Wire and Three Wire Systems - AC Distributors - Radial and Ring Distributors - Interconnectors - Electrical Layout & Bus Bar Arrangement in Generating Sub Stations and Bulk Power Substation - Kelvin’s Law for the Design of Feeders and its Limitations.

UNIT 2 TRANSMISSION LINE PARAMETERS 12 Hrs.

Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance of Single Phase and Three Phase (Including Double Circuits) Transmission Lines - Stranded and Bundled Conductors - Symmetrical and Unsymmetrical Spacing - Transposition - Application of Self and Mutual GMD - Skin and Proximity Effect - Inductive Interference with Neighboring Circuits - Corona - Factors Affecting Corona - Advantages and Disadvantages of Corona - Methods of Reducing Corona Effect.

UNIT 3 PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES 12 Hrs. Equivalent Circuits for Short, Medium (π and T circuits) and Long Lines - Efficiency and Regulation - Attenuation

Constant, Phase Constant, Surge Impedance and Surge Impedance Loading - Real and Reactive Power Flows in Lines -

Power Circle Diagrams for Receiving and Sending Ends - Voltage Control of Lines - Ferranti Effect UNIT 4INSULATORS,

CABLES AND OVERHEAD LINES 12 Hrs.

Insulators - Types and Construction - Voltage Distribution in String Insulator - string Efficiency - Methods of Improving String Efficiency - Cables - types - Capacitance of Cables - Insulation Resistance - Dielectric Stress and Grading - Dielectric Loss - Thermal Characteristics - capacitance of Three Core Cables - Stress and Sag Calculations - Effect of Wind and Ice - Supports at Different Levels - stinging Chart.

UNIT 5 RECENT TRENDS IN TRANSMISSION 12 Hrs.

Extra High Voltage AC (EHVAC) Transmission - Need, Advantages, Limitations -High Voltage Direct current Transmission (HVDC) - Terminal Equipment for HVDC Systems - Classifications, Advantages, Limitations - Economic Distance for HVDC - Comparison of EHVAC and HVDC Transmission -Interconnection of HVDC & AC Systems - Introduction to FACTS Technology -SVC,TCSC,STATCOM ,UPFC.

Max. 60 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. C. L . Wadhwa, “Electrical Power Sytems”, 6th edition, New Age International (P) Limited, New Delhi, 2010. 2. V. K. Metha & Rohit Metha,”Principles of Power System”, S. Chand, 3rd edition, 2006. 3. S. L. Uppal, Electrical Power, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2006. 4. Chakrabarti. A, Soni M I, Gupta P V, “Textbook on power system engineering”, Dhanpat Rai & Co,2008. 5. S.N.Singh, “Electric Power Generation, Transmission & Distribution”, Prentice Hall of India, New Edition, New Delhi, 2008. 6. Soni, Bhatnagar and Gupta,” Electrical Power”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 2006.




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 60% Theory and 40% Numerical)



SEE1301 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge in designing of State Space Analysis

To have an clear understanding in Digital Data Systems

To have an exposure in different stability analysis of Nonlinear Systems

UNIT 1 STATE SPACE MODEL 11 Hrs. Introduction to State Space, State Variables, Physical Variables, Phase Variables-Matrices, Eigen Values and

Eigen vectors - Diagonalization, Canonical and Jordan forms - State Space Models from Differential Equations - Conversion of State Variable Models to Transfer Function

UNIT 2 MATHEMATICAL ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Computation of State Transition Matrix - Laplace Transformation Method, Canonical Transformation - Cayley Hamilton Theorem-Solution of State Equation.

UNIT 3 STATE FEEDBACK AND OBSERVERS 10 Hrs. Concepts of Controllability and Observability - Design of State Space Feedback using Pole Placement Technique-State Observers.

UNIT 4 SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS 15 Hrs.

Introduction to Digital Control - Discrete Time Signals - Sampling Process - Analysis of Sampling Process in the Frequency Domain - Spectral Representation - Analyzing - Shannon’s Sampling Theorem - Reconstruction of Sampled Signals using Hold Circuits - Zero Order Hold - its Representation - Bode Plot of Hold Circuit - Z - Transform of Sampled Signals - Theorems on Z- Transform - Inverse Z-transform - Mapping between s and z Planes - Pulse Transfer Function Impulse Response - Closed Loop Operation - Characteristic Equations - Jury’s Stability Criterion.

UNIT 5 NONLINEAR SYSTEMS 15 Hrs. General Properties of Non-Linear Systems - Describing Function Method - On / Off, Dead Zone, Saturation and

Hysteresis Non Linearities - Determination of Limit Cycle by Describing Function - Stability of Limit Cycle - System Stability in the Sense of Lyapunov - Lyapunov’s Direct Method - Stability and Instability Theorems - Application of Lyapunov Method for Linear Systems - Basic Concepts of Phase Plane Method.


1. K.Ogata, “Modern control Engineering”, 5th Edition. Prentice Hall India, New Delhi. 2010.

2. B.C.Kuo, “Automatic Control Systems”, Phi learning Pvt Ltd, 9th Edition, 2009.

3. Philips C.L., & John Parr “Feedback Control Systems” 5th Edition, Prentice Hall International. 2010. 4. Naresh K. Sinha, “Control Systems’’, New Age International Ltd., Reprint 2004.

5. Stanley M.Shinners, “Modern Control System Theory and Design”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. 1998.

6. M.Gopal, “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Ltd., New Delhi, 2012.

7. Roy Choudhry, “Modern Control Engineering” Phi Learning, 2009







SEE1302 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge in modelling of power system elements To implement Numerical methods in power flow problem To analyze the system in various faulted conditions.

To have a knowledge in stability and security of power systems

UNIT 1 POWER SYSTEM MODELING 14 Hrs.

Need for system analysis in planning and operation of power system - per phase analysis of symmetrical three-phase system. General aspects relating to power flow, short circuit and stability analysis - Modeling of generator, load, shunt capacitor, transmission line, shunt reactor for short circuit, power flow and stability studies - per unit representation - bus admittance by analytical method and direct inspection method.

UNIT 2 POWER FLOW ANALYSIS 10 Hrs.

Problem definition - bus classification - derivation of power flow equation - solution by Gauss Seidel and Newton Raphson methods by polar form - P V bus adjustments for both methods - computation of slack bus power, line flow and transmission loss.

UNIT 3 SYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Need for short circuit study - Bus impedance matrix formation - Symmetrical short circuit analysis using Z-bus. - computations of short circuit capacity, post fault voltage and current.

UNIT 4 UNSYMMETRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Symmetrical component transformation - sequence impedances.- Sequence Networks - unsymmetrical short

circuit analysis for single line fault , line to line fault and double line to ground fault using Z-bus - computations of short circuit capacity, post fault voltage and current.

UNIT 5 STABILITY & SECURITY ANALYSIS 12 Hrs. Distinction between steady state and transient state - Concepts of Stability & Security - Swing equation-solution to

swing equation - step by step method - power angle equation - equal area criterion - critical clearing angle and time. Stability analysis of single machine connected to infinite bus by modified Euler’s method - Multi-machine stability analysis using Runge Kutta method.


1. John J. Grainger and Stevenson Jr. W.D., “Power System Analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Kothari .D.P and Nagarath .I.J, , “Power system Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008. 3. Stagg, G.W. and El-Abaid, A. H. “Computer Methods in Power System Analysis”, McGraw-Hill International Book

Company,1 994.

4. Nagarath, I.J., and Kothari, D.P., “Modern Power System Analysis”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2003.

5. Hadi Saadat, “Power system Analysis”, 2n d Revised Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company, 2009.







SEE1303 POWER GENERATION AND UTILIZATION L T P

Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To Understand the general power generation concepts To Understand the general electrical utilization concepts

To study the performance and efficiency of power generation

UNIT 1 CONVENTIONAL POWER PLANTS 10 Hrs.

Layout and working of diesel, steam, low and high head power plants-pumped storage plants-principle of nuclear power generation - types and layouts of nuclear reactors- boiling water reactor- advanced gas cooled reactor- fast breeder reactor - reactor control - waste disposal.

UNIT 2 ECONOMICS OF GENERATION 8 Hrs. Introduction-Definitions-Load Duration Curve-Number and size of Generator Units-Base Load and Peak Load Plants-Cost of Electrical Energy-Fixed cost-Running Cost of Energy-Tariff or Charge to Consumer

UNIT 3 ILLUMINATION 10 Hrs.

Nature of radiation - definition-laws-lighting calculations-polar curves-Rousseau construction- design of Illumination Systems-Flood Lighting and Calculations-Street Lighting-Classification of Light Sources-Incandescent lamps- gas discharge lamps- sodium vapour, mercury vapour, Fluorescent Lamps and LED lamps.

UNIT 4 HEATING AND WELDING 8 Hrs. Introduction - methods of heating - design of heating element- resistance, inductance, arc furnaces- high freq. dielectric heating- welding - types- resistance, arc welding- construction and its characteristics.

UNIT 5 ELECTRIC TRACTION 9 Hrs. Introduction - requirements of an ideal traction Train Movement-Speed-Time Curve- mechanics of train movement

- tractive effort calculations- Power and energy output from driving axles-Traction motors and its Characteristics-Traction motor control-Electric braking-Current collection systems

Max. 45 Hours


1. C.L.Wadhwa, “Generation, Distribution & Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi, 1993.

2. Uppal.S.L. “Electrical Power”, Khanna Publishers, 9th Edition, 2001. 3. Starr A.T., “Generation, Transmission and Utilisation of Electric Power”, ELBS, 1978.

4. Soni Bhatnagar & Gupta, “ A Course in Electrical Power”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons 1996

5. Openshaw Taylor, “Utilisation of Electrical Energy”, Oriented Longmans Ltd, (Revised in SI Units) 1981, SI Edition.

6. Er.R.K.Rajput, “Utilization of Electrical power”, Laxmi Publications,2006.’







SEE1304 ELECTRICAL MACHINE DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the mmf calculations for air gap and iron paths of rotating machines To design the armature and field for dc machines

To design the core and windings and cooling systems for transformers

To design the stator and rotor for induction machines and synchronous machines

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS OF DESIGN 12 Hrs.

Major considerations in Machine design - Limitations in design - Standard specifications - Electrical Engineering materials - High conductivity materials - Insulating materials - Magnetic circuit calculations - mmf for airgap and iron path - real and apparent flux densities in rotating machines - Choice of specific electric and magnetic loadings.

UNIT 2 DC MACHINES 14 Hrs.

Output equation - Main Dimensions - Choice of number of poles - Armature design - Estimation of number of conductors / turns - Coils armature slots- Conductor dimensions - Slot dimension - Design of field poles and field coil (shunt field) - Design of Commutators and Brushes

UNIT 3 TRANSFORMERS 12 Hrs. Output equation - Design of core and winding of single phase shell and core type transformer and three phase transformers -Temperature rise in transformers - Design of tank, cooling tubes and Ducts

UNIT 4 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MACHINES 12 Hrs. Output equation, Main dimensions, Design of stator, Choice of L/D ratio - Air gap length - Design of rotor - squirrel cage and slip ring rotor.

UNIT 5 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES 10 Hrs.

Output equation - Design of salient pole rotor machine - Dimensions - Short circuit ratio - Effect of Short Circuit ratio - Air gap length - Armature design - Slot dimensions - Rotor design - Design of damper winding - Design of cylindrical rotors


1. A.K.Sawhney, A.Chakrabarti, “A course in Electrical machine Design”, Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New Delhi, 6th Edition, 2006..

2. Albert E. Clayton and NN Hancock, “The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1990.

3. A.Nagoorkani, “Electrical Machine Design”, RBA Publications, 2nd Edition, 2000. 4. R.K.Agarval, “Principles of Electrical Machine Design”, Reprint 2002, S.K.Kataria & Sons, 4th Edition.







SEE1305 POWER ELECTRONICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, ECE, EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the various applications of electronic devices for conversion and control of the electrical power.

UNIT 1 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES 9 Hrs. Overview of V-I characteristics of switching devices - Switching characteristics of Power Diode, BJT power

MOSFETS, IGBT and Thyristor - SCR Protection circuits - Thyristor Turn-ON methods - firing circuits - Commutation techniques.

UNIT 2 PHASE CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS 10 Hrs. Principle of phase controlled converter operation - single phase half wave converter, semi converter & full

converter with R, RL & RLE load - Freewheeling diode - Inverter operation of full converter - Three phase Semi converter & full converter with RL load.

UNIT 3 DC & AC CHOPPERS 9 Hrs. DC - DC Chopper: Principle of operation of Step down and step up choppers - Control Strategies - One, Two and Four quadrant operation.

AC - AC Chopper: Single phase AC voltage controllers with R & RL load - Multistage sequence control. Single phase step up and step down cycloconverters.

UNIT 4 INVERTERS 9 Hrs. Principle of operation: Single phase half bridge & full bridge voltage source inverters - Three phase Voltage source

inverters (120° and 180° mode) - Single phase current source inverter. PWM techniques: Single pulse PWM, Sinusoidal PWM, Modified sinusoidal PWM and multiple PWM

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS 8 Hrs. SMPS: Flyback and Push Pull - UPS: Redundant and Non-Redundant - HVDC Transmission systems -Single phase full converter fed DC drives - Inverters for standalone photovoltaic systems.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics circuits Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2013

2. P.S.Bimbhra, “Power Electronics”, Khanna Publishers, 4rd Edition, 2003

3. P.C.Sen, “ Power Electronics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company, New Delhi, 1987.

4. M.D.Singh and K.B.Khanchandani, “Power Electronics” TMH, New Delhi, 2nd Edition, 2008.

5. Dubey G.K., Doradla S.R., Joshi A and Sinha R.M., “Thyristorised Power Controllers” - Wiley Eastern Limited 1986. 6. Ned Mohan, “ Power Electronics”, 2nd Edition, 2001.

7. Rashid M.H , Power electronics hank book, Academics press publications., 2nd Edition, 2007




PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (Distribution may be 90% Theory & 10% Numerical)



SEE1306 ELECTRIC DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To understand the operations of electrical machines controlled by power electronic converters and its applications.

UNIT 1 DRIVES CHARACTERISTICS 8 Hrs.

Electric drives - Advantages - choice of electric drive, Speed/Torque Characteristics of various types of loads and drive motors, Classes of motor duty- selection of power rating for drive motors with regard to duty. Thermal model of motor for heating and cooling, Overloading and load variation factors- load equalization.

UNIT 2 DC DRIVE 10 Hrs.

Starting and braking operations of dc motor drive-Speed control of DC motors - Ward Leonard scheme - Drawbacks - Ward Leonard Ilgener scheme - Thyristor converter fed DC Drives: single, two and four quadrant operations. Chopper fed DC Drives: control strategies - single, two and four quadrant operation.

UNIT 3 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 10 Hrs.

Speed control of three phase induction motors: Stator control - Stator voltage, frequency and voltage/frequency control - VSI,CSI and Cycloconverter fed induction motor drives. Rotor control : Rotor resistance control- Static control of rotor resistance using DC Chopper, slip power recovery schemes -Kramer and Scherbius drives

UNIT 4 THREE PHASE SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES 10 Hrs.

Speed control of three phase synchronous motors - types of control , Voltage source and current source converter fed synchronous motors -Cycloconverter fed synchronous motors -Commutatorless DC motor- Effects of harmonics on the performance of AC motors -Closed loop control of drive motors, Marginal angle control and power factor control.

UNIT 5 DIGITAL CONTROL AND DRIVE APPLICATIONS 7 Hrs. Control of electric drives using microprocessor - Selection of drives and control schemes for steel rolling mills, Paper mills, textile mills and cranes.


1. Gopal K. Dubey, “ Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives”, Prentice Hall, 1989.

2. Gopal K. Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2002.

3. Vedam.Subrahmanyam “Electric Drives” Mc graw hill, second edition 2011.

4. Electrical drives by Krishnana(PHI).

5. Control of electrical Drives by w.Leonhard(Springer 2001).

6. Vedam Subramanyam, “Thyristor control of Electric Drives”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi 1991.

7. S.K.Pillai, “ A First Course on Electrical Drives”, New age international Publishers Pvt Ltd,1989,Reprint 2004.

8. Rashid M.H., “Power Electronics circuits Devices and Applications”, Prentice Hall, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2009.

9. B.K.Bose, “Power Electronic & AC drives”, Prentice Hall, 2006.

10. http://ecmweb.com/power-quality/effects-harmonics-power- systems.







SEE1307 SPECIAL ELECTRICAL MACHINES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the concepts of stepper motors and its applications

To study the operating principle and characteristics of switched reluctance motors

To impart knowledge on the fundamental concepts and control of permanent magnet brushless DC motors

To introduce the concepts and control methods of permanent magnet brushless synchronous motors and synchronous reluctance motors.

UNIT 1 STEPPING MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Constructional features, principle of operation, types, modes of excitation, Torque production in Variable Reluctance (VR) stepping motor, Static and Dynamic characteristics, Introduction to Drive circuits for stepper motor, suppressor circuits, Closed loop control of stepper motor- Applications.

UNIT 2 SWITCHED RELUCTANCE MOTORS 9 Hrs.

Principle of Operation, Constructional features, Torque equation, Power Semi Conductor Switching Circuits, frequency of variation of inductance of each phase winding - Control circuits of SRM-Torque - Speed Characteristics, Microprocessor based control of SRM Drive, Applications.

UNIT 3 SYNCHRONOUS RELUCTANCE MOTORS 8 Hrs. Constructional features: axial and radial air gap Motors. Operating principle, reluctance torque - Phasor diagram, Speed torque characteristics, Applications.

UNIT 4 PERMANENT MAGNET BRUSHLESS DC MOTORS 9 Hrs. Commutation in DC motors, Electronic Commutation- Difference between mechanical and electronic commutators-

Hall sensors, Optical sensors, Construction and principle of PMBL DC Motor, Torque and E.M.F equation, Torque-speed characteristics, Power Controllers-Drive Circuits, Applications.

UNIT 5 PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS 10 Hrs. Construction and types, Principle of operation, EMF and Torque equation, Phasor diagram- Torque Speed

Characteristics, Power controllers- Self control, Vector control, Microprocessor based Control, Applications.


1. Miller, T.J.E. “Brushless permanent magnet and reluctance motor drives”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989.

2. Kenjo.T, “Stepping motors and their microprocessor control”, Oxford University Press, 1995.

3. R.Krishnan, “Electric Motor Drives - Modeling, Analysis and Control”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2009.

4. Kenjo.T and Naganori, S “Permanent Magnet and Brushless DC motors”, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1989. 5. B.K. Bose, “Modern Power Electronics & AC drives”, Dorling Kindersley India, 2006.







SEE1401 POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION AND SWITCHGEAR L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To discuss the cause and effect of abnormal operating conditions in a Power system and the protective schemes along with the problems associated with circuit interruptions.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION DRIVES 8 Hrs. Essential requirements of protection - nature and causes of faults - types of faults - effects of faults - zones of protection - protection schemes - CTs and PTs and their applications - Basic relay terminology.

UNIT 2 PROTECTIVE RELAYS 10 Hrs.

Electromagnetic relays - operating principle - torque equation - relay characteristics - over current relay, directional relay, distance relay, differential relay, negative sequence relay, amplitude and phase comparator of over current static relays, duality between comparators. Microprocessor based over current relay.

UNIT 3 APPARATUS PROTECTION 9 Hrs. Protection of Generator- stator & rotor protection - Large Motor protection. Transformer protection - Bus bar protection - Transmission line protection.

UNIT 4 THEORY OF ARC QUENCHING 9 Hrs. Arcing phenomena - theory and methods of arc quenching - recovery voltage - restriking voltage - RRRV - resistance switching - current chopping - capacitive current breaking - Characteristics of fuses - HRC fuse.

UNIT 5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS 9 Hrs. Classification of circuit breakers - air circuit breakers - oil circuit breakers - vacuum circuit breaker - SF6 circuit breakers - selection of circuit breakers - rating of circuit breakers - testing of circuit breakers.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Sunil S.Rao “Switchgear and protection”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 2008.

2. Badri Ram and D.N.Vishwakarma “Power System Protection and Switchgear”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing, new Delhi, 2005.

3. S.L.Uppal, “Electrical Power”, Khanna publishers, New Delhi, 1995.

4. Soni, Gupta and Bhatnagar “A Course in Electrical power”, Dhanpat Rai&sons, New Delhi, 2010.

5. TSM Rao, “Digital Numerical Relays”, Tata McGraw Hill publishing, New Delhi, 2005.

6. B.Ravindranath and N.Chander, “ Power System Protection and Switchgear”, New age International (P) Ltd, 2005.

7. Dr.N.Veerappan and Dr.S.R.KrishnaMurthy, “Power System Switchgear and Protection”,S.Chand,2009.







SEE1402 HIGH VOLTAGE ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on the concepts of over voltages, dielectric breakdown mechanisms and to emphasis the need for generation, measurement and testing of High voltages and currents.

UNIT 1 OVERVOLTAGES IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Causes of Over voltages Theory and Mechanism of Lightining phenomenon - Overvoltage due to Switching Surges - Protection against over voltages - Reflection and Refraction of Travelling waves - Insulation Coordination.

UNIT 2 CONDUCTION AND BREAKDOWN IN DIELECTRICS 9 Hrs.

Ionization of gases and current growth - Townsend’s criterion for breakdown -Streamer theory of breakdown in gases. Paschen’s Law - Vaccum breakdown - Various mechanisms of breakdown in liquid dielectrics -Various processes of breakdown in solid dielectrics.

UNIT 3 GENERATION OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS 9 Hrs. Generation of high DC voltages: Rectifier, Voltage doubler circuits, Cockroft Walton voltage multiplier circuit, Van

de Graffe generator - Generation of high AC voltage: cascaded transformers, resonant transformers- Generation of high frequency a.c. high voltage - Generation of impulse voltages: Standard impulse waveshapes, Marx Circuit - generation of switching surges - generation of impulse current - tripping and control of impulse generators.

UNIT 4 MEASUREMENT OF HIGH VOLTAGES AND CURRENTS 9 Hrs.

High Resistance with series ammeter -Potential Divider - Generating Voltmeters - Capacitance Voltage Transformer, Electrostatic Voltmeters - Sphere Gaps - Hall generator - Resistive Shunts -Rogowski coils - Cathode Ray Oscillographs for impulse measurement.

UNIT 5 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS 9 Hrs. Testing of Insulators and Bushings - Testing of Isolators and Circuit Breakers - Testing of Cables - Testing of Transformers - Testing of Surge arresters - Radio Interference Measurements - Standards and Specifications.

Max. 45 Hours


1. M. S. Naidu and V. Kamaraju, ‘High Voltage Engineering’, 5thEdition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

2. E.Kuffel and M.Abdullah, “High Voltage Engineering” - Per gammon Press, Oxford, 1970. 3. C.L.WADHWA, “High Voltage Engineering” - New Age International (P) Ltd, Publishers, 2007

4. E.Kuffel and W.s. Zaengal, “High Voltage Engineering Fundamentals”, 2nd Edition, Butterworth Heinemann, 2000.

5. H.M.Ryam, “High voltage Engineering and testing”, 2nd Edition, 2001, IEEE power and energy series 32.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No choice 20 Marks




SIC1101 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To motivate the students to study the types and operational characteristics of basic sensors and transducers and their industrial applications.

It also focuses to investigate various instrumentation technologies used in sensor and transducer systems. It intends to bring new ideas by introducing recently developed sensors.

UNIT 1 MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs.

General Configuration and functional description of measuring instruments-Characteristics of instrument - Static characteristics - Dynamic characteristics - Types of errors - sources of errors - methods of elimination - Analysis of data - Limiting errors - Relative limiting error - Combination of Quantities with limiting errors - Statistical treatment of data: Histogram, Mean, Measure of dispersion from the mean, Range, Deviation, Average deviation, Standard Deviation, variance.

UNIT 2 BASIC SENSORS 9 Hrs. Difference between Sensors and Transducers - Active and Passive transducers - Selection of Sensors - Sensor for

Motion and Position Measurement, GPS, INS, Doppler, SONAR, Thermal Sensors - Gas Thermometric Sensors, Acoustic Temperature Sensor, Thermo-EMF Sensors, NQR Thermometry, Heat Flux Sensor.

UNIT 3 RESISTIVE TRANSDUCERS 9 Hrs. Classification of Transducers- Active and Passive Transducers - Characteristics - Basic Requirements of a

Transducer -Mechanical Devices as Primary Detectors-Mechanical Springs, Proving Rings, Potentiometers, Strain Gauges -Theory, Types(includes Rossette), Temperature Compensation, Calibration - Resistance Hygrometer, Photoconductive cell, Hot wire anemometer.

UNIT 4 INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS 9 Hrs.

Self inductive transducers, Mutual inductive transducer, Linear variable differential transformer - Eddy current gauge, Proximity sensors, Microsyn, Induction potentiometer, Capacitive displacement transducers - Desirable features of capacitive transducers -Practical capacitive pickups - Equibar differential pressure transducer -Feedback type capacitance proximity pickup - Capacitor microphone

UNIT 5 SMART SENSORS 9 Hrs. Smart sensors: Introduction-Primary sensors, Converters, Compensation, Recent trends in sensor technology - Film sensors - Semi conductor IC technology - Introduction to MEMS - Nano-sensors -SQUID Sensors


1. Sawhney A.K., “Electrical & Electronic Measurements and Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai Publications,2001

2. Patranabis D., ‘Sensors and Transducers’, Prentice Hall of India, 1999. 3. Doeblin E.O., “Measurement System Applications and Design”, TMH, 5th Edition, 2004.

4. Rangan C.S., Mani V.S.V: and Sharma G.R., “Instrumentation Devices and Systems” Tata McGraw Hill.

5. Renganathan S., “Transducer Engineering” -Allied Publishers Limited

6. Murthy D.V.S., -“Transducer and Instrumentation”, PHI, 1st Edition

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. Part A : 10 questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks

Part B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SCIENCE OF MEASUREMENTS AND L T P Credits Total Marks

SIC1102 INSTRUMENTATION 3 0 0 3 100 (For EIE)

COURSE OBJECTIVES To create a strong base in the fundamentals of Instrumentation Engineering. To impart knowledge in the measurement and instrumentation systems and their characteristics To provide in-depth understanding of errors and calibration standards.

UNIT 1 MEASUREMENT AND MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Measurements, Significance of Measurements, Methods of Measurements-Direct and Indirect methods,

Measurement systems- Functions of Measurement systems, classification based on their functions, Applications of Measurement systems, Elements of a Generalized measurement system- primary sensing element, variable conversion element, variable manupulation element, data presentation element, generalized mathematical model of measurement systems.

UNIT 2 INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Instrument systems - Mechanical, Electrical and Electronic Instruments, Classification of Instruments-absolute

instruments and Secondary Instruments, Deflection and Null type Instruments, Analog and Digital modes of operation - Types of Instrumentation systems - Intelligent and dumb instrumentation systems, Generalized instrumentation system, Input-output configuration of measuring instruments - desired inputs, interfering inputs, modifying inputs, methods of correction for interfering and modifying inputs.

UNIT 3 ERRORS IN MEASUREMENTS AND CALIBRATION STANDARDS 9 Hrs. Classification of errors - Gross errors, systematic and random errors, Errors in Measuring Instruments, Sources

of Errors, statistical evaluation of measurement data, Instrument error combination, probable error, limits of errors, methods of correction. Calibration and Standards - Process of calibration, theory and principles (absolute and secondary or comparison method), Calibration methods, classification of standards, standards for calibration

UNIT 4 CHARACTERISTICS OF MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 10 Hrs. Static and Dynamic characteristics - Static characteristics: Accuracy, precision, bias, sensitivity, linearity,

resolution, hysteresis, dead zone, backlash, drift, threshold, input impedance and loading effect - Dynamic characteristics: speed of response, Lag, Fidelity, Dynamic Error. modelling of measuring instrument systems - operational transfer function - Dynamic Response of zero, first and second order instruments for impulse,step, ramp and frequency response of the above instruments.

UNIT 5 BASICS OF SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 8 Hrs. Introduction, Classification, Basic requirements and Selection of Sensors and Transducers, Human body as a

sensor system, sensor as a part of measurement system, Characterization - Electrical, Mechanical and Thermal, Optical, Chemical / Biological characterization

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K., “ A Course in Electrical, Electronic measurement & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & sons,18th Edition,

Reprint 2010

2. Doebelin E.O., “Measurement System Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2004. 3. Jain R.K., “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, 11th edition,Reprint 2005.

4. Jones’ Instrument Technology, Instrumentation Systems, Edited by B.E.Noltingk, Vol 4, 4th edition, ELBS, 1987.

5. Murthy D.V.S., “Transducers and Instrumentation”, Printice Hall of India, 13th printing, 2006.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SIC1201 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To make the student familiar with measurement techniques of force, torque and speed To make the student familiar with measurement techniques of acceleration, Vibration and density To make the student familiar with pressure measurement techniques To make the student familiar with temperature measurement techniques

UNIT1 INDUSTRIAL MEASUREMENTS 10 Hrs. Measurement of straightness, flatness, roundness and roughness. Force Measurement - Load cell, different

types of load cells - elastic load cell-strain gauge load cell. Torque measurement-Using strain gauge and magneto elastic principle, Speed Measurement - Revolution counter-capacitive tacho-drag up type tacho,D.C and A.C tacho generators - stroboscopic methods. Acceleration Measurement- Elementary accelerometer, Seismic accelerometer, Practical accelerometers.

UNIT 2 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT & APPLICATION 9 Hrs. Definition & Standards, Temperature scales, Calibration of thermometers, Bimetallic thermometer, filled- in

Thermometers, Vapour pressure thermometers, Resistance thermometers, Thermistors- color code testing and installation procedure, Thermostat, Thermocouples - types and ranges, characteristics, laws of thermocouples, cold junction compensation, IC temperature sensors AD 590, Pyrometers - radiation and optical pyrometers.

UNIT 3 PRESSURE MEASUREMENT 9 Hrs. Manometers - different types of manometers, Elastic pressure transducers, Dead weight Tester, Electrical

types, Vacuum gauges - McLeod gauge, Knudsen gauge, Thermocouple gauge, Ionization gauge, Differential pressure Transmitter - electrical & pneumatic types, Complete air supply system for pneumatic control equipment and the different components and their function.

UNIT 4 MEASUREMENT OF FLOW & LEVEL 9 Hrs. Orifice, Venturi, Pitot tube, flow nozzle rotameter, Dahl tube, Positive displacement meter, Turbine flow meter,

Electromagnetic flow meter, Ultrasonic flow meter, Open channel flow measurement, Solid flow measurement. Level: Sight glass, float gauge, displacer, torque tube, bubbler tube, diaphragm box, Differential Pressure methods, electrical methods- resistance type, capacitance type, ultrasonic level gauging.

UNIT 5 MEASUREMENT OF DENSITY, VISCOSITY, HUMIDITY 8 Hrs. Hydrometer - continuous weight measurement, liquid densitometer - float principle, air pressure balanced

method, using gamma rays - gas density measurements - gas specific gravity measurements - Viscosity terms, saybolt viscometer, rotometer type viscometer, Industrial consistency meters. Humidity terms - dry & wet bulb psychrometers - hot wire electrode type hygrometer, electrolytic hygrometer, Dew point hygrometer.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Patranabis D., “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, II Edition, New Delhi, Reprint 2009. 2. Singh. S.K., “Industrial Instrumentation & Control ” 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, Reprint 2009. 3. Krishnaswamy. K & Vijayachitra. S, “Industrial Instrumentation” New age International, Reprint 2008. 4. Ernest O. Doebelin, Dhanish. N. Manik, “Measurement Systems Application & Design”, TMH, 5th Edition, 2004. 5. Jain R.K, “Mechanical & Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, 11th Edition, 2004.




SIC1202 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND

INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE , E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To equip the students to apply all the types of electrical instruments with the knowledge of construction and

working of the instruments which are about to measure voltage, current, resistance, inductance and capacitance, power and energy magnetic & potentiometeric measurement

UNIT 1 MEASUREMENT OF VOLTAGE AND CURRENT 7 Hrs. Units of voltage and current - principle of operation of D’Arsonval Galvanometer - principle, operation,

constructional details and comparison of the following: permanent magnet moving coil, permanent magnet moving iron, Dynamometer, Induction, thermal and rectifier type instruments - Extension of ranges and calibration of voltmeter and ammeters - Errors and compensation.

UNIT 2 MEASUREMENT OF POWER AND ENERGY 7 Hrs. Power measurement - Voltmeter ammeter method, Ammeter voltmeter method, Electro-dynamic wattmeter

Theory, errors and compensation methods - Low power factor wattmeter - Power measurement in poly-phase systems - Energy measurement - Single phase and poly phase induction type energy meter - theory and adjustments - DC energy meter - Testing of energy meters - Calibration of wattmeter and energy meter.

UNIT 3 MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE 11 Hrs. Low Resistance: Kelvin's double bridge - Medium Resistance: Voltmeter Ammeter method - Substitution

method - Wheatstone bridge method. High Resistance: Megger - Direct deflection method - Megohm bridge method, Loss of Charge method - Earth resistance measurement. Introduction to A.C bridges Sources and Detectors in A.C. bridges. Measurement of Self Inductance: Maxwell's bridge - Hay's bridge, and Anderson's bridge. Measurement of Mutual Inductance: Heavy side M.I bridge - Measurement of Capacitance: Schering's bridge - Sauty's bridge, Measurement of frequency using Wien's bridge.

UNIT 4 POTENTIOMETRIC MEASUREMENT 9 Hrs. DC Potentiometer: Laboratory type, Leeds and Northup potentiometer, Vernier potentiometer, Brooke’s

deflection potentiometer -Working principle and applications. AC potentiometer: Dry-scale potentiometer, Gall potentiometer - Working principle and applications, Application of DC and AC potentiometer - Magnetic measurement: Flux meter -Testing of Ring specimen, B-H curve by method of reversal and step by step method, Testing of Bar specimen. Hopkinson’s permeameter - Iron loss measurement by Lloyd Fisher Square

UNIT 5 POLYPHASE METERING 11 Hrs. Blondel's Theorem for n-phase, p-wire system, Measurement of power and reactive kVA in 3-phase balanced and

unbalanced systems: One-wattmeter, two-wattmeter and three-wattmeter methods. 3-phase induction type energy meter, Instrument Transformers: Construction and operation of current and potential transformers.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical, Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & sons, 18th Edition, Reprint 2010. 2. Golding E.W. and Widdis. F.C., “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, 5th Edition, Wheeler Publications 3. Stout M.B., “Basic Electrical Measurements”, PHI, 1981. 4. Harris F.K., Electrical Measurements”, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd., 1974




S I C 1 20 3 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge in the area of electrical and electronic instruments with the in-depth knowledge about the construction and the working of the instruments. To expose the student about measurement of voltage, current, resistance, inductance, capacitance, power, energy and data acquisition concepts

UNIT 1 BASIC MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs. Methods of Measurement, Measurement System, Classification of instrument system, Functional Elements of

measurement system - Examples - Characteristics of instruments: Static characteristics - Dynamic characteristic Types of errors - sources of errors - methods of elimination - Analysis of data - Limiting errors - Relative limiting error - Combination of Quantities with limiting errors - Statistical treatment of data: Histogram, Mean, Measure of dispersion from the mean, Range, Deviation, Average deviation, Standard Deviation, Variance - Calibration and Standards - Process of Calibration.

UNIT 2 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS 10 Hrs. Units of voltage and current - principle of operation of D’Arsonval Galvanometer - principle, operation,

constructional details and comparison of the following: permanent magnet moving coil, permanent magnet moving iron, Dynamometer, Induction, thermal and rectifier type instruments, Power measurement - Voltmeter ammeter method, Ammeter voltmeter method, Electro-dynamic wattmeter - Low power factor wattmeter

UNIT 3 MEASUREMENT OF RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE 11 Hrs. Low Resistance: Kelvin 's double bridge - Medium Resistance: Voltmeter Ammeter method - Substitution method -

Wheatstone bridge method. High Resistance: Megger - Direct deflection method - Megohm bridge method, Loss of Charge method - Earth resistance measurement. Introduction to A.C bridges Sources and Detectors in A.C. bridges. Measurement of Self Inductance: Maxwell 's bridge - Hay's bridge, and Anderson's bridge. Measurement of Mutual Inductance: Heavy side M.I bridge - Measurement of Capacitance: Schering's bridge - Sauty's bridge, Measurement of frequency using Wien's bridge.

UNIT 4 ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope: Block diagram, CRO probes, Delay line, types of Oscilloscopes.

Measurement of: Signal voltage, Current, Phase & Frequency using Lissajous patterns, Industrial applications of CRO. DC and AC voltmeter and Ammeter, Ohmmeter, Range Extension, Electronic Multimeters, Types of Voltmeters - Differential type, true RMS type, Vector voltmeter - Wave Analyzer, Spectrum Analyzer and Distortion Analyzer

UNIT 5 DATA ACQUISITION 8 Hrs.

Introduction to ADC / DAC - Specifications, ADC Quantization Error, Types of ADC - Flash, Counter, Successive Approximation, Dual-Slope types and Introduction to Delta-Sigma, Types of DAC - Weighted-Resistor, 2R ladder and PWM type, ADC and DAC Problems - Smart sensors.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K., “A Course in Electrical, Electronic measurement & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & sons,1 8th Edition, Reprint 2010 2. Doeblin E.O. “Measurement System Applications and Design”, McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, 2004. 3. Albert D. Helfrick & William. D. Cooper, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation & Measurement Techniques”, PHI, 2003. 4. Chris Nadovich, ‘Synthetic Instruments Concepts and Applications’, Elsevier, 2005. 5. Rick Bitter, Taqi Mohiuddin and Matt Nawrocki, ‘Labview Advanced Programming Techniques’, CRC Press, Second Edition, 2007. 6. Rahman Jamal and Herbert Picklik, “LabVIEW - Applications and Solutions”, National Instruments Release ISBN 0130964239. 7. Gupta J.B., “A course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”, 12th Edition, Katson Publishing House, 2003.




Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SIC1301 MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To provide knowledge on design in state space approach and analysis.

To provide knowledge in phase plane analysis.

To study the design of optimal controller and phase variable matrix and reducibility

To provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state error analysis. To introduce stability analysis for non linear systems.

UNIT 1 STATE SPACE APPROACH 12 Hrs.

Review of matrices-co-ordinate transformation - Eigen values and Eigen vectors - diagonalization - Cayley - Hamilton theorem. Solution to state-space equations, State transition matrix, Properties of state transition matrix, Computation of state transition matrix.

UNIT 2 STATE SPACE ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

State space analysis - State space formulation- State space representation of control systems described by scalar differential equation - State variable- Transformation of state space equation, physical, phase & canonical variable, state space models

UNIT 3 CONTROLLABILITY AND OBSERVABILITY 12 Hrs. Jordan and Canonical forms, Controllability and observability - Condition for controllability and observability, Gilbert method and Kalman decomposition- Design of state feedback by pole placement.

UNIT 4 PHASE VARIABLE MATRIX AND REDUCIBILITY 11 Hrs. Controllable phase variable form, observable phase variable form, reduced order observer - full order observer-reducibility, irreducibility, transfer function matrix, impulse response functions.

UNIT 5 NON LINEAR SYSTEM AND STABILITY 13 Hrs.

Non-linear systems - Properties of non linear system - describing function for simple non linearities like ON-OFF, dead zone and saturation- Phase plane method - basic concept, singular points - constructing phase plane trajectory for linear and nonlinear second order systems. Stability: BIBO, Asymptotic stability, introduction to Lyapnov’s stability criteria (Qualitative analysis only)

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT/ REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gopal M, “Modern Control Theory”, Second Edition ,Wiley Eastern Publishers, 1993. 2. Tou T.J. “Modern control theory”, Mcgraw Hill publications, 1964. 3. Ogata K.H, “State Space Analyasis Of Control Systems ”, Prentice Hall Publications, 1967. 4. Benjamin C. Kuo “Digital control systems”, Oxford University Press, 2004 5. Nagarath I.J. & Gopal.M, “Control Systems Engineering”, Second Edition, Wiley & Sons, 1985. 6. Torkel Glad & Lennart Ljung, ‘Control Theory - Multi Variable and Non-linear Methods’, Taylor’s & Francis Group, 2002. 7. Hasan Saeed.S, ‘Automatic Control Systems’, S.K. Kataria & Sons, 2002. 8. George J. Thaler, ‘Automatic Control Systems’, Jaico Publishing house, 1993






S I C 1 30 2 PROCESS CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To make the student familiar with process control system and their analysis. It aims in thorough study of advanced controllers techniques.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL 9 Hrs.

Elements of an automatic process control system : Process variable - load variables - dynamic of simple pressure, flow, level and temperature process - transient response of first order system for thermal & level process - interacting & non-interacting system - degrees of freedom - batch process and continuous process - self regulation - servo and regulator operation. Simple examples

UNIT 2 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS 9 Hrs.

I/P and P/I Converter - pneumatic, electric and hydraulic actuator - valve positioner - control valves - characteristics of control valve - valve body - globe, butterfly valves - control valves sizing - cavitation, flashing in control valves

UNIT 3 CONTROLLERS 9 Hrs. Characteristics of On-Off, Proportional, Integral, Derivative modes -Composite controllers: PI, PD and PID control modes - pneumatic and electronics controllers - computation of controller output for changes in error.

UNIT 4 CONTROLLER TUNING AND ADVANCED CONTROL TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

1/4 decay ratio, IAE, ISE, ITAE - determination of optimum setting for mathematically described process using time response and frequency response - tuning of controller by process reaction curve method, continuous cycling method- feed forward control, cascade control, ratio control, split -range control

UNIT 5 MULTI VARIABLE CONTROL AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Multivariable control - introduction to adaptive control and inferential control, interaction of control loops, non interacting control loops, Decoupling Design, relative gain array - Piping and instrumentation diagram of loops, control of distillation column - control of heat exchanger

Max. 45 Hours


1. Stephanopoulis.C., “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall Of India Pvt Ltd, 2004

2. Eckman D.P., “Automatic Process Control”, Wiley Eastern LTD, 1972.

3. Curtis D. Jonson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology ”, John Wilsey & Sons, 2004. 4. Harriot P., “Process Control ", Tata McGraw Hill , 1984.

5. Liptak B.G., “instrumentation in Process Industries ", Vol. 1 & 2, Cilton Books Co. 1974.

6. Coughanowr B.R., “Process System Analysis and Control”, 2nd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1991.

7. Shinskey F.G., “Process Control System”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1991.

8. Liptak B.G., “Process Control”, Chilton Book & Co, 2001

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.





S I C 1 30 3 INDUSTRIAL DRIVES AND CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES This subject brings comprehensive analysis of electrical drives that are mainly used to convert electrical power to mechanical power with an electrical or electronic control.

It aims in thorough study of various electrical drives that are used in various fields such as production, material handling and process industries.

UNIT 1 FUNDEMENTALS OF ELECTRIC DRIVES 9 Hrs. Electric drives - Advantages - Classes of duty. Speed - Torque Characteristics of various types of loads and drive

motors - selection of power rating for drive motors with regard to thermal. Overloading and load variation factors - load equalization - Starting, braking and reversing operations.

UNIT 2 DC DRIVE 9 Hrs. Speed control of DC motors - Ward Leonard scheme - Drawbacks - Thyristor converter fed DC Drives: single and

four quadrant operations. Chopper fed DC Drives: Time ratio control and current limit control - single, two and four quadrant operation.

UNIT 3 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR DRIVES 9 Hrs. Speed control of three phase induction motors: Stator control - Stator voltage and frequency control - AC Chopper

and Cyclo-converter fed induction motor drives. Rotor control - Rotor resistance control and slip power recovery schemes - Static control of rotor resistance using DC Chopper - Static and Scherbius drives - Introduction to vector control based drives, Direct and Indirect Vector Control, Modes of operation - speed control and drive classification .

UNIT 4 CONTROL OF DRIVES AND ENERGY STRATEGIES 9 Hrs.

Modes of operation - speed control and drive classification - closed loop speed control. Losses in electrical drive systems - Measures for energy conservation - use of efficient semiconductor convertors - energy efficient operation of drives

UNIT 5 INTRODUCTION TO SPECIAL MACHINES 9 Hrs. Drive consideration for textile mills - steel rolling mill - cement mill - Special machines : SRM,PMSM construction & synchronous.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rik De Doncker, Duco W. J. Pulle, André Veltman, “Advanced Electrical Drives: Analysis, Modeling, Control”,Springer

Science,201 1. 2. Sen P.C., “Thyristor DC Drives”, John Wiley & Sons New York 1981. 3. Gopal K. Dubey, “ Power Semiconductor Controlled Drives”, Prentice Hall, 1989. 4. Vedam Subramanyam, “Thyristor control of Electric Drives”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi 1991. 5. Gopal K. Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2001. 6. Pillai S.K, “ A First Course on Electrical Drives”, New age international Publishers Pvt Ltd,1989,Reprint 2004. 7. Bose B.K., “Power Electronic & AC drives”, Prentice Hall, 2006.


Max Marks : 80 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.

PART A: 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



S I C 1 30 4 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

The subject aims to provide the basic principles of various instrument analysis and its applications. This subject brings comprehensive analysis of various gas analyser and chromatography. It aims in thorough study of spectro photometers analysis and applications.

UNIT 1 pH CONDUCTIVITY & DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYSER 9 Hrs. Conductivity meters - pH meters - dissolved oxygen hydrogen analyser -sodium analyser - silica analyser and Sampling systems.

UNIT 2 GAS ANALYSER 9 Hrs. Thermal conductivity - thermal analyser - type Oxygen analyser - CO monitor - NOx analyser - H2S analyser - dust and smoke measurement.

UNIT 3 CHROMATOGRAPHY 9 Hrs. Gas chromatography - liquid chromatography -- high-pressure liquid chromatography - principles, types and applications detectors.

UNIT 4 SPECTRO PHOTOMETERS 9 Hrs.

Spectral methods of analysis - Beer’s law UV - visible spectrophotometers - single beam and double beam instruments - source and detectors - IR spectrophotometers - sources and detectors - FTIR spectrometers - atomic absorption spectrophotometer - flame emission spectrophotometers - sources of flame photometry - applications ESR, EPR spectroscopy - TOF spectrometer -Introduction to x-ray spectroscopy

UNIT 5 PRINCIPLE Of NUCLEAR MAGNETIC RESONANCE 9 Hrs. NMR - basic principle - NMR spectrometers - Applications - Introduction to mass spectrophotometer - Nuclear radiation detectors - GM counter - proportional counter - solid state detectors -.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Hobart H. Willard, Lynne.L. Merrit, John A. Dean, Frank A.Settle, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, 7th Edition,CBS Publishing & Distribution, 1986.

2. Jain R.K, “Mechanical &Industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, 11th Edition, 2004

3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Analytical Instruments”, II Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2006.

4. Gurdeep R. Chatwal, Sham.K. Anand, “Instrumental methods of Chemical Analysis” Himalaya Publishing house, Reprint 2006.

5. Robert D. Braun, “Introduction to Instrumental Analysis”, Pharma Book Syndicate, Hydrabad, Reprint 2006.

6. Douglas.A. Skoog, F. James Holker, Stanley R. Gouch, “Instrumental Analysis”, CEngage Learning India , India Edition 2008.







SIC1305

ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION


(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To provide in-depth understanding of operation, performance and applications of important measuring, monitoring and analyzing electronic instruments To impart knowledge on virtual instrumentation

UNIT 1 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND WAVEFORM GENERATORS 9 Hrs. Review of DC and AC voltmeter and Ammeter, Ohmmeter, Range Extension, Electronic Multimeters, Types of

Voltmeters - Differential type, true RMS type, Vector voltmeter, Signal Generator - Audio and function generators - Pulse Generator, RF signal Generator, Frequency Synthesizer, Arbitrary Waveform Generator, Noise generators --Pattern generator - Wobbluscope

UNIT 2 DATA CON VERTORS AND CONNECTORS 9 Hrs. ADC and DAC - Specifications, ADC Quantization Error, Types of ADC - Flash, Counter, Successive

Approximation, Dual-Slope types and Introduction to Delta-Sigma, Types of DAC - Weighted-Resistor, R-2R ladder and PWM type, ADC and DAC Problems

Probes and Connectors - Probes, Test Leads, Shielded Cables, Connectors, Low Capacitance Probes, High Voltage Probes, Current Probes, Special Probes for ICs.

UNIT 3 ANALYZERS AND DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS 9 Hrs. Wave Analyzer, Spectrum Analyzer and Distortion Analyzer, Measurement of Frequency and Time, Decimal

Counting Assemblies, Frequency Counter, Period Counter, Counter Errors, Inherent errors, signal related errors, Digital Voltmeters, Digital Multimeters, Computer based digital instruments, IEEE 488 GPIB instruments

UNIT 4 DATA ACQUISITION AND OSCILLOSCOPES 9 Hrs. Data acquisition system, Data loggers, Problems in signal acquisition, Interference and screening, Grounding and Guarding Techniques

Introduction- Oscilloscope Block Diagram, Cathode Ray Tube, CRT Circuits, Vertical Deflection System, Triggered sweep, CRO specifications, CRO controls, measurements on CRO, Storage CRO, Digital Storage Oscilloscope, Sampling Oscilloscope

UNIT 5VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs. Virtual instrumentation - Definition, flexibility - Block diagram and architecture of virtual instruments - Virtual

instruments versus traditional instruments -LabVIEW software and Hardware, VI programming techniques - VI, sub VI, loops and charts, arrays, clusters and graphs, case and sequence structures, formula nodes, string and file input / output. Lab VIEW applications in Electronic Instrumentation

Max. 45 Hours TEXT/ REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sawhney A.K, “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”, 18th Edition, Dhanpat Rai &

Company Private Limited, 2007. 2. Golding. E. W, and Widdis F.C, “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, 5th Edition, A.H.Wheeler &

Company, 2003. 3. Kalsi.H.S, “Electronic Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Company, 2004. 4. Copper. W.D and Helfrick. A.D, “Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, 5th Edition, Prentice

Hall of India, 2002




SIC1306 CONTROL ENGINEERING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To enable the students to learn the concepts of state variable analysis, nonlinear systems To realize the structure of discrete time system

UNIT 1 REVIEW OF MATRICES 12 Hrs.

Review of matrices - co-ordinate transformation - Concept of State equation of Dynamic Systems - Eigen values and Eigen vectors - matrix diagonalization - Cayley Hamilton theorem - state transition matrix - Eigen Values and State transitions matrix

UNIT 2 STATE SPACE ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

State space analysis - state space formulation - state space representation of control systems described by scalar differential equation - state variable - transformation of state space equation, physical, phase & canonical variable, state space models - state space representation for discrete time system.

UNIT 3 PHASE VARIABLE MATRIX. 12 Hrs.

Jordan and canonical forms, controllability and observability - condition for controllability and observability, Gilbert method and Kalman decomposition - design of state feedback by pole placement. Controllable phase variable form, observable phase variable form, reduced order observer - full order observer - reducibility, irreducibility, transfer function matrix, impulse response functions,Matlab programming Controllability and observability

UNIT 4 NON-LINEAR SYSTEM ANALYSIS 12 Hrs.

Non-linear systems - properties of non linear system - describing function for simple non linearity’s like on-off, dead zone and saturation - describing function analysis of non linear systems - Limit cycles - phase plane method - basic concept - singular points - constructing phase plane trajectory for linear and nonlinear second order systems - Isocline method

UNIT 5 DESIGN OF DISCRETE TIME CONTROL SYSTEM (FOR DISCRETE SYSTEM) 12 Hrs. Sampled data theory - Sampling process - Sampling theorem, Sample and hold circuits - Zero Order Hold

Z-Transform - Theorems on Z-Transforms - Inverse Z-Transforms - Discrete systems and solution of difference equation using Z transform - Pulse transfer function - Response of sampled data system to step and ramp input, Stability studies - Jury’s test, bilinear transformation, Schur Cohn Stability

Max. 60 Hours

TEXT/ REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Gopal.M, “Modern Control Theory”, 2nd Edition, Wiley Eastern Publishers, 1993.

2. Tou.T.J. “Modern Control Theory”, McGraw Hill publications, 1964.

3. Ogata.K.H, “State Space Analysis of Control Systems”, Prentice Hall Publications, 1967. 4. Nagrath I.J. & Gopal.M, “Control Systems Engineering”, 2nd Edition, Wiley & Sons, 1985

5. Nagroor Kani “Advanced Control system”, McGraw Hill publications, 1964.

6. Deshpande P.B. & Ash R.H, “Elements of Computer Process Control”, Instrument Society of America 1981.






SIC1307

PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION TECHNOLOGY


(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge in modeling and characteristics of various processes and process controllers, controller tuning methods, complex control schemes, various instruments and their characteristics in process control To design digital control algorithms.

UNIT 1 MATHEMATICAL MODELING OF PROCESSES 9 Hrs. Introduction of Process control - Need for Process Control, Elements of process control system, Process variables,

Degrees of Freedom, Process Lag - Mathematical model of first order Liquid level, pressure and thermal processes - Higher order process - Response of Interacting and Non-Interacting liquid level systems - Dynamic system with dead time and Inverse response - Concept of servo and regulator operation.

UNIT 2 CHARACTERISTICS OF PROCESS CONTROLLERS 9 Hrs. Basic control modes - Characteristics and Response of On-Off, Proportional, Integral, Derivative control modes -

Composite control modes - Characteristics and Response of P+I, P+D and P+I+D control modes - Pneumatic and Electronic controllers to realize various control actions - Integral windup - Control Lag - Selection of Control modes for Different processes.

UNIT 3 CONTROLLER TUNING & ADVANCED CONTROL LOOP SCHEMES 9 Hrs. Evaluation criteria - IAE, ISE, ITAE and 1/4 Decay ratio - Types of Controller tuning - Process reaction curve method, Ziegler Nichols I and II method

Control loop Schemes - Feed forward control, Cascade control, Ratio control, Split-range control, Adaptive control, Inferential control and Multivariable control - Interaction of control loops, Non interacting control loops, Relative gain array, Concepts of De-coupler.

UNIT4 PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND ITS CHARACTERICS 9 Hrs. I/P and P/I Converter - Final control element - Pneumatic, electric and hydraulic actuator - Valve positioner, Control

valves -Characteristics of control valve - Inherent and installed characteristics - Types of control valve Globe, Butterfly valves, Diaphragm and Ball valve - Control valves sizing - Cavitations and flashing in control valves,Selection criteria.

UNIT5: DIGITAL CONTROL ALGORITHMS FOR PROCESS CONTROL 9 Hrs. Design of Deadbeat Algorithm, Dahlin’s Algorithm, Kalman’s Estimation - Predictive Controller - MPC - Linear and Nonlinear - Smith Predictor Algorithm.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Stephanopoulos C, “Chemical Process Control”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2005 2. Eckman. D.P, “Automatic Process Control”, Wiley Eastern Ltd, 1972. 3. Curtis D Johnson, “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, John Wilsey & Sons, 2004. 4. Deshpande P.B. & Ash R.H, “Elements of Computer Process Control”, Instrument Society of America 1981. 5. Shanthi Sasidharan, “Computer Control of Process”, CBA Publishers, 2011.

6 Harriot. P., “Process Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984. 7. B.G.Liptak, “Instrumentation in Process Industries”, Vol. 1 & 2, Chilton Book & Co. 1974. 8. Coughanowr. D.R., “Process System Analysis and Control”, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1991. 9. Shinskey. F.G., “Process Control System”, 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 1991. 10. Liptak. B.G., “Process Control”, Chilton Book & Co, 2001




S I C 1 30 8 INDUSTRIAL UNIT OPERATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge pertaining to overview of unit operations,

To give an idea about distillation and unit operations in transport of solids, liquids & gases and also various unit operations involved in chemical reactors, steam boilers, furnaces, pumps, compressors, extruders, blowers and centrifuges.

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF UNIT OPERATIONS 9 Hrs. Introduction to industrial processes - Concepts of unit operations and unit processes - Material balance and energy balance -Types of reactions - General idea of controlling operations

UNIT 2 TRANSPORT OF SOLIDS, LIQUIDS AND GASES 9 Hrs. Study of Unit operation in Transport of Solids, liquids and gases, Different crushers and grinders, Adjusting of particle size, Mixing, Separation, Leaching and extraction

UNIT 3 DISTILLATION, CHEMICAL REACTORS, STEAM BOILERS, FURNACES 9 Hrs. Study of Unit operation in Distillation: Flash distillation, Batch distillation, Continuous distillation, Operational features, construction and working principle of Chemical reactors, Steam boilers, Furnaces.

UNIT 4 DRYERS, CRYSTALLIZERS, EVAPORATORS 9 Hrs. Study of Unit operation in Dryers, Crystallization, Evaporators, Heat exchangers, Humidification, De-humidification - Different types - operational features, construction and working principle

UNIT 5 PUMPS, COMPRESSORS, EXTRUDERS, BLOWERS, CENTRIFUGES 9 Hrs. Study of Unit operation in Pumps, Compressors, Extruders, Blowers, Centrifuges - operational features, construction and working principle

Max. 45 Hours


1. McCabe W.L.Smith, J.C.Peter Harriot, Unit operation of chemical engineering, McGraw Hill Inc., 1993 2. Levrspel O, Chemical Reaction Engineering. Wiley, 1972

3. Robert H.Perry and Don Green Perry, Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, 8th Edition, 2007

4. B.G.Liptak, Instrumentation Engineers Hand book: Process Measurement and Process control,

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.





SIC1310 THEORY OF ROBOTICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, E&C, EIE and BIO-MED) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce basic concepts of various dynamics processes

To educate on the effect of various power sources and sensors.

To impart knowledge on the manipulators , grippers and robot dynamics To introduce the evaluation criteria and tuning techniques of controllers To introduce the concept of multi loop control techniques

UNIT 1 BASIC CONCEPTS 9 Hrs.

Origin & various generation of Robots - Robot definition - Robotics system components - Robot classification Coordinate frames - Asimov’s laws of robotics - degree of freedom - dynamic stabilization of robots.- work volume. Need for Automation - types of automation - fixed, programmable and flexible automation.

UNIT 2 POWER SOURCES AND SENSORS 9 Hrs.

Hydraulic, pneumatic and electric drives - determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio - variable speed arrangements - path determination - micro machines in robotics - machine vision - ranging - laser - acoustic - magnetic, fiber optic and tactile sensors.

UNIT 3 MANIPULATORS, ACTUATORS, GRIPPERS and ROBOT DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Construction of manipulators - manipulator dynamics and force control - electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits - end effectors - various types of grippers - design considerations. Introduction to Robot Dynamics - Lagrange formulation - Newton Euler formulation - Properties of robot dynamic equations.

UNIT 4 KINEMATICS AND PATH PLANNING 9 Hrs. Forward Kinematics - Denavit Hartenberg Representation. multiple solution jacobian work envelop, Inverse Kinematics - Geometric approach. Hill climbing techniques.

UNIT 5 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Robot programming - Fixed instruction, sequence control, General programming language, Specific programming

languages. Robots for welding, painting and assembly - Remote Controlled robots - robots in manufacturing and non- manufacturing applications - Robots for nuclear and chemical plants.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Mikell P. Weiss G.M., Nagel R.N., Odraj N.G., “Industrial Robotics”, McGraw-Hill Singapore, 1996.

2. Ghosh, “Control in Robotics and Automation: Sensor Based Integration”, Allied Publishers, Chennai, 1998.

3. Deb.S.R., “Robotics technology and flexible Automation”, John Wiley, USA 1992.

4. Asfahl C.R., “Robots and Manufacturing Automation”, John Wiley, USA 1992. 5. Klafter R.D., Chimielewski T.A., Negin M., “Robotic Engineering - An integrated approach”, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi, 1994.

6. Mc Kerrow P.J. “Introduction to Robotics”, Addison Wesley, USA, 1991.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SIC1311 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, E&C and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To familiarize use and requirements of medical instruments

To give knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments. An attempt to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. To give an introductory idea about human physiology system .

UNIT 1 ELECTRO PHYSIOLOGY 8 Hrs.

Cell and Its Structure - Electrical, Mechanical and Chemical Activities - Action and Resting Potential- Organization of Nervous System - CNS - PNS - Neurons - Axons- Synapse - Propagation of Electrical Impulses along the Nerve-Sodium Pump - Cardio Pulmonary System- Physiology of Heart, Lung, Kidney.

UNIT 2 BIO POTENTIAL ELECTRODES AND TRANSDUCERS 8 Hrs.

Design of Medical Instruments - Components of Biomedical Instrument System - Electrodes: Micro Electrodes, Needle Electrodes, Surface Electrodes -Instrumentation amplifier - Biomedical Measurements Like pH, PCO2, PO2 of Blood, Isolation Amplifier, Preamplifier, Current Amplifier, Chopper Amplifier.

UNIT 3 INSTRUMENTS USED FOR DIAGNOSIS 10 Hrs.

ECG, Einthoven Triangle, Leads, Electrodes, Vector Cardiograph, Measurement of Cardiac Output, EEG, EMG ,Plethysmography, Blood Flow Measurements, Holter Monitor- Respiratory Rate Measurement - Oximeter, Patient Monitoring System, ICCU.

UNIT 4 MODERN IMAGING SYSTEM 10 Hrs.

Ultrasonic Diagnosis, Ultrasonic Scanning, Isotopes in Medical Diagnosis- Pace Makers, Defibrillators, Doppler Monitor(colour), Medical imaging-X-ray generation, Radiographic & Fluoroscopic Techniques - Image Intensifiers-Computer Aided Tomography, PET, SPECT- Laser Applications-Echocardiography-CT Scan-MRI/ NMR-Endoscopy.

UNIT 5 RECENT TRENDS & INSTRUMENTS FOR THERAPY 9 Hrs.

Dialysers - Surgical Diathermy - Electro Anaesthetic and Surgical Techniques. Sources of Electric Hazards and Safety Techniques. Single Channel Telemetry, Multi channel Telemetry, Implantable Telemetry, Wireless Telemetry,Telemedicine, Telemedicine Applications.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Khandpur, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation” 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Arumugam M, “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Publications, Reprint 2009.

3. Tompkins W J and Webster J G, "Design of Microcomputer Based Medical Instrumentation", Prentice Hall, 1991

4. Geddes L A and Baker L E, "Principle of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation" 3rd Edition, Wiley, 1989

5. Hill D.W, "Principle of Electronics for Medical Research", 2nd Edition, Butterworths, 1965.


Max Marks : 80 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.





SIC1401 COMPUTER CONTROL OF PROCESSES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To introduce analysis of digital control system

To introduce stability analysis and control in Z transform techniques To make the student familiar with PLC and distributed control systems.

UNIT 1 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Need for computer in a control system- functional block diagram of a control system- direct digital control

supervisory control-scheduling control- digital control interfacing: process inputs, outputs interface-data loggers-data acquisition system- type of displays, computer - various input/outputs- computer control action- treatment of inputs, outputs, and control strategies.

UNIT 2 TRANSFORMS AND STABILITY ANALYSIS 10 Hrs. Mathematical representation of sampling process- Z transform & properties - Modified Z transforms - State space

representation of discrete - data systems. Inverse Z transform-. pulse transfer function-data hold sampling frequency consideration-open loop& closed loop response of sampled data control system modified Z transform-stability of sampled data control system- stability in Z domain- Schur-Cohn stability test, bilinear transformation, Jury’s test of stability.

UNIT 3 CONTROL ALGORITHM 9 Hrs. Control algorithm- design of control algorithm using Z transform-dead beat algorithm - Dahlin’s method-ringing Kalman’s Estimator -PID controller -types- Tuning methods algorithm- selection of sampling time.

UNIT 4 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER 9 Hrs. PLC- configuration- ladder logic diagrams- relay based PLC- computer based PLC- typical control features-interlocks & alarms Timers -Counters.

UNIT 5 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 Hrs. DCS-different architectures - functional elements- remote electronic unit- redundancy- different methods of communication protocol network.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT BOOKS/ REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Deshpande P.B. & Ash R.H, "Computer Process Control", ISA publication, USA 1995. 2. Michal.P Lucas, “Distributed control system”, Van Nostrand Reinhold & Co 1986.

3. Frank D.Petruzulla, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, III edition 2005.

4. George Stephanopoulos, "Chemical Process Control- An Introduction to Theory & Practice”.- Prentice Hall of India.

5. Franklin, G.F., Powell J.D and Workman.M.L., "Digital Control of Dynamic Systems", Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, 1990

6. Gopal.M., "Digital Control & Static variable methods", 2n d Edition, TMH, 2007


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration: 3 Hrs.




SIC1402 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

Aims to bring a fundamental approach for obtaining a mathematical model for various processes and analyzing the designed system model.

To introduce Modeling of reactors and heat exchangers.

UNIT 1 NUMERICAL METHODS IN PROCESS MODELLING 9 Hrs.

Review of generation and solution of linear equations, algebraic equations, ordinary and partial differential equations. Solution of linear simultaneous equations, Gauss elimination, Gauss siedel method, successive over relaxation method. Iterative Convergence methods-Bisection method, Newton-Raphson method, Secant method.

UNIT 2 BASICS OF MODELLING 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Modeling, Mathematical models, Types of Mathematical models, Classification of models. Application and scope of coverage, Principles of formulation. Fundamental laws-Continuity equation, Energy equation, Equations of motion. Regression and Correlation analysis.

UNIT 3 PROCESS MODELLING AND IDENTIFICATION 9 Hrs.

Mathematical model for processes - first order, second order processes - process modelling from step test data - pulse testing for process identification - time-domain identification-Frequency response identification (magnetic response)

UNIT 4 MODELLING OF REACTORS 9 Hrs. Batch reactor, Continuous Stirred Tank Reactor, series of isothermal, Constant Holdup CSTR, CSTR with variable holdup, non isothermal CSTR, Plug flow Reactor, Packed bed reactor.

UNIT 5 MODELLING OF HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER OPERATIONS 9 Hrs. Modeling of heat exchangers, evaporators, absorption columns, binary distillation column and multi -component distillation column, batch distillation with holdup, Single component vaporizer

Max. 45 Hours


1 William L.Luyben, “Process Modelling, Simulation and Control For Chemical Engineers”, 2nd Edition. McGraw Hill International Editions,New York ,1990.

2. Davis M.E., “Numerical methods and Modelling for Chemical Engineers”, 1st Edition, Wiley, New York, 1984.

3. Ramirez W., “Computational Methods in Process Simulation”, 1st Edition, Butterworth’s Publishers, New York, 1989.

4. Mickley. H.S.Sherwood.T.S. and Reed C.E., “Applied Mathematics for Chemical Engineers”, 1st Edition, Tata McGraw Hill

Publishing Co. Ltd, New Delhi, 1989.

5. Westerberg A.M, Hutchison H.P, Motard R.L and Winter.P, “Process Flowsheeting”, Cambridge University Press, 1985.

6. Hangos K.M and Cameron I.T, “Process Modeling and Model Analysis”, Academic Press, 2001.

7 Singiresu S. Rao, “Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists”, Prentice Hall, Upper Saddle River, NJ, 2001. 8. Amiya K. Jana, “Chemical process modeling and computer simulation”, Second edition, PHI, 2011.







S I C 1 40 3

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETRO CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES


(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To familiarize the methods of crude oil extraction, processing and refining

To familiarize on Unit operations in petroleum refinery and petrochemical industry To introduce Production routes of important petrochemicals

To provide knowledge on Control of selected petrochemicals production processes To familiarize on the safety in instrumentation systems

UNIT 1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN DISTILLATION COLUMNS & REACTORS 10 HRS. Introduction to petroleum exploring, processing and refining constituents of crude oil - P& I diagram of petroleum

refinery Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: distillation equipment- variable and degrees of freedom - measurement and control of column pressure - liquid distillate -vapour distillate and inserts - control of feed, re-boiler and reflux - use of gas chromatograph-cascade and feed forward controls. Temperature control and pressure control in batch reactors.

UNIT 2 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN DRYERS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS 9 Hrs. Control of batch dryers and continuous dryers.- Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: variables and

degree of freedom - liquid to liquid heat exchangers - steam heaters - condensers -reboilers and vaporizers -use of cascade and feed forward control.

UNIT 3 CONTROL OF PUMPS 8 Hrs. Centrifugal pumps- on-off level control-pressure control-flow control- throttling control Rotary pump - Reciprocating pumps- throttling.

UNIT 4 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN EFFLUENT AND WATER/ WASTE WATER TREATMENT 9 Hrs.

Chemical oxidation -chemical reduction -neutralization -precipitation -biological control- waste water management process.

UNIT 5 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN EVAPORATORS AND INTRINSIC SAFETY 9 Hrs. Types Of Evaporators - Measurement And Control Of Absolute Pressure, Density, Conductivity, Differential Pressure And Flow In Evaporators- Intrinsic Safety Of Instruments

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bela.G. LIPTAK, “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries”, Chilton Book Company, 1994.

2. Goldstien R.F, Waddams A.L, “Petroleum Chemicals Industry”, Spon-Publisher, 3rd Edition,1967. 3. Considine D.M and Ross S.D, “ Handbook Of Applied Instrumentation” -Mcgraw Hill, 1964.

4. Curtis D.Johnson, ‘Process Control Instrumentation Technology’, 17th Edition, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2002. 5. George.T. Austin, “Shreve’s Chemical Process Industries”, 5th Edition, McGraw Hill, 1998.

6. Balchan J.G and Mumme K.I, ‘Process Control Structures and Applications’, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1988





S I C 1 40 4 INSTRUMENTATION IN INDUSTRIES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES

To introduce the complete operation of various industries To provide an exposure to the process and instrumentation & control applications in various industries like paper, petrochemical, iron and steel, mining, pharmaceutical, nuclear and power plant industries.

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW DESCRIPTION OF INDUSTRIAL PROCESSESS 11 Hrs. Description of process in Paper Industries Description of process in petrochemical industries: Description of process in iron and steel and mining industries - Description of process in pharmaceutical and nuclear industries.

UNIT 2 INSTRUMENTATION IN PAPER INDUSTRIES 7 Hrs.

Measurement of Basic weight, thickness, density, Porosity, smoothness, softness, hardness and compressibility; selection of suitable measurement hardware for flow, pressure, level, temperature, density, solids, consistency - moisture analyzers oxidation - reduction potential and pH.

UNIT 3 INSTRUMENTATION IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES 7 Hrs. P & I diagram of petroleum refinery, measurement and control of absolute pressure, density, conductivity, differential pressure and flow of evaporators. Measurement and control of column pressure, liquid distillate, vapour distillate.

UNIT 4 INSTRUMENTATION IN IRON AND STEEL AND MINING INDUSTRIES 11 Hrs. Iron and steel: Selection of suitable measurement hardware for temperature, pressure, level, flow, weighing and proportioning - special gauges for measurement of thickness and shape

Mining Industry: Weighing - conveyor belts - metal detectors - level sensors - nuclear density detectors - flow meters, Coal analyzer - thermogravimetri - gross calorific value - total sulphur analysis - ash analyser - online monitor- air quality monitoring- Sampling of ambient air - general air sampling system - Flue gas oxygen analyzer - analysis of impurities in feed water and steam - dissolved oxygen analyzer - chromatography - pH Meter - pollution monitoring instruments

UNIT 5 INSTRUMENTATION IN PHARMACUETICAL, NUCLEAR & POWER PLANT INDUSTRIES 9 Hrs. Pharmaceutical Industries: Flow measurement - pressure measurement - smoke detector

Nuclear Industries: Radiation detection instruments - Area monitors and in-place detectors - Temperature measuring devices - level sensors

Power Plant Industries: Metal temperature measurements, flow of feed water - fuel, air, steam with correction factor for temperature and pressure


1 Liptak B G, “Instrumentation in the processing industries”, Chilton book Company, 1973.

2. Considine D. M., “Process/Industrial Instruments and control Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 5th edition 1999. 3. Hower P. Kallen, “Hand Book of Instrumentation and Control”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1961.

4. Liptak B G, “Instrument Engineer’s Handbook, Vol. 2: Process Control and Optimization”, CRC Press, 2006.

5. BaskaraRao, “Petrochemicals”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1987.

6. Liptak B.G, “Process Measurement and Analysis”, Third Edition, Chilton Book Co., 2003

7. Considine D. M, “Hand Book of Applied Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984






SIC1405 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To provide the Fundamentals of PLC, PLC programming concepts, PLC applications To provide in-depth understanding of DCS, SCADA, and Computer Controlled Systems which are used in automation of various machines, processes and systems in industries

UNIT 1 BASICS OF PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) 9 Hrs. Definition- overview of PLC systems - Input/ Output modules - Power supplies - I/O slots, General PLC

programming procedures - programming on-off outputs, Auxiliary commands and functions - creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions - Ladder logic for traffic light control system. PLC basic programming - digital logic Gates - Boolean algebra. Basic PLC functions-register basics - timer functions - counter functions.

UNIT 2 PLC INTERMEDIATE FUNCTIONS 11 Hrs. Arithmetic functions - number comparison functions - skip and MCR functions - data move systems. PLC

Advanced intermediate functions- utilizing digital bits - sequencer functions - PLC Advanced functions: alternate-programming languages - operation. PLC-PID functions -PLC installation - trouble shooting and maintenance-controlling a robot - processes with PLC - design of inter locks and alarms using PLC. Use of PC as PLC - Application of PLC - Case Study of Bottle Filling System, Field Bus and HART Protocol

UNIT 3 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS (DCS) 9 Hrs.

Evolution of DCS - building blocks - different architectures-comparison of architectures- detailed descriptions and functions of local control units - basic elements & functions-operator stations - data highways - redundancy concepts.

UNIT 4 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS: COMMUNICATION FACILITIES AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. DCS communication Facilities - communication system requirements - architectural issues - protocol issues -

communication system standards - operator interfaces - low level and high level operator interfaces - Operator Displays - Engineering interfaces - low level and high level engineering interfaces - Applications of DCS - oil and gas (extraction, production and storage)

UNIT 5 COMPUTER CONTROLLED SYSTEMS 7 Hrs. Basic building blocks of Computer controlled systems - SCADA - data acquisition System - supervisory Control - Direct digital Control - software - Velocity algorithm & Position algorithm

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John Webb, W, Ronald Reis, A.,: “Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Applications”, 3rd Edition, Prentice hall

Inc., New Jersey, 1995. 2. Krishna Kant, “Computer based Industrial Control”, Prentice Hall India. 1997.

3. Lucas, M.P.,: “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York, 2nd Edition, 1986 4. Petruzella., “Programmable Logic Controllers” 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, Newyork. 5. Hughes, T. “Programmable Logic Controllers”, ISA Press 1994. 4th Edition. 6. Mckloni, D.T. “Real Time Control Networks”, ISA Press 1994.




SIC1406 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 1 0 4 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To introduce the principles and design concepts of various control and instrumentation components applied to process control system

UNIT 1 FLOW AND TEMPERATURE SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Orifice meter - design of orifice for given flow condition - rotameter - design of rotameter - Transmitters Pneumatic transmitter, Electronic transmitter, intelligent transmitter - signal conditioning for RTD - Zero and span adjustment in D/P transmitters and temperature transmitters

UNIT 2 PRESSURE AND LEVEL SYSTEM 12 Hrs.

Pressure Relieving devices Functions - Relief valve - safety valves - safety relief valves - Pilot operated relief valves - Bourdon gauges - design of Bourdon tube - Design of Air purge system for level measurement. Electronic P + I + D controllers - design - adjustment of set point, bias and controller settings.

UNIT 3 CONTROL VALVES 12 Hrs.

Control valves -Necessity-Comparison with other final control elements- valve characteristics - Control valve parameters control valve capacity-valve range ability-valve size-valve gain - Selection criteria - Control valve sizing Procedure-Cavitations& flashing in control valve.

UNIT 4 PUMPS 12 Hrs. Types of pumps - pump - performance - pipe work calculation - characteristics of different pumps - pump operation maintenance - instruments used in pumping practice pump noise and vibration - selection of pumps.

UNIT 5 LOGIC CIRCUIT 12 Hrs. Design of logic circuits for alarm and annunciator circuits, interlocks - design of microprocessor based PID controller.


1. Anderson. N.A., “Instrumentation for Process Measurement and Control”, Chillton Company, 1980, 3rd Edition, 1997, CRC Press

2. Considine D.M., “Process Instruments and Controls Handbook”, McGraw Hill Book Co. 1985, McGraw Hill Professional, 5th Edition, 1999

3. Warring. R.H., “Pumping Manual”, Gulf Publishing Co., 1984.

4. Johnson. C.D., “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”, Prentice Hal l Inc. 7th Edition, 2002.

5. Terry Bartelt, “Instrumentation and Process Control”, Nov.28, 2006, Delmar Cengage Learning.

6. Donald. P. Eckman, “Automatic Process Control’, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 1993.

7. www.amiestudy.com,www.loremate.com







SPH4051

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB (Common for ALL branches of B.E / B.Tech)

L T P Credit Total Marks

(First Semester or Second Semester) 0 0 2 1 50

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (ANY SIX)

1. Quincke’s method – Determination of magnetic susceptibility of a liquid. 2. Semiconductor diode - Determination of the forbidden energy gap.

3. Optical Fibre – Determination of Numerical aperture and attenuation loss.

4. Torsional pendulum – Determination of Moment of inertia and Rigidity modulus of the wire.

5. Young’s modulus – non-uniform bending- Determination of Young’s modulus of the material of beam. 6. Spectrometer – Hallow prism – Determination of Refractive index of a liquid.

7. Copper Voltameter – determination of electrochemical equivalent of copper.

8. Lees Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of bad conductor.

9. LASER grating – Determination of wavelength of laser light. 10. Newton’s Rings – Determination of Radius of Curvature of convex lens.

SCY4051

ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB (Common to ALL Branches of First or

L T P Credit Total Marks

Second Semester B.E / B.Tech.) 0 0 2 1 50

SUGGESTED LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Estimation of ferrous ion by potentiometric method.

2. Determination of pKa value of glycine using pH meter.

3. Estimation of mixture of acids by conductometric method,

4. Estimation of Nickel by using photocolorimeter. 5. Determination of viscosity of polymers by using Ostwald’s viscometer.

6. Estimation of total hardness of water sample by EDTA / AAS method.

SCS4101 PROGRAMMING IN C LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ALL BE/ B.Tech) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Program to understand the basic data types and input/output functions. 2. Program for Looping and decision statements. 3. Program on Functions. 4. Program on Arrays. 5. Program on String Manipulations

6. Program on Structures and Union. 7. Program on Pointers. 8. Program to demonstrate the Command Line Arguments. 9. Program using Dynamic memory allocation.

10. Program to implement the Random Access in Files. 11. Program to implement math function. 12. Program to Implement sorting algorithms 13. Program to Implement searching algorithms 14. Programs to solve some of the Engineering applications.



SCS4201 OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ALL branches of B.E / B.Tech except ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Develop a C++ program




5. Develop a C++ program 6. Develop a C++ program 7. Develop a C++ program

a). Single b). Multiple c). Multilevel d). Hierarchical e). Hybrid



10. Develop a C++ program 11. Develop a C++ program

to implement a class, object creation, member function invocation concept. to implement the various constructors and destructor concept.

to implement a friend function, Inline function.

to implement an operator (Unary & Binary) overloading concept. to implement a function overloading concept.

to implement a run time polymorphism.

to implement the following inheritance types.

to implement an Abstract class concept. to implement a Virtual function.

to find the number of characters in a file. to handle the exceptions.

Case Study

1. Categorization of living beings as humans, animals, birds, insects, etc.., using inheritance. 2. Develop user defined manipulator for the following named

a. Rupees for displaying Rs. and sets the precision to 2.

b. Dollar for displaying $.



S C S 4 10 3 PROGRAMMING IN C & C++ LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Develop a C program to 2. Develop a C program to 3. Develop a C program to 4. Develop a C program to 5. Develop a C program to 6. Develop a C program to 7. Develop a C program to 8. Develop a C program to 9. Develop a C++ program 10. Develop a C++ program 11. Develop a C++ program 12. Develop a C++ program 13. Develop a C++ program 14. Develop a C++ program 15. Develop a C++ program

a). Single b). Multiple c). Multilevel d). Hierarchical e). Hybrid


implement Looping and decision statements. implement Functions. implement Arrays. perform various String Manipulations implement Structures and Union. implement Pointers.

implement Dynamic memory allocation. implement to implement math functions

to implement a class, object creation, member function invocation concepts. to implement the various constructors and destructor concepts. to implement friend function and inline function. to implement operator (Unary & Binary) overloading concept. to implement function overloading concept. to implement run time polymorphism. to implement the following inheritance types.

to find the number of characters in a file.



S M E 4 0 5 3 ENGINEERING GRAPHICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(Common to CSE, IT, BIO, Chemical & Circuit Branches) 0 0 4 2 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE • The student is expected to acquire the drafting proficiency depending on the operational function in order to perform the

day to day activity.

FUNDAMENTALS Use of drafting instruments – BIS – Letttering – Vertical and Inclined – Dimensioning – Aligned and Unidirectional

systems – Scaling – Importance of graphics in engineering applications.

GEOMETRICAL CONSTRUCTIONS

Dividing a given straight line into any number of equal parts – Bisecting a given angle – Trisecting a right angle – Drawing a regular pentagon and hexagon given one side – Conic sections – Construction of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola by Eccentricity method.

PROJECTION OF POINTS AND PLANE Types of projection - Introduction to orthographic projection – Orthographic projection of points lying in four

quadrants – Projection of rectangular, square and circular planes.

PROJECTION OF LINES AND SOLIDS Orthographic projection of lines in first quadrant - Parallel to both the planes – Perpendicular to one plane –

parallel to one plane and inclined to other plane – Inclined to both the planes - Orthographic projection of prisms, pyramids, cone and cylinder in first quadrant – Axis perpendicular to HP – Axis perpendicular to VP – Axis inclined to only one plane of projection – Change of position method only.

SECTION OF SOLIDS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES Sectioning of prisms, pyramids, cylinder and cone in simple vertical positions with cutting planes perpendicular to

one plane and parallel or inclined to other plane - Need for development of surfaces – Development of prisms, pyramids, cylindrical and conical surfaces.

ISOMETRIC PROJECTION AND ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION Isometric scale – Isometric View and Isometric Projection of simple solids and combination of solids - Drawing

orthographic views (plan, elevation and profile) of objects from their isometric views.

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Natarajan, K.V., “A text book of Engineering Graphics”, Dhalakshmi Publishers, 2006

2. Bhatt, N.D. and Panchal, V.M., “Engineering Drawing”, Charotar Publishing House, 2010 3. Venugopal, K. and Prabhu Raja, V., “Engineering Drawing and Graphics + AutoCAD”, New Age International, 2009. 4. SP 46: “Engineering Drawing Practice for schools and colleges”, Bureau of Indian Standards.

END SEMESTER EXAMINATION QUESTION PAPER PATTERN

By using Mini Drafter 50 Marks (Note: Only after submission of all drawing sheets prescribed by staff member, the students will be allowed for university practical examination.)



S E C 4 05 1 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Study of circuit components and equipments (Component identification, color coding, checking diode, BJT, FET, study of CRO, Audio Oscillator, Multimeter, LCR meter)

2. Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diode

3. Characteristics of CE configuration (h parameter determination)

4. Characteristics of CB configuration

5. Characteristics of JFET 6. Characteristics of CC configuration

7. Characteristics of SCR & UJT

8. Characteristics of Diac & Triac

9. Characteristics of MOSFET 10. Characteristics of Photo transistor

11. Characteristics of LDR

12. Switching Characteristic of BJT

13. Clippers and Clampers 14. Voltage Multipliers

S E C 4 05 2 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Determination of Ripple factor, % Regulation of HWR with and without filter. 2. Determination of Ripple factor, % Regulation of FWR with and without filter.

3. Design of series voltage regulator and perform line and load regulation.

4. Design of various Biasing techniques for CE amplifier.

5. Design and construct BJT Common Emitter Amplifier using voltage divider bias (self-bias) with and without bypassed emitter resistor.

6. Darlington Amplifier using BJT.

7. Differential amplifier using BJT

8. Design of RC Phase shift oscillator for a specified frequency.

SIMULATION USING PSPICE

1. Frequency response of BJT Common Emitter Amplifier 2. Frequency response of BJT Common Base Amplifier

3. Frequency response of JFET Common Source Amplifier

4. Time response of Astable Multivibrator, Mono stable Multivibrator and Bistable Multivibrator

5. Frequency response of Class A Power Amplifier

6. Frequency response of Series and Shunt Feedback amplifier 7. Time response of Hartley, Colpitts Oscillator

8. Time and frequency response of Single Tuned Amplifier



S E C 4 0 5 3 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Study of circuit components and equipments (Component identification, Characteristics of Passive Circuit elements, Color coding, checking diode, BJT, FET, study of CRO, Function Generator, Multimeter, LCR meter).

2. Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diode

3. Characteristics of CE configuration (H-parameter determination)

4. Characteristics of CB configuration 5. Characteristics of JFET

6. Characteristics of CC configuration

7. Characteristics of SCR & UJT

8. Characteristics of DIAC & TRIAC

9. Characteristics of MOSFET 10. Characteristics of Tunnel diode

11. Characteristics of Photo transistor

12. Characteristics of LDR or LED/Photo detector-Optocoupling

13. Switching Characteristic of BJT 14. Clippers and Clampers

15. Voltage Multipliers

S E C 4 0 5 4 INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

1. Design and construct using IC741

a). b). c). d). e).

Inverting Non-inverting Adder Schmitt Trigger Differentiator

2. Waveform Generators using IC741

a). b). c).

Triangular wave generator Square wave generator Sine Wave generator

3. Design and construct PWM using IC 555 timer 4. Design a 3 bit DAC in R-2R ladder Configuration

5. Design, construct the filters using PSPICE

(a) Low pass filter (b) High pass filter (c) Band pass filter

(d) Band reject filter



DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

1. Verify the Basic gates / Boolean function using logic gates.

2. To Construct and verify the full and half adder using logic gates.

3. To Verify 2x4 Decoder and 4x2 Encoder functionally. 4. To construct and study the working of RS flip-flop, D flip-flop, T flip-flop, JK flip-flop

5. To verify various shift register

(a) SISO

(b) SIPO (c) PISO

(d) PIPO

6. Design a counter using suitable flip-flop

(a) MOD Counter

(b). Ripple Counter (c). Up- Down Counter

S E C 4 0 5 5 CIRCUITS AND NETWORKS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Verification of KCL & KVL 2. Verification of Thevenin’s & Norton’s Theorem

3. Series and Parallel Resonance

4. Constant K filters (both LPF & HPF)

5. M-Derived filters (both LPF & HPF) 6. Attenuators

7. Equalizers

8. Matching Networks

9. Twin T Network as Notch filter 10. Verification of reciprocity theorem

11. Verification of compensation theorem

12. Study of composite m-derived filters



S E C 4 05 6 COMMUNICATION LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. AM Modulator 2. AM Demodulator with different RC time constants

3. FM Modulator

4. Ratio detector as FM Demodulator

5. Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis 6. PLL as a demodulator

7. Effects of simple AGC over audio amplifier

8. Frequency response characteristics of IF amplifier

9. Construction and testing of a mixer stage 10. Verification of Sampling theorem

11. Pulse amplitude modulator using IC 555

12. Pulse Duration Modulation using IC 555

13. Balanced modulator circuit using MC1496

14. Synchronous Detector 15. Frequency Division Multiplexing

16. Squench circuit

S E C 4 05 7 NETWORKS AND INSTRUMENTATION LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Verification of KCL & KVL 2. Verification of Network theorems - Thevenin’s and Norton’s theorems, Superposition 3. Time and Frequency Response of RLC Circuits -Series and parallel resonance 4. Constant K-filters (LPF, HPF) 5. M derived filters (LPF, HPF) 6. Attenuators 7. Equalizers 8. Matching network 9. Twin-T network as notch filter

10. Calibrate the given ammeter and voltmeter 11. Extend the range of given voltmeter and ammeter 12. Construct and test the performance of Wheatstone bridge 13. Measure the amplitude and frequency of signals using dual trace CRO (Study of

Generator) 14. Measure the frequency and phase angle using CRO by Lissajous figure / Measure

using CRO 15. Measurement of capacitance and inductance using bridge circuits. 16. Test the performance of LVDT 17. Measure of strain using strain gauge. 18. Determine the characteristics of a Thermistor 19. Test the performance of a load cell 20. Construct and test the performance of a Photo Electric Transducer

Theorem

CRO and Function

voltage and current



S E C 4 0 5 8 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-I LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Transistor Biasing Circuits 2. Halfwave Rectifier With and Without Filter

3. Voltage Regulator

4. Fullwave Rectifier With and Without Filter using PSPICE

5. Adders

6. Subtractors 7. FlipFlop using PSPICE

8. Shift Register

9. Counters

10. Code Converters 11. Common Source JFET using PSPICE

12. Common Emitter BJT using PSPICE

S E C 4 0 5 9 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-II LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Class C Power Amplifier 2. Cascode Amplifier

3. Single tuned Amplifier

4. Feed back Amplifier

5. Hartley Oscillator

6. Colpitts Oscillator 7. Waveform generation using CMOS gates

8. PRBS generator

9. Encoders

10. Decoders 11. Multiplexers

12. Demultiplexers



S E C 4 06 0 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS-I LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


Transistor biasing and stabilization Regulation characteristics of Half Wave Rectifier (HWR) with and without filters

Regulation characteristics of FWR with or without filters Zener Voltage Regulators

78xx and 79xx IC Voltage Regulators DC Power Supply

Class B push pull / Class C tuned amplifier using transistor

Frequency response characteristics of RC coupled amplifier (two or more stages)

Darlington / Complementary symmetry pair amplifier Common source FET amplifier / DC Chopper amplifier using FET Power control circuit using SCR (Example Fan regulator)

Basic Combinatorial Circuits – Gate Verification, Adder and Subtractor using gates / 4 bit Adder and Subtractor using IC

Code Converter

Parity Generator and Checker

Encoder and Decoder / Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Counter Design using Flip-Flops

Shift-Register Design using Flip-Flops

S E C 4 06 1 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - II LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Effect of Negative Feedback over Amplifier 2. Hartley Oscillator / Colpitts Oscillator

3. RC Phase Shift Oscillator

4. Mono Stable Multivibrator using Transistors

5. Astable Multivibrator using Transistors 6. Blocking Oscillator / Saw Tooth Generator

7. Study of IC 741 ( Comparison of Ideal and Practical Characteristics of Op-Amp )

8. Application of Op-Amp (Adder, Sign Changer, Multiplier and Divider)

9. RC Oscillator / Wien bridge Oscillator using Op-Amp 741 10. Astable Multi Vibrator / Monostable Multi Vibrator using op-amp 741

11. Precision Rectifier using Op-Amp 741/ Voltage Amplifier using OP AMP

12. Schmitt trigger using IC 741

13. PLL as Frequency Multiplier

14. Active filters/ Wave shaping Circuits 15. Timer circuit using NE555

16. Op-amp as a Comparator

1. 2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7.

8.

9. 10.

11.

12.



S E C 4 0 6 2 ANALOG INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Study of IC 741 2. Measurement of Op amp parameters

3. Inverting, Non Inverting amplifier, Integrator and Differentiator

4. Precision Rectifiers (HW & FW)

5. Filters (LPF & HPF) 6. A/D & D/A Converters

7. RC Phase Shift Oscillator

8. Astable Multivibrator Using IC 741

9. Schmitt Trigger

10. PLL as voltage multiplier 11. Astable Multivibrator using IC 555

12. Comparators

13. Wein’s Bridge Oscillator

14. Instrumentation Amplifier

S E C 4 0 6 3 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


DESIGNING, ASSEMBLING AND TESTING OF:

1. Generation and Detection of AM, DSB-SC /SSB.

2. Generation and Detection Frequency Modulation (FM).

3. Sampling & Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing/ Frequency Division Multiplexing 4. Sampling & Time Division Multiplexing and Demultiplexing/ Frequency Division Multiplexing

5. Pulse Modulation-PAM/PWM/PPM.

6. Pulse code modulation /Delta Modulation,

7. Digital Modulation & Demodulation- ASK, PSK, QPSK, and FSK.

8. PLL, Frequency synthesizer 9. F amplifier / Frequency Mixer circuits.

10. Error control coding and Study of different Line coding methods.

11. Radiation pattern measurement of Omni directional Antennas and Radio Receiver measurements.

12. Study of spectrum analyzer.



S E C 4 0 6 4 COMMUNICATION NETWORKING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Experiments based on LAN Trainer 2. Exposure to NS2

3. Collision detection

4. Shortest path

S E C 4 0 6 5 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Study of ADSP 21 XX & TMS 320 C XX processor 2. Generation of Periodic Signals

3. Generation of Non Periodic Signals

4. Sampling

5. Modulation and Demodulation using Matlab 6. Computation of Z Transform & Inverse Z transform

7. Computation of Impulse & System Response

8. Design of FIR filters using Windowing Techniques

9. Design of IIR filters using Bilinear Transformation 10. Spectral Analysis using Matlab

11. Implementation of FFT using DIT and DIF algorithm

12. Convolution (Linear and Circular)

13. Correlation (Auto & Cross)

14. Frequency response of first and second order systems 15. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT),Inverse Fast Fourier Transform(IFFT)



S E C 4 0 6 6 MICROCONTROLLERS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


Study of 8051 8 Bit Addition and subtraction

8 bit multiplication and division

Addition & Subtraction of sixteen bit numbers.

Transferring a Block of data - Internal to External memory, External to External memory and, External to Internal memory

8-bit Conversion - ASCII to equivalent Hexa decimal and vice versa, Hexa to Decimal and vice-versa Largest and smallest number from the given array

Arrange the given numbers in ascending and descending order

Find the factorial of a given numbers Segregation of odd and even numbers

Find the square root of a given numbers

Filling External and Internal Memory

DAC Interfacing Stepper Interfacing Servo Interfacing ADC Interfacing Elevator Interfacing

S E C 4 0 6 7

MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB

L T P Credits Total Marks (For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


MICROPROCESSOR- 8085

1. Programs using Arithmetic Operations. 2. Programs for Code Conversions. 3. Largest, Smallest and Sorting of an Array (8085).

MICROCONTROLLER- 8051

1. Data Transfer Programs 2. Programs using Logical Instructions.

3. Programs using Boolean Instructions.

4. Reading and Writing on a Parallel Port.

5. Stepper Motor Controller. 6. Timer in Different Modes.

7. Serial Communication Implementation.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8.

9. 10.

11.

12.

13. 14.

15. 16. 17.



S E C 4 0 6 8 MICROPROCESSOR LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


I. PROGRAMS USING 8085 PROCESSOR

1. Programs for 8 bit Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division.

II. PROGRAMS USING 8086 PROCESSOR

1. Perform 32 Addition of two numbers. 2. Counting numbers of 1’s in word.

3. Arithmetic mean of Square of N Numbers.

4. Code Conversion – BCD to ASCII Conversion, ASCII to BCD Conversion.

5. Finding largest & smallest of given 16 bit Numbers. 6. To Sort given set of Numbers in Ascending & Descending Order.

7. Program using look up table Concept.

8. Matrix Manipulation – 16 bit addition

9. Perform LCM of two 16 bit numbers, GCD of four 16 bit numbers. 10. Generate Fibonacci Series, Factorial of given Numbers.

III. INTERFACING WITH 8086 1. Interfacing 8086 with Stepper motor. Use Step angle Calculation & rotate motor to a Specified angle.

2. Interface 8086 with DC motor & Control the Speed of the DC Motor using PWM.

3. Interface 8086 With ADC & display the digital input, Perform the resolution calculation and cross verify the result.

4. Interface 8086 With DAC & display the following waveform in CRO. a). Triangular

b). Saw tooth

c). Staircase

5. Interface 8086 with 7 segment display to display numbers as Characters. 6. Interface 8086 with LCD to display the name of the person.

S E C 4 0 6 9 SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Study of DSP Processor (TMS320c5416) 2. Arithmetic operations

3. Logical operations

4. Convolution of two sequence using MACD and MACP

5. Correlation of two sequence 6. Shifting and Negation for the given number

7. Reveal the concept of circular Buffer

8. Convolution using FIR

9. Block movement of data transfer

10. Waveform generation (square wave, sawtooth wave)



S E C 4 07 0 VLSI PROGRAMMING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Logic gates. 2. Adders and Subtractors

3. Fast adders

4. Flip Flops

5. Comparator 6. Counters

7. Encoder and Decoder

8. Multiplexer and Demultiplexer

9. Factorial of a number 10. Fibonacci series

11. Multipliers

12. Shift Registers

S E C 4 07 1 EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

EMBEDDED LAB Basic illustration programs using arithmetic, Logical and bit oriented instructions for AT89C51 Interfacing light bulb using relay Interfacing LCD display in static display Interfacing stepper motor with ULN2003 to rotate in specific angle Interfacing DC motor with H-bridge to make it rotate in front, back, left, right Illustration of interrupts using LED on/off using timer delay Illustration of serial communication to transfer data from one microcontroller to other

DSP LAB The first subdivision programs had to be conducted using Matlab and validated using manual calculation. The second subdivision has to be done in ALP programming using emulation.

(I) PROGRAMS USING MATLAB

1. Generation of Standard Signals

2. Design of FIR filters using Windowing technique 3. Design of IIR Filters using Butterworth filters

(ii) USING TMS320CX2407 DSP Processor

1. Single pulse fixed PWM generation using general purpose Timers.

2. Two pulse fixed PWM generation using Timer 1 and Timer 2.

3. Six pulse fixed PWM generation using full compare unit. 4. Six pulse fixed PWM generation with dead band.



S E C 4 0 7 2 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION LANGUAGE LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


VHDL DESIGN, SIMULATION, SYNTHESIS & FGPA IMPLEMENTATION OF

1. Logic gates

2. Adders and Subtractors

3. 4-bit multiplier 4. ALU

5. Flip Flops

VERILOG HDL DESIGN, SIMULATION, SYNTHESIS & FGPA IMPLEMENTATION OF 1. Logic gates

2. Adders and Subtractors

3. 4-bit multiplier

4. Flip Flops

5. Shift registers 6. Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters

7. Moore and Mealy FSM

8. RAM and ROM memories

9. 4-bit RISC CPU

S E C 4 0 7 3 MATLAB PROGRAMMING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Generation of signals 2. Linear and circular convolution

3. Auto correlation and cross correlation

4. Up-sampling and down-sampling

5. Decimation and interpolation

6. Power Spectrum Estimation 7. Image arithmetic & logical operations

8. Geometric Transformations of an image

9. 2D Transforms of an image

10. Edge detection using derivative filter mask 11. Smoothing & sharpening in spatial and frequency domain

12. Image enhancement using point processing and spatial operation

13. Bit error rate performance of Rayleigh fading channel

14. Bit error rate performance of AWGN channel in OFDM system 15. Performance of CDMA system



S E C 4 0 7 4 MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 0 0 4 2 100


OPTICAL FIBER EXPERIMENTS 1. Measurement of DC Characteristics of optical sources (LED and LASER Diode)and optical

Detectors (PIN Photo diode and Avalanche Photo diode)

2. Mode Characteristics of single mode optical Fibers (V number)

3. Measurement of Numerical Aperture, Attenuation, Connector and Bending losses in single mode and multimode optical fibers

4. Fiber optic Analog and Digital Link- frequency response (analog) and eye diagram (digital)

5. Optical digital filtering, splitting and combining

6. Optical Amplifiers

7. Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

MICROWAVE EXPERIMENTS

1. Reflex klystron characteristics 2. Gunn diode characteristics

3. Measurement of VSWR and impedance of unknown load

4. Measurement of dielectric constant

5. Study of power distribution in directional couplers and waveguide tees 6. Radiation pattern measurement of RF and microwave antennas (horn and patch antenna)

7. Characteristics of microstrip filters, couplers and power dividers

8. S parameter measurement of microstrip and waveguide components

MICROWAVE ENGINEERING AND L T P Credits Total Marks

S E C 4 0 7 5 OPTICAL COMMUNICATION LAB 0 0 4 2 100 (For ETCE)


1. Reflex Klystron, 2K 25 Mode reflex Characteristics 2. Reflex Klystron, 2K 25 Frequency, Wavelength Measurements

3. Gunn Diode VI Characteristics

4. Gunn Diode Frequency, Wavelength Measurements

5. Attenuation Measurement of Circulator, Isolator Using Klystron and Gunn diode 6. Directional Coupler Characteristics using Klystron

7. Magic Tee, E -Plane Tee, H -Plane Tee Characteristics using Klystron and Gunn diode

8. Measurement of Radiation Pattern and Gain of Horn Antenna using Klystron

9. Measurement of numerical aperture of optical fiber

10. Measurement of propagation loss, bending loss of optical fiber. 11. Measurement of mechanical misalignment of optical fiber.

12. VI characteristics of LED and LASER.

13. PAM, AM using optical fiber.

14. PPM, PWM using optical fiber. 15. Manchester coding

16. VI Characteristic of APD, LD

17. Mode characteristic of single mode fiber.



ELECTRIC CIRCUITS AND L T P Credits Total Marks

S E C 4 0 7 6 DEVICES LAB 0 0 4 2 100 (For E&C)


1. Verification of KVL and KCL 2. Verification of Thevenin and Norton Theorems.

3. Verification of Superposition Theorem.

4. Verification of Maximum power transfer and reciprocity theorems

5. Frequency response of series and parallel resonance circuits 6. Coupled Circuits

7. Characteristics of PN and Zener diode

8. Characteristics of CE configuration

9. Characteristics of CB configuration 10. Characteristics of UJT and SCR

11. Characteristics of JFET and MOSFET

12. Characteristics of DIAC and TRIAC

13. Characteristics of Photodiode and Phototransistor

S E C 4 0 7 7 DEVICES AND ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


DEVICES LAB

1. Characteristics of semiconductor diode & Zener diode.

2. Characteristics of CE & CB Configuration.

3. Characteristics of JFET & UJT. 4. Characteristics of LDR & Phototransistor.

5. Characteristics of SCR.

6. Characteristics of Diac & Triac.

ELECTRIC CIRCUITS LAB

1. Verification of Thevenin’s Theorem. 2. Verification of Superposition Theorem.

3. Verification of Reciprocity Theorem.

4. Verification of Compensation Theorem.

5. Verification of Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.



S E C 4 0 7 8 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Design of Power Supply circuit with Half wave rectifier with simple capacitor filter..

2. Design of Power Supply circuit with Full wave rectifier with simple capacitor filter

3. Class A Power Amplifier 4. Design of BJT /FET amplifier

5. Hartley and Colpitts Oscillators

6. Relaxation Oscillator

7. Shunt and Series Voltage Regulators

8. Single / Double tuned amplifier using BJT 9. Cascade / Cascode amplifier

10. Study of Switch mode power supply

S E C 4 0 7 9 ELECTRONIC DESIGN LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Analysis of transistor biasing circuits

2. Design and testing of half wave rectifier circuit without and with filter

3. Design and testing of full wave rectifier circuit without and with filter

4. Characteristics of series voltage regulator 5. Characteristics of shunt voltage regulator

6. Design and testing of RC coupled transistor amplifier

SIMULATION USING PSPICE (ORCAD) SOFTWARE

1. Simulation of transistor biasing circuits 2. Simulation of series voltage regulator

3. Simulation of shunt voltage regulator

4. Simulation of emitter follower

5. Simulation of FET amplifier 6. Simulation of class A power amplifier



S E C 4 08 0 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Design and Testing of Hartley Oscillator. 2. Design and Testing of RC Phase Shift Oscillator.

3. Design and Testing of Colpitt’s Oscillator.

4. Design and Testing of Astable Multivibrator.

5. Design and Testing of Schmitt Trigger.

6. Design and Testing of Tuned Amplifier. 7. Design and Testing of Series Feedback Amplifier.

8. Design and Testing of Shunt feedback amplifiers.

9. Design and Testing of Monostable Multivibrator using PSPICE Simulation.

10. Design and Testing of Bistable Multivibrator using PSPICE Simulation. 11. Design and Testing of Feedback Amplifier using PSPICE Simulation.

12. Design and Testing of Class A Power Amplifier using PSPICE Simulation.

S E C 4 08 1 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Inverting and Non Inverting amplifier using IC UA741 2. Opamp linear applications (Adder, Subtractor, Differentiator and Integrator)

3. Active filters(Low pass and High pass)

4. Comparator and Schmitt trigger.

5. Wave generators (Square and triangular wave generator). 6. RC Oscillator

7. Study of Instrumentation amplifier.

8. Multivibrator using Timer IC 555

9. PLL as frequency multiplier

10. Study of A/D and D/A converters. 11. Instrumentation Amplifier.



S E C 4 0 8 2 LINEAR AND DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

1. Characteristics of Operational amplifier 2. Applications of Operational amplifier: Integrator and Differentiator. 3. Design and testing of square and triangular waveform generators using Op-amps 4. Design and testing of Precision Rectifier.

5. Design and testing of Low pass and high Pass Filters. 6. Design and testing of a 4 bit D/A Converter.

DIGITAL INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

1. Design and testing of an half adder and full adder

2. Design and testing of 1 bit comparator using logic gates.

3. Design and testing of 4 bit shift register

4. Design and testing of 4 : 2 Encoder and 2 : 4 decoder 5. Design and testing of binary to gray and gray to binary code converter.

MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER L T P Credits Total Marks

S E C 4 0 8 3 LAB 0 0 4 2 100 (For E&C)


1. Study of 8 bit Microprocessor and interfacing facilities 2. Programming with 8085 - 8-bit / 16-bit addition and subtraction

3. Programming with 8085 – 8-bit/16-bit multiplication/ division using repeated addition/subtraction

4. Programs for sorting ‘n’ number.

5. Programming with 8085-code conversion. 6. Programming with 8086 - addition, subtraction, multiplication and division

7. Interfacing of D/A and A/D converters using 8085.

8. Interfacing 8279 with 8085 Microprocessor

9. Stepper motor interfacing with 8085 Microprocessor 10. Traffic control interfacing with 8085 Microprocessor

11. 8051 Microcontroller based experiments – Simple assembly language programs

12. 8051 Microcontroller based experiments – simple control applications.



MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER L T P Credits Total Marks

S E C 4 0 8 4 LAB 0 0 4 2 100 (For EIE)


1. Addition & Subtraction of 8 & 16 bit using 8085 using Indirect Addressing mode. 2. Multiplication & Division of 8 & 16 bit using 8085.

3. Interfacing of Stepper motor using 8085.

4. Interfacing of Traffic light using 8085.

5. Arithmetic operation of 16 bit data using 8086. 6. Largest number in an array using 8086.

7. Sorting using 8086.

8. Moving block of data using 8086.

9. Arithmetic operation of 8 bit data using 8051. 10. Code conversion using 8051: a. BCD to HEX b. HEX to BCD

11. Interfacing of ADC using 8051.

12. Interfacing of DAC using 8051.



SEE4051 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EIE and E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Open circuit characteristics of separately excited dc shunt generator. 2. Load characteristics of self excited dc shunt generator

3. Load characteristics of dc Compound generator

4. Load characteristics of dc shunt motor

5. Speed control of dc shunt motor. 6. Load characteristics of dc series motor

7. Open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer.

8. Load test on single phase transformer

9. Brake load test on three phase squirrel cage induction motor 10. Load test on single phase Induction motor

11. Wiring circuits for a) Calling Bell

b) Stair Case

c) Fluorescent Lamp d) Basic household wiring using switches, fuses, Indicator – lamps etc.,

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & L T P Credits Total Marks

SEE4052 ELECTRONIC DEVICES LAB 0 0 4 2 100

(For EEE)


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS LAB

1. Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws

2. Verification of Theorems

3. Series and Parallel AC circuits 4. R-L and R-C Transients with DC Excitation

5. Series and Parallel Resonance

6. Clippers and Clampers

ELETRONIC DEVICES LAB

1. Characteristics of Semiconductor diode and Zener diodeto find static and dynamic resistance from the characteristics

2. Characteristics of CB configuration

3. Characteristics of CE configuration

4. Drain and transfer characteristics of JFET. To obtain gain , transconductance and amplification factor 5. Characteristics of SCR find holding current ,break over voltage and holding voltage

6. Characteristics of UJT find intrinsic standoff ratio, Peak voltage and valley voltage

7. Characteristics of LDR with illumination and without illumination

8. Voltage multiplier



SEE4053 DC MACHINES AND TRANSFORMER LAB L T P Credits Total

Marks (For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. OCC and load characteristics of self excited dc shunt generator 2. OCC and load characteristics of separately excited dc shunt generator

3. Load characteristics of DC series generator

4. Load characteristics of DC compound generator (Differential and Cumulative)

5. Load characteristics of DC shunt motor 6. Load characteristics of DC series motor

7. Load characteristics of DC compound motor (Differential and Cumulative)

8. Speed control of DC shunt motor

9. Swinburne’s test on DC shunt motor 10. Hopkinson’s test.

11. OC and SC test on single phase transformer

12. Load test on single phase transformer

13. Parallel Operation of Single Phase Transformer

14. Sumpner’s Test on Single Phase Transformer

SEE4054 AC MACHINES LAB L T P Credits Total

Marks (For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Regulation of Alternator by EMF and MMF method. 2. Regulation of Alternator by Potier method.

3. Regulation of salient pole Alternator by slip test.

4. Load test on 3 Phase Alternator.

5. Synchronizing and parallel operation of three phase Alternator with infinite bus bar. 6. V curve and inverted V curves of synchronous motor.

7. Brake load test on Three phase squirrel cage induction motor.

8. Load test on Three phase Slip ring Induction motor.

9. Load test of Single phase Induction motor 10. Equivalent circuit of Single phase Induction motor.

11. Circle diagram and performance of three phase Induction motor.

12. Study on characteristics of Induction generator



SEE4055 MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROLS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Measurement of self inductance by Maxwell’s inductance bridge 2. Calibration of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Wattmeter

3. Calibration of Three phase energy meter

4. Instrumentation Amplifier

5. Study of LVDT and Pressure Transducer 6. Design of P,PI and PID controller

7. Study of temperature measuring transducers (Thermocouple)

8. Transfer function of DC generator

9. Transfer function of Field controlled DC motor 10. Transfer function of Armature controlled DC motor

11. Speed Control of Ward Leonard system

12. Transfer function of lag, lead and lag- lead network

SEE4056 POWER SYSTEMS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Computation of Power System Components in Per Units. 2. Formulation of the bus admittance matrix by Direct inspection method

3. Formulation of the bus admittance matrix by Singular transformation method.

4. Formation of bus impedance matrix

5. Analysis of Daily Load Curve 6. Automatic Generation Control

7. Determination of Transmission line parameters

8. Numerical Integration of Swing equation.

9. Load flow solution using Gauss – Seidal method 10. Load flow solution using Newton – Rapson method

11. Fault analysis.

12. Characteristics of Microcontroller based Frequency relay

13. Construction of simple ladder program for Logic gates. 14. Applications of Delay Timers in PLC.

15. Applications of Counters in PLC.



SEE4057 POWER ELECTRONICS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. SCR Triggering Circuits 2. Single Phase Half & Fully Controlled Bridge Rectifier

3. SCR based series and Parallel Inverter

4. AC Regulator-Phase Control Using DIAC &TRIAC

5. Single phase Cycloconverters 6. MOSFET Based Buck & Boost Converter

7. IGBT Based Single Phase PWM Inverter

8. Voltage Commutated Chopper

9. Current Commutated Chopper 10. Complementary Commutated Chopper



SIC4051 TRANSDUCER LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Characteristics of RTD 2. Characteristics of Thermistor

3. Characteristics of Thermocouple

4. Characteristics of

a. Inductive Pickup

b. LVDT 5. Characteristics of

a. Capacitive Pickup

b. DC Potentiometer

6. Characteristics of Strain Gauge 7. Characteristics of

a. Load Cell

b. Measurement of Liquid Level Using Load Cell

8. Characteristics of Speed Measurement Sensors 9. Characteristics of LDR and Optocoupler

10. Study of Calibrators

11. Measurement of Resistance Using

a. Kelvin Double Bridge b. Wheatstone Bridge

SIC4052 MEASUREMENTS AND TRANSDUCERS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Measurement of Medium Resistance Using Wheat stone’s Bridge 2. Measurement of Low Resistance Using Kelvin’s Double Bridge

3. Measurement of Capacitance Using Schering’s Bridge

4. Measurement of Inductance Using Anderson’s Bridge

5. Characteristics of Potentiometric transducer. 6. Strain Gauge characteristics

7. Load cell characteristics

8. Characteristics of LVDT

9. Characteristics of Thermocouple 10. Temperature measurement using resistive principle

11. Hall Effect Transducer

12. Measurement of speed by using stroboscope



S I C 4 05 3 PROCESS CONTROL LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Characteristics of I/P converter and P/I converter. 2. Characteristics of Control valve.

3. Study and control of a Level process using ON-OFF, P, PI, PD, PID controllers.

4. Study and control of a Pressure process using ON-OFF, P, PI, PD, PID controllers.

5. Study and control of a Flow process using ON-OFF, P, PI, PD, PID controllers. 6. Study and control of a Temperature process using ON-OFF, P, PI, PD, PID controllers.

7. Verification of logic gates using PLC.

8. Study of DCS.

9. Cascade Control.

10. Ratio Control. 11. Interacting and Non-Interacting System.

12. Tuning of Controller using Ziegler- Nicholas Method.

S I C 4 05 4 MEASUREMENTS LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Measurement of Inductance using Anderson’s bridge 2. Measurement of Capacitance using Schering’s bridge

3. Calibration of ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter using potentiometer

4. Calibration of wattmeter at different power factors

5. Calibration of Energy meter 6. Testing of current transformers

7. Design, construction and calibration of series and shunt type ohmmeters

8. Measurement of voltage, frequency using CRO

9. Measurement of phase difference by CRO using Lissajous figures

10. Measurement of angular displacement using potentiometer 11. AC servo motor speed torque characteristics

12. PC based data logging

13. Study of power measurement using VI or IV method.



SIC4055 INDUSTRIAL PROCESS CONTROL LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Characteristics of I/P Converter 2. Characteristics of Differential Pressure Transmitter

3. Characteristics of Valve with and without Positioner

4. Study and Control of Temperature Process

5. Study and Control of Level Process 6. Study and Control of Flow Process

7. Study and Control of Pressure Process

8. Control of a Process Using Ziegler Nichols Method

9. Control of a Process Using Process Reaction Curve Method

10. Characteristics of Control Valve 11. Study on Interacting System /Non Interacting System

12. Study of the response of ON-OFF, P,PI, PID Controllers

13. Study of Cascade Control

14. Study of Feed-Forward Control 15. Study of Ratio Control

16. Study on Decoupling Effect

SIC4056 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100

SUGGESTEDLIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Level Measurement using DPT. 2. Flow Measurement using Orifice and Venturimeter.

3. Calibration of Thermocouple.

4. Calibration of Pressure Transmitter.

5. Torque Measurement. 6. Viscosity Measurement.

7. UV Visible Spectrophotometer.

8. IR Spectrophotometer.

9. Vacuum Pressure Measurement. 10. Conductivity Meter Calibration and Measurements of conductivity of test solutions.

11. pH meter standardization and measurement of pH Values of test solutions.

12. Radiation Pyrometer and IR Thermometer.



SIC4057 SYSTEM DESIGN LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 0 0 4 2 100


MATLAB

1. Design of Digital Controller using Deadbeat Algorithm. 2. Design of Digital Controller using Dahlin’s Algorithm. 3. Design of Digital Controller using Kalman’s Algorithm. 4. Design of Fuzzy logic Controller .

5. Design of Neural Network . 6. Design of Model Predictive Controller.

LAB VIE W

7. Building VI to demonstrate conversion of Centigrade to Fahrenheit and

8. Building VI o create a subroutine for conversion of Centigrade to Fahrenheit.

9. Building VI for analyzing and logging of data.

10. Building VI to demonstrate waveform generator. 11. Building VI to demonstrate error clusters and handling.

12. Building VI to design multimeter.

13. Building VI to demonstrate ON-OFF controller.

SIC4058 DIGITAL AND CONTROL LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Simulation of standard test signals 2. Step Response of First Order System

3. Ramp Response of First Order System

4. Step Response of Second Order System

5. Ramp Response of Second Order System 6. Sequential Control Using PLC

7. Control of Process Using Deadbeat Algorithm

8. Control of Process Using Dahlin’s Algorithm

9. Control of Process Using Kalman’s Algorithm

10. Design and Simulation of PID Controller 11. Study of Cascade Control

12. Study of Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA)

13. Study of Distributed Control Systems (DCS)

14. Study of frequency response analysis for first order and second order system.



SIC4059 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LAB L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 0 0 4 2 100


1. Basic Arithmetic operations 2. Boolean operations

3. Factorial of a given Number Using For Loop

4. Sorting even numbers using while loop in an array

5. Array maximum and minimum 6. Bundle and unbundle cluster

7. Flat and stacked sequence

8. Application using formula node

9. Median filter

10. Convolution of two signals 11. Windowing technique

12. Instrumentation of an amplifier to acquire an ECG signal

13. Acquire, Analyze and present an EEG using virtual Instrumentation

14. Study on simple feedback loop simulation.



SEC1601 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To familiarize the fundamental concepts of microprocessor architecture. Learn the design aspects of I/O and Memory Interfacing circuits.

Study about communication and bus interfacing of advanced microprocessors. To introduce the concepts of advanced microprocessors.

To introduce the basic architecture of Pentium family of processors.

UNIT 1 ADVANCED MICROPROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs.

Internal Microprocessor Architecture - Real mode memory addressing - Protected mode memory addressing - Memory paging - Data addressing modes - Program memory addressing modes - Stack memory addressing modes - Data movement instructions - Program control instructions - Arithmetic and Logic Instructions. Intel 80186 - Architecture.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO INTEL 80286, 80386 & 80486 9 Hrs.

Introduction to 80286 - Architecture, Real address mode & protected virtual address mode. 80386 Microprocessor - Architecture, Pins & Signals, Memory System Registers, 80386 operating modes - Paging Technique, Protected Mode Operation & Intel 80486 Architecture. Comparison of Microprocessors (8086 - 80286 - 80386 - 80486)

UNIT 3 PENTIUM PROCESSORS 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Pentium Microprocessor - Special Pentium registers - Branch Prediction Logic, Floating Point Module, Cache Structure, and Superscalar Architecture. Pentium memory management - New Pentium Instructions - Pentium Processor -Special Pentium pro features - Pentium 4 processor

UNIT 4 RISC PROCESSORS I 9 Hrs.

PowerPC-620 - Instruction fetching - Branch Prediction - Fetching - Speculation, Instruction dispatching - dispatch stalls - Instruction Execution - Issue stalls- Execution Parallelism - Instruction completion - Basics of P6 micro architecture - Pipelining - Memory subsystem

UNIT 5 RISC PROCESSORS II (SUPERSCALAR PROCESSORS) Conversion of Colour Models; Basic of Full-Colour Image Processing; Colour Transformations; Smoothing;

Sharpening; Segmentation; Applications of Image Processing - Motion Analysis, Image Fusion, Image Classification

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004

2. Barry B.Brey , “The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro Processor,

Pentium II, Pentium III, Pentium 4, Architecture, Programming and interfacing”, Prentice Hall of India Private Limited, New

Delhi, 2003

3. Alan Clements, “The Principles of computer Hardware”, Oxford University Press, 3rd Edition, 2003

4. John Paul Shen, Mikko H.Lipasti, “Modern Processor Design”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2006

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 10 marks 80 Marks



SEC1602 ASIC DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To familiarize with FPGA, ASIC floor planning and optimization algorithms.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO ASIC 9 Hrs.

Types of ASICs - Design flow - CMOS transistors CMOS Design rules - Combinational Logic Cell - Sequential logic cell - Data path logic cell - Transistors as Resistors - Transistor Parasitic Capacitance- Logical effort - Library cell design - Library architecture

UNIT 2 FIELD PROGRAMMABLE GATE ARRAYS 9 Hrs.

Organization of FPGAs - FPGA Programming Technologies-Programmable Logic Block Architectures-Programmable Interconnects - Programmable I/O blocks in FPGAs - Dedicated Specialized Components of FPGAs-Applications of FPGAs.

UNIT 3 PROGRAMMABLE ASIC 9 Hrs. Introduction-Programming Technology - Device Architecture -The Xilinx XC2000- XC3000 and XC4000 Architectures. The Actel ACT1 -ACT2 and ACT3 Architectures.

Anti fuse - static RAM - EPROM and EEPROM technology - Altera FLEX - Altera MAX DC &AC inputs and outputs - Clock & Power inputs - Xilinx I/O blocks.

UNIT 4 ASIC FLOOR PLANNING, PLACEMENT AND ROUTING 9 Hrs.

ASIC Construction: Physical Design - System Partitioning - FPGA Partitioning - Partitioning Methods. Floor-planning and Placement: Floor planning – Placement - Physical Design Flow. Routing: Global Routing - Detailed Routing- Special Routing - Design checks.

UNIT 5 OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHMS 9 Hrs.

Planar subset problem(PSP) - Single layer global routing single layer detailed routing wire length and bend minimization technique - Over the cell (OTC) Routing - Multichip modules (MCM ) - Programmable logic arrays-Transistor chaining - Weinberger Arrays - Gate Matrix Layout - 1 D compaction-2D compaction.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Stephen M. Trimberger, “Field Programmable Gate Array Technology “, Springer International Edition, 1994

2. Charles H. Roth Jr, Lizy Kurian John , “Digital Systems Design “ , Cengage Learning,

3. M. J. S. Smith, "Application Specific Integrated Circuits”, Addison -Wesley Longman Inc., 1997.

4. Farzad Nekoogar and Faranak Nekoogar, “From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach”, Prentice Hall PTR, 2003

5. John V. Oldfield, Richard C. Dorf , “ Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Wiley India

6. Pak K. Chan, Samiha Mourad , “ Digital Design Using Field Programmable Gate Arrays”, Pearson Low Price Edition.

7. Ian Grout, “Digital Systems Design with FPGAs and CPLDs”, Elsevier, Newnes.

8. Wayne Wolf , “FPGA based System Design”, Prentice Hall Modern Semiconductor Design.






SEC1603 AUTOMATIC SPEECH RECOGNITION L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the fundamentals of speech signals, Time domain and Frequency domain techniques for speech signals and different analysis methods of speech signals and recognition techniques On completion of this course the student will recognize

Acquire knowledge about the fundamentals and digital processing of speech signals. Acquire knowledge about the Time domain and Frequency domain techniques for preprocessing of speech signals.

Acquire knowledge about the different analysis techniques of speech signals

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF SPEECH SIGNAL 9 Hrs.

History of speech recognition research, The Speech Signal: Speech production mechanism, Classification of speech, sounds, nature of speech signal, models of speech production. Speech signal processing: purpose of speech processing, digital models for speech signal, Digital processing of speech signals, Significance, short time analysis

UNIT 2 TIME DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Time domain parameters of speech, methods for extracting the parameters, Zero crossings, Auto correlation function, pitch estimation

UNIT 3 FREQUENCY DOMAIN METHODS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Short time Fourier analysis, filter bank analysis, spectrographic analysis, Formant extraction, pitch extraction, Analysis - synthesis systems. Homomorphic Signal Processing

UNIT 4 SPEECH ANALYSIS AND SPEECH RECOGNITION 9 Hrs.

Cepstral analysis of speech, formant and pitch estimation, Mel frequency cepstrum computation, Applications of speech processing - Speech recognition, Speech synthesis and speaker verification, Basic pattern recognition approaches, Parametric representation of speech, Evaluating the similarity of speech patterns, Isolated digit Recognition System, Continuous digit Recognition System. Vector quantization, speech coding

UNIT 5 HIDDEN MARKOV MODEL FOR SPEECH RECOGNITION 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Hidden Markov Model (HMM), Types of HMM, Hidden Markov Model (HMM) for speech recognition, Viterbi algorithm, Training and testing using HMMs, Adapting to variability in speech (DTW), Language models. Example of speech recognition project.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. L. Rabiner and B.-H. Juang, “Fundamentals of Speech Recognition”, Prentice Hall, 1995,ISBN 0-1 3-01 51 57-2

2. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schafer, “Digital Processing of Speech Signals”, Prentice-Hall, 1978, ISBN 0-13-213603-1.

3. J.L Flanagan, “Speech Analysis Synthesis and Perception” - 2nd Edition - Springer Vertag, 1972.

4. I.H.Witten, “Principles of Computer Speech” , Academic press, 1983.

5. Douglas O'Shaughnessy , “Speech Communications: Human & Machine” -, 2nd ed., IEEE Press.

6. Thomas F. Quateri, “Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing: Principles and Practice” - 1st Ed., PE.

7. Claudio Becchetti and Lucio Prina Ricotti, “Speech Recognition”, Wiley


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1604 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL AND IMAGE PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the basics about Biomedical Signals and Images, Knowledge about ECG, EEG, XRAY Images, CT Scanners, MRI Images and PET images and applications of same On completion of this course the student will recognize Acquire knowledge about the basics of Biomedical signals and Images Acquire knowledge about the ECG, EEG, X-RAY and CT Scanner Acquire knowledge about the Applications of biomedical Signals and Images

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION OF BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS 9 Hrs.

Bio medical Signal, Types of biomedical signals - ECG, ENG, EMG, ERG - Characteristics of some dynamic biomedical signals - Acquisition of physiological signal, characteristics, frequency domain representation; stationary and non-stationary bio-signals, Waveform detection and Pattern Recognition, Computation of diagnostic signal parameters.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION OF BIOMEDICAL IMAGES 9 Hrs.

Overview of medical imaging technology, systems, and modalities. characteristics of biomedical Images, Medical Image Formation Principles, Medical Image Storage, Archiving and Communication Systems and Formats: PACS, DICOM, TIFF, RIS and HIS.

UNIT 3 PROCESSING OF BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS 9 Hrs.

Electrical Activities of Cell - Ion Transport in Biological Cells - Electrical Characteristics of Cell Membranes Hodgkin-Huxley Model Electrical Data Acquisition, Electrocardiogram - Function and Structure of the Heart - Electrocardiogram: ECG Processing and Feature Extraction of ECGs, Electroencephalogram - Signal of the Brain Evoked Potentials, EEG Feature Extraction of EEGs

UNIT 4 PROCESSING OF BIOMEDICAL IMAGES 9 Hrs.

X-Ray Imaging and Computed Tomography, Biomedical CT Scanners, Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI),Physical and Physiological Principles of MRI, Ultrasound Imaging Generation and Detection of Ultrasound Waves, Physical and Physiological Principles of Ultrasound, Positron Emission Tomography - Physical and Physiological, Principles of PET

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS AND IMAGES 9 Hrs.

Neurological Applications - The electroencephalogram EEG rhythms & waveform categorization of EEG activity, recording techniques EEG, applications - Epilepsy, sleep disorders, brain computer interface. Modelling EEG, linear stochastic models, Non linear modelling of EEG, Applications - Applications of Medical Imaging: Validation, Image Guided Surgery, Image Guided Therapy, Computer Aided Diagnosis/Diagnostic Support Systems

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Kayvan Najarian and Robert Splinter ,“Biomedical signal and image processing”, Second edition,2012

2. Atam P.Dhawan, “Medical Image Analysis”, Wiley Interscience Publication, NJ, USA 2003.

3. D.C.Reddy,”Biomedical Signal Processing Principles and Techniques”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2005.

4. L. Yaroslavsky. Lecture notes. http://www.eng.tau.ac.il/~yaro


PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1605 DIGITAL IMAGE AND MULTIMEDIA PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To know the fundamental concepts of Image and Multimedia Processing To become conversant with various Image Enhancement techniques To study and understand various Morphological and segmentation concepts and techniques To study various Hardware platforms and Software tools, various Audio and Video compression concepts and coding Upon completion of this course, a successful student should be able to design and implement programs that

deal with image, video, and audio data. UNIT 1 DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs.

Elements of Visual Perception; Image Sensing and Acquisition; Image Sampling and Quantization; Basic Relationships between Pixels; Monochromatic Vision Models; Colour Vision Models; Colour Fundamentals; Colour Models.

UNIT 2 IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9 Hrs. Introduction; Point Processing - Image Negatives, Log transformations, Power Law Transformations,

Piecewise-Linear Transformation Functions; Arithmetic/Logic Operations - Image Subtraction, Image Averaging; Histogram Processing - Histogram Equalization, Histogram Matching; Spatial filtering - Smoothing, Sharpening; Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal Low Pass, Butterworth Low Pass, Gaussian Low Pass; Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal High Pass, Butterworth High Pass, Gaussian High Pass. UNIT 3 MORPHOLOGICAL PROCESSING & SEGMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Morphological Image Processing - Logic Operations involving Binary Images; Dilation and Erosion; Opening and Closing; Basic Morphological Algorithms - Boundary Extraction, Region Filling, Thickening, Thinning; Image Segmentation - Detection of Discontinuities; Edge Linking; Boundary Detection; Thresholding - Global and Adaptive; Region based Segmentation. UNIT 4 MULTIMEDIA 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Multimedia - Media and Data streams - Properties of a Multimedia system - Data streams characteristics - Information units - Multimedia Hardware platforms - Memory and storage devices- Input and output devices - Multimedia software tools. Multimedia Building blocks - Audio: Basic sound concepts - Music-speech-audio file formats - Images and graphics: Basic concepts- Computer image processing. UNIT 5 AUDIO AND VIDEO COMPRESSION 9 Hrs.

Human Auditory system - WAVE audio format-Speech compression - MPEG4 Audio lossless coding(ALS) - VIDEO compression Introduction - Motion compensation - video signal representation ,ITU -T Recommendation H.261, Model Based Coding - MPEG1 - MPEG2 H.262 ,ITU-T Recommendations H.263, Advanced Video Coding, ATM Networks - Compressions issues in ATM networks, Compression Algorithms for packet videos.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, ŏ” Digital Image Processing”, Pearson , Second Edition, 2004.

2. David Saloman,”Data compression” , Springer International, 4th Edition. 3. Khalid Sayood, ”Introduction To Data Compressio” ,Elsevier 3rd Edition.

4. Ralfsteinmetz and Klara Nahrstedt, “Multimedia Computing, Communications & Applications”- Pearson Edn

5. Rajan Parekh, “Principles of Multimedia, Tata Mc Graw Hill.

6. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processin”, Pearson 2002.

7. J F Koegel Buford- -Multimedia systems Addison Wesley

8. T Vaughan-,”Multimedia: Making it work” Tata Mc Graw Hill

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit with internal choice, each carrying 2 marks 1 80 Marks



SEC1606 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE, EIE, E&C, ETCE and CSE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the basic principles and methods of digital image processing To have a comprehensive background in image filtering

To develop analytic skill to process images

UNIT 1 DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Elements of Visual Perception; Image Sensing and Acquisition; Image Sampling and Quantization; Basic

Relationships between Pixels; Monochromatic Vision Models; Colour Vision Models; Colour Fundamentals; Colour Models

UNIT 2 IMAGE ENHANCEMENT 9 Hrs.

Introduction; Point Processing - Image Negatives, Log transformations, Power Law Transformations, Piecewise-Linear Transformation Functions; Arithmetic/Logic Operations - Image Subtraction, Image Averaging; Histogram Processing - Histogram Equalization, Histogram Matching; Spatial filtering - Smoothing, Sharpening; Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal Low Pass, Butterworth Low Pass, Gaussian Low Pass; Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters - Ideal High Pass, Butterworth High Pass, Gaussian High Pass.

UNIT 3 IMAGE RESTORATION 9 Hrs.

A Model of Image Degradation/Restoration Process; Noise Models; Inverse Filtering, Minimum Mean Square Error Filtering, Constrained Least Square Filtering; Geometric Mean Filter; Geometric Transformations - Spatial Transformations, Gray-Level Interpolation.

UNIT 4 MORPHOLOGICAL PROCESSING & SEGMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Morphological Image Processing - Logic Operations involving Binary Images; Dilation and Erosion; Opening and Closing; Basic Morphological Algorithms - Boundary Extraction, Region Filling, Thickening, Thinning; Image Segmentation - Detection of Discontinuities; Edge Linking; Boundary Detection; Thresholding - Global and Adaptive; Region based Segmentation.

UNIT 5 COLOUR IMAGE PROCESSING & APPLICATIONS Conversion of Colour Models; Basic of Full-Colour Image Processing; Colour Transformations; Smoothing;

Sharpening; Segmentation; Applications of Image Processing - Motion Analysis, Image Fusion, Image Classification.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rafael C. Gonzalez, Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, 2 n d Edition, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.

2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2002.

3. William K. Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2001.

4. Rafeal C.Gonzalez, Richard E.Woods and Steven L. Eddins, “Digital Image Processing using Matlab”, Pearson Education, Inc., 2004.

5. Bernd Jähne, “Digital Image Processing”, 5th Revised and Extended Edition, Springer, 2002.






SEC1608 VLSI BROADBAND COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the knowledge about the components used to construction, theory and operation of the

Broadband communication systems.

On completion of this course the student will recognize

Acquire knowledge about Communication devices Acquire knowledge about Broadband communication Circuits

Acquire knowledge about VLSI communication systems

UNIT 1 BROADBAND COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

Components of Broadband Communication systems, Communications Network Architecture, Cable Broadband Data Network Architecture. The Importance of Broadband Network Architectures, the Future of Broadband Telecommunications.

UNIT 2 INTERNET, INTRANET AND EXTRANET 9 Hrs. Internet Protocol Suite , IPv6: Next-Generation Internet ,Quality of Service , Applications and Services ,Voice

over IP ,Internet Security ,Intranet Overview , Extranet Overview Intranet Technologies , Extranet Technologies, The Power-Law Rule for Intranets and Extranets ,The Topology Models, Intranet and Extranet applications, Extranet and Intranet Design Issues

UNIT 3 VLSI COMMUNICATION DEVICES 9 Hrs. CMOS logic, single ended data transmission, limitations, Current mode logic-basic circuit design, Current mode

logic-MUX, XOR, latch, Current mode logic-latch design, Current mode logic-latch characteristics, Low pass transmission channel-Inter-symbol interference, error rate First order channel model.

UNIT 4 VLSI COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS 9 Hrs. Equalizer design, Equalization-Effect on noise and crosstalk, Design of Transmit equalizers using flip-flops and

transconductors, Replica biasing, optimizing transmitter swing, Equalization at the receiver; Basics of adaptation, LMS adaptation, Sign-sign LMS adaptation, LMS implementation details, Adaptive equalizer implementation, S/H based equalizer. Latch vs. amplifier; Zeros for pre- and post- cursor equalization; Echo cancellation

UNIT 5 VLSI COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction to clock and data recovery-Frequency multiplication using a phase locked loop, Derivation of the

phase model of the PLL, PLLs-charge pump, loop filter, Phase detector for random data, Linear phase detector; Transfer functions in a PLL, Binary phase detectors; bang bang jitter, Miscellaneous topics-Optimal equalizers; Linearity assumption of PLL model.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John G. Proakis, “Digital Communications”, McGraw Hill, 2000

2. Bernard Sklar, “Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications”, 2ed, Pearson Education

3. Cajetan M. Akujuobi, Matthew N. O. Sadiku, “Introduction to Broadband Communication Systems”, Chapman & Hal l/CRC, 2008

4. B. Razavi, “Phase-Locking in High-Performance Systems: From Devices to Architectures”, Wiley-IEEE Press, 2003

5. B. Razavi ,” Monolithic Phase Locked Loops and Clock Recovery Circuits-Theory and Design”, IEEE Press, 1996.




SEC1609

FUNDAMENTALS OF FUZZY LOGIC AND ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS


(For EEE, ECE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To comprehend the concepts of biological neuron and the learning algorithms To study the various methodologies to train the multi-hop network To acquire knowledge about SOM and special networks

To study the basic principles of fuzzy logic and fuzzy operators To understand the concept of fuzzy logic controller and its applications

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ANN 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Biological Neuron structure, ANN - Definition – Topology - Models - Learning strategies. Characteristics of ANN - Different Learning Rules - Activation dynamics - Synaptic dynamics - Perceptron Model (Both Single & Multi Layer) - Training Algorithm - Linear Separability Limitation and Its Over Comings, Problems in perceptron weight adjustments

UNIT 2 MULTI LAYER NETWORKS 9 Hrs.

BPN - Training - Architecture-Algorithm, Counter Propagation Network - Training - Architecture, BAM - Training-stability analysis, Adaptive Resonance Theory - ART1- ART2 – Architecture -Training, Hop Field Network - Energy Function - Discrete - Continuous - Algorithm - Application - TSP .

UNIT 3 SOM & SPECIAL NETWORKS 9 Hrs. SOM-Introduction - Kohonan SOM - Linear vector quantization, Probabilistic neural network ,Cascade

correlation, General Regression neural network, Cognitron - Application of ANN - Texture classification - Character recognition.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC 9 Hrs. Classical set - Operations and properties - Fuzzy Set - Operations and properties - Problems, Classical

Relations - Operations and Properties, Fuzzy Relations - Operations and Properties - Compositions Membership function -FLCS - Need for FLC- Fuzzification - Defuzzification.

UNIT 5 FLCS, CLASSIFICATION & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Fuzzy decision making -Types, Fuzzy Rule Based System, Knowledge Based System, Non linear Fuzzy Control system - Fuzzy Classification - Hard C Means - Fuzzy C Means. Applications of fuzzy - Water level controller, Fuzzy image Classification, Speed control of motor.

Max 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Timothy Ross, “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Application”, McGraw Hill, Edition 1997

2. James A. Freeman & Skapura, “Neural Networks”, Pearson Education, 2007.

3. B.Yegnanarayana, “Artificial Neural Networks” Prentice Hall, September 2007.

4. Simon Haykin, “Artificial Neural Networks”, Second Edition, Pearson Education.

5. Drainkov, H.Hallendoor and M.Reinfrank, “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”, Edition 2001.







SEC1610 HIGH SPEED COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES Introduction about ATM and Frame relay.

Enable the students to know techniques involved to support real-time traffic and congestion control. Students will be provided with an up -to-date survey of developments in High Speed Networks. Students will be provided with different levels of quality of service (QoS) to different applications. Enable the students to know the protocols For QoS support.

UNIT 1 HIGH SPEED NETWORKS 9 Hrs. Frame Relay Networks - Asynchronous transfer mode - ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM logical Connection,

ATM Cell - ATM Service Categories - AAL. High Speed LANs- Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Fiber Channel - Wireless LANs, applications, requirements - Architecture of 802.11

UNIT 2 CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

Queuing Analysis- Queuing Models - Single Server Queues -Multi server Queues- Effects of Congestion - Congestion Control - Traffic Management - Congestion Control in Packet Switching Networks - Frame Relay Congestion Control-Need for flow and error control-Link control mechanism.

UNIT 3 TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL 9 Hrs. TCP Flow control - TCP Congestion Control - Retransmission - Timer Management -RTT Variance

estimation(Jacobsonŏs Algorithm)- Exponential RTO backoff - KARNŏs Algorithm - Window management - Performance of TCP over ATM.-Traffic and Congestion control in ATM - Requirements - Attributes - Traffic Management Frame work, Traffic Control - ABR traffic Management - ABR rate control, RM cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations - GFR traffic management.

UNIT 4 QUALITY OF SERVICE IN IP NETWORKS 9 Hrs. Integrated Services Architecture - Approach, Components, Services - Queuing Discipline, FQ, PS, BRFQ, GPS, WFQ - Random Early Detection, Differentiated Services

UNIT 5 PROTOCOLS FOR QOS SUPPORT RSVP - Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms -Multiprotocol Label Switching -

Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details - RTP -Protocol Architecture, Data Transfer Protocol, RTCP.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2002.

2. Walrand & Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001.

3. Leon Garcia widjaja, “Communication Networks”, TMH, 2000.

4. Ivan Pepelnjak, Jim Guichard and Jeff Apcar, “MPLS and VPN architecture”, Cisco Press, Volume 1 and 2, 2003.

5. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S.Davie, ”Computer Networks”, Third edition, Elsevier Publications, 2003.

6. “http://williamstalling.com/NSNe2e.html”



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1611 INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To impart an knowledge about ISDN Architecture, Organization, ATM ,ISDN applications and implementations.

UNIT 1 ISDN BASICS 9 Hrs.

Evolution of ISDN - Definition of ISDN- ISDN System Architecture- ISDN integrated access- ISDN Digital Services-Digital Telephones - Types of switched networks - Space and time switching - Circuit switching - Packet switching -Comparison with circuit switching - OSI reference model- ISDN channels-Access interfaces-Functional Devices and reference points.

UNIT 2 ISDN SERVICES 9 Hrs. Standard Organization- Services Requirement- ISDN Services- bear services-Teleservices- Broadband Services-Service attributes- basic and supplementary services - Packeted frame - mode bearer Services.

UNIT 3 ISDN PROTOCOL AND SIGNALING SCHEMES 9 Hrs.

Protocol Architecture - Physical layer protocol - D-Channel - LAPD protocol - Network layer - Data link and layer 3 protocols - Numbers and Address. Signaling System No.7 - SS7 protocol and Services. - Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) - ISDN User Part (ISUP) - Transaction Capabilities Application Part (TCAP) - Application Service Elements (ASE) - Operation Maintenance and Administration Part (OMAP).

UNIT 4 ATM 9 Hrs.

Broadband Services and Call Relay switching - ATM Overview - ATM protocol architecture - Virtual Channels and Virtual Path Switching - BISDN Architecture - BISDN Protocol- layer - ATM Adopter layer - ATM QOS parameters - Classical IP over ATM - ATM in LAN environment (LANE).

UNIT 5 ISDN APPLICATION AND IMPLEMENTATIONS 9 Hrs. ISDN Centrax configuration - ITU-T recommendations about ISDN -ISDN and LANs - Metropolitan Area

Network.- TCP/IP and Interworks - Application- Video conferencing - Telemedicne - User configuration - Intention ISDN Activities - ISDN status in Spain and Europe.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gray.C.Kessler, “ISDN”, Mc Graw Hill, International 4th Edition, 2007 Reprint.

2. William Stallings, “ISDN and Broadband ISDN with frame relay and ATM”, 4th edition, Prentice Hall Inc, U.K,2005 reprint.

3. John Ranayne, “ISDN”, Wheels Publication, India, 2007 reprint.

4. Andrew S.Tanenbaum, “Computer network”, 2nd Edition, 2004 reprint.

5. P. Bocker : “ISDN, The Integrated Services Digital Network: concept, methods, systems”; Ed. Springer-Verlag, 1992

6. Sumit Kasera and Pankaj Sethi ,"ATM Networks Concepts and protocols", Tata McGraw Hill Publication, 2007.







SEC1612 MEMS AND ITS APPLICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE and EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To learn and design concepts of Micro electronics

To learn and design the micro sensors and its operations

UNIT 1 OVERVIEW OF MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS 8 Hrs

Definition - historical development - Fundamentals - Properties, Introduction to Design of MEMS and NEMS, MEMS and Microsystems, Microsystems and microelectronics, Microsystems and miniaturization, Working principle of micro system - Micro sensors, Micro actuators, Micro accelerometers and Micro fluidics, MEMS materials: Silicon, silicon compounds, silicon Piezo- resistors, Gallium Arsenide, Quartz, Piezoelectric crystals, Polymers, Metals.

UNIT 2 MEMS FABRICATION & PACKAGING 10 Hrs. Micro-system fabrication processes: Photolithography, Ion Implantation, Diffusion, and Oxidation. Thin film

depositions: LPCVD, Sputtering, Evaporation, Electroplating; Etching techniques: Dry and wet etching, electrochemical etching; Micromachining: Bulk Micromachining, Surface Micromachining, High Aspect-Ratio (LIGA and LIGA-like) Technology; Micro-Stereo lithography for polymer MEMS.

UNIT 3 MICRO SENSORS AND ACTUATORS 9 Hrs.

Micro-sensing for MEMS: Piezo-resistive Pressure Sensor, Capacitive sensor, Piezoelectric sensing, Resonant sensing, Surface Acoustic Wave sensors Vibratory gyroscope, Electromechanical transducers: Piezoelectric transducers, Electrostrictive transducers, Magnetostrictive transducers, Electrostatic actuators, Electromagnetic transducers, Electro-dynamic transducers, Electro-thermal actuators, comparison of electro-thermal actuation process.

UNIT 4 MEMS DESIGN AND INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL RF MEMS 9 Hrs.

Micro system Design - Design consideration, process design, Mechanical design, Mechanical design using MEMS. Optical MEMS,- System design basics - Gaussian optics, Matrix operations, Resolution. MEMS scanners and retinal scanning display, Digital Micro mirror devices. RF Memes - Design basics, case study - Capacitive RF MEMS switch, Performance issues.

UNIT 5 MEMS PACKAGING AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. MEMS packaging: Role of MEMS packaging, Types of MEMS packaging, selection of packaging materials,

flip-chip and multichip Unit packaging, RF MEMS packaging issues. Micro-machined transmission line and components, micro-machined RF Filters, Micro-machined Phase shifters, and Micro-machined antenna, Gyros and Bio-MEMS.


1. Vijay K. Varadan, K. J. Vinoy and K. A. Jose , “RF MEMS & Their Applications”, John Wiley & Sons, 2003.

2. Tai - Rai Hsu, “MEMS and Microsystems Design and Manufacturing”, Tata MC Graw Hill, New Delhi, Edition 2002.

3. Gabriel M Rebeiz, “RF MEMS - Theory Design and Technology”, John Wiley and Sons, 2003.

4. Nadim Maluf, “An introduction to Micro electro mechanical system design”, Artech House ,2000


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SEC1613 MOBILE ADHOC NETWORKS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquire knowledge about Adhoc networks and mobility models. To understand the design issues and classifications of MAC protocols. To study about the classifications of routing protocols. To acquire knowledge about the QOS issues, Energy Management issues and challenges in AdHoc Networks. To study about Adhoc networks application and to explore the concepts of wireless mesh and vehicular networks.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Origin Of Adhoc:Packet Radio Networks - Technical Challenges - Architecture of PRNETs - Components of

Packet Radios - Introduction to Adhoc networks - Definition, characteristics features - Issues in Mobile Ad Hoc networks- Types of Ad hoc Mobile Communications - Types of Mobile Host Movements - Ad hoc wireless Internet.

Characteristics of Wireless channel Mobility models - Indoor and Outdoor.

UNIT 2 MEDIUM ACCESS PROTOCOLS 9 Hrs. MAC protocols: design issues, goals and classification. Contention based protocols - With reservation,

scheduling algorithms, protocols using direction antennas - Distributed packet reservation - Multiple access protocol, collision avoidance time allocation protocol. IEEE standards: 802.11 a, 802.11 b, 802.11g.

UNIT 3 ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND MULTICAST ROUTING IN ADHOC NETWORKS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Issues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classifications of Routing

Protocols Table Driven routing protocols: Destination Sequenced Distance Vector Routing Protocol - Cluster head Gateway switched routing protocol. On Demand routing protocol: Dynamic source routing protocol, AODV routing protocol, temporarily ordered routing algorithm. Hybrid routing protocols: Zone routing protocol, Zone based Hierarchical link state routing protocol.

Architecture Model for Multicast Routing Protocols - Classifications of Multicast Routing Protocols - Tree Based Multicast Routing Protocols - Mesh-Based Multicast Routing Protocols - Energy-Efficient Multicasting - Comparisons of Multicast Routing Protocols

UNIT 4 QOS AND ENERGY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs. Issues and Challenges in Providing QoS in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classifications of QoS Solutions - MAC

Layer Solutions - Network Layer Solutions. Need for Energy Management in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks - Classification of Energy Management Schemes - Battery Management Schemes - Transmission Power Management Schemes - System Power Management Schemes.

UNIT 5 ADHOC NOMADIC MOBILE APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. In the Office, While Traveling, Arriving Home, In the Car, Shopping Malls, The Modern battlefield, Car-to-Car

Mobile Communications, Mobile Collaborative Applications - Location/context based mobile services - Introduction to wireless mesh networks and vehicular adhoc networks.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. C.Sivaram Murthy and B.S Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks”, Pearson Education, Second Edition India, 2001.

2. K Toh, “Adhoc mobile wireless networks, Protocols and Systems”, 2nd Edition, Pearson Education, 2009. 3. Stefano Basagni, “ Mobile Ad hoc Networking”, Wiley Inter science, IEEE Press, 2004. 4. George Aggelou “Mobile Ad Hoc Networks”, McGrawHill, 2004. 5. Thomas Krag and Sebastin Buettrich, “Wireless Mesh Networking”, 2nd Edition, OŏReilly Publishers, 2007.


PART A: 10 Questions of 2 Marks each-No choice 20 Marks PART B: 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks




SEC1614 MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart the fundamentals concepts of mobile communication systems. To introduce various technologies and protocols involved in mobile communication. Examine Theory Research in Mobility

Examine Systems Research in Mobility

UNIT 1 WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Basic cellular systems - Frequency Management and Channel Assignment - Types of handoff and their characteristics, dropped call rates & their evaluation - MAC - SDMA - FDMA - TDMA - CDMA - Cellular Wireless Networks.

UNIT 2 WIRELESS NETWORKS 9 Hrs.

Wireless LAN - IEEE 802.11 Standards - Architecture - OFDM Technology - Services - Mobile Ad hoc Networks- IEEE 802.16 standards, Comparison of 802.11 and 802.16 - Wireless Local Loop - Architecture - WLL Technologies.

UNIT 3 MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

GSM – Architecture - Location tracking and call setup - GSM Mobility management – Handover – Security - GSM SMS - International roaming for GSM - Call recording functions - subscriber and service data management - Mobile Number portability.

GPRS – Architecture - GPRS procedures - Attach and detach procedures - PDP context procedure - Combined RA/LA update procedures - Billing.

UNIT 4 MOBILE NETWORK AND TRANSPORT LAYERS 9 Hrs.

Mobile IP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol - Mobile Ad Hoc Routing Protocols - Multicast routing - TCP over Wireless Networks - Indirect TCP - Snooping TCP - Mobile TCP - Fast Retransmit / Fast Recovery – Transmission / Timeout Freezing-Selective Retransmission - Transaction Oriented TCP - TCP over 2.5 / 3G wireless Networks

UNIT 5 APPLICATION LAYER 9 Hrs. WAP Model - Mobile Location based services - WAP Gateway - WAP protocols - WAP user agent profile-caching model - Wireless bearers for WAP - WML - WMLScripts - WTA – iMode - SyncML.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2003.

2. William Stallings, “Wireless Communications and Networks”, Pearson Education, 2002.

3. Yi-Bing Lin, Imrich Chlamtac, “Wireless and Mobile Network Architectures”, John Wiley and sons, 2001






SEC1615 NANOELECTRONICS L T P Credits

Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the evolution and basics of Nanoelectronics

To understand the different physical deposition techniques for thin film deposition To learn the different types of chemical vapour decomposition techniques To learn about the various characterization techniques

To understand the basics of elementary quantum devices

UNIT 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS 9 Hrs.

Mooreŏs Law, Wave functions, wave packets, Schrodingerŏs wave equation, potential barriers and tunneling, Fermi-Dirac statistics, Density of states, Limitations of conventional FET in nanoscales, Quantum Well, Quantum wire, Quantum dot, current flow in two terminal Quantum dots, ballistic transport, Single Electron Transistor

UNIT 2 PHYSICAL DEPOSITION (THIN FILM) TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

Basics of physical methods, Glow discharge DC Sputtering, Triode sputtering, Getter sputtering, Radio frequency sputtering, Magnetron sputtering, Ion beam sputtering, AC sputtering, Vacuum evaporation, Resistive heat Evaporation, Flash Evaporation, Electron Beam Evaporation, LASER evaporation

UNIT 3 CHEMICAL DEPOSITION (THIN FILM) TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of chemical methods, Chemical Vapour Deposition, LASER chemical Vapour Deposition, Photo

Chemical Vapour Deposition, Plasma enhanced Vapour Deposition, Metal Organo Chemical Vapour Deposition, Chemical Bath Deposition, Electro less Deposition, Anodisation, Liquid Phase Epitaxy, So l -Ge l method, Spin Coating, Spray-Pyrolysis Technique, Polymer Assisted Deposition

UNIT 4 THIN FILM CHARACTERIZATION TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Cyclic Voltammetry and Linear Sweep Techniques, Thickness measurement Techniques, X - R a y Diffraction

Technique, Raman Spectral Study, Scanning Electron Microscopy, Energy Dispersive Analysis by X - r ay s measurements, Atomic Force Microscopy

UNIT 5 NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 9 Hrs.

Digital and Switching abstraction, Quantum Cellular Automata (QCA), Realization of logic gates using QCA, Types and synthesis of molecular bundles, principle and types of spin wave devices, Array minimum/ maximum computation with spin wave devices

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. George W Hanson, “Fundamentals of Nanoelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2008.

2. Karl Goser, “Nanoelectronics and Nanosystems: From Transistors to Molecular and Quantum Devices”, Springer, First edition, 2005.

3. Rainer Waser (Ed), “Nanoelectronics and Information Technology”, Second Edition, Wiley VCH, 2003.

4. Mary Eshaghian-Wilner, “Bio inspired and Nano Scale Integrated Computing”, Wiley, 2009.






SEC1616 PATTERN RECOGNITION AND IMAGE VISION L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES To comprehend the concepts of pattern recognition To study the various methodologies of object detection in pattern recognition To acquire knowledge about pattern classifications To study the various classifiers like fuzzy and neural classifiers To understand the concept of image extraction through computer vision and boundary analysis

UNIT 1 PRINCIPLES OF PATTERN RECOGNITION 9 Hrs. Patterns and features, training and learning in pattern recognition approach, different types of pattern

recognition. Statistical pattern recognition, feature selection, syntactic pattern recognition, clustering and non-supervised learning methods.

UNIT 2 OBJECT DETECTION METHODOLOGIES 9 Hrs. Combined detection method, edge detection, edge linking, gradient. Laplacian, line detection, method based

point detection, snake methods. Boundary description detection, matching, merges segmentation, smoothing splitting of boundaries syntactic, analysis of region boundaries, study of shape by region analysis.

UNIT 3 PATTERN CLASSIFICATION 9 Hrs. Distance Functions - Pattern classification by distance functions - Minimum distance classification - Cluster and

cluster seeking algorithms - Pattern classification by likelihood functions. Statistical Functions - Pattern classification using Statistical classifiers - Bayesŏ classifier - Classification performance measures - Risk and error probabilities.

UNIT 4 PATTERN RECOGNITION 9 Hrs. Fuzzy Classifiers- Fuzzy and crisp classification - Fuzzy clustering - Fuzzy pattern recognition - Syntactic pattern recognition - Selection of primitives - Syntax analysis for pattern recognition.

Neural Classifiers - Introduction - Neural network structures for PR, Neural network based pattern associators - Feed forward networks trained by back propagation - ART networks.

UNIT 5 IMAGE EXTRACTION CONCEPTS 9 Hrs. Introduction of Computer Vision, Computer Imaging System, Image Formation and sensing CVIP tools

Software, Image representation. Area Extraction, Concepts, Data-structures, Edge, Line- Linking, Hough transform, Line fitting, Curve fitting.

Introduction - Boundary Analysis and Matching Region Analysis: Region properties, External points, spatial moments, mixed spatial gray-level moments, Boundary analysis- Signature properties, Shape numbers. General Frame Works for Matching, Distance relational approach,

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Dude, Hart, and Stock, "Pattern Classification", John Wiley and Sons, 2nd Edition, 2001.

2. Gose, Johnsonbaugh and Jost, "Pattern Recognition and Image Analysis", Prentice Hall; Har/Dsk Edition, 1996.

3. D. Forsyth and J. Ponce , “Computer Vision - A modern approach”, Pearson, 2012.

4. B. K. P. Horn , “Robot Vision”, McGraw-Hill, 1986.

5. Milan Sonka,Vaclav Hlavac, Roger Boyle, "Image Processing, Analysis, and Machine Vision" , 2007.

6. Robert Haralick and Linda Shapiro, "Computer and Robot Vision", Vol I & II, Addison-Wesley, 1993.

7. Christoper M Bishop, “Neural Network for pattern recognition”, Oxford university press, 2008.





SEC1617 ADVANCED ELECTRONIC TEST ENGINEERING L T P

Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, EIE, ETCE and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The primary goal of the course is to introduce the concepts of automated test engineering techniques applied for testing complex printed circuit board assemblies. On completion of the course the students will learn Analog/Digital/Mixed signal devices testing and Functional model development.

PCBA functional testing methods Testing of BGAs/Boundary Scan components in PCBs

Test pattern generation

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PCB TECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs.

Printed Circuit Boards(PCB) - Construction - Types of PCB - Multilayer - Surface Mount technology - PCB Manufacturing process - PCB Inspection methods - Bare Board Testing - Optical and X-Ray Inspection - Electrical tests - Text fixtures - Bed of nails fixtures - Cross talk test - Mock up test - In circuit test – Burn-in-test - Fault diagnostic methods. Electromagnetic compatibility testing of electronic components, subassemblies, Measuring Instruments and systems

UNIT 2 PCB TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCESS 9 Hrs. Symptom Recognition - Bracketing Technique - Component failure Analysis - Fault types and causes in circuits

- during manufacturing - Manual trouble shooting technique - Tools and Instruments DMM - CRO - PCO - Logic probes - Logic pulsar - Logic Analyzer.

UNIT 3 AUTOMATED TROUBLE SHOOTING TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs.

ATE Techniques - CPU Emulator technique - ROM amd ROM Emulators - In circuit Comparator - In Circuit Functional test - Trouble shooting digital gates - Testing Linear Integrated Circuits - Guarding Technique - VI trace Technique - Bus Cycle Signature System - Board functional test methods - Boundary scan test basics.

UNIT 4 ATE SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE 9 Hrs. ATE System Components - Digital Pin Electronics - Drive data formats - Digital High way - Analog Highway - Test Vector Generation - Creating test patterns - Fault Simulations.

UNIT 5 DESIGN FOR TESTABILITY (DFT) 9 Hrs. MDA test systems - Boundary scan test with I/O pin compatibility - Automatic optical inspection systems -

Combinational ATE Systems - Design for testability - Observability and Controllability - Testing Flow diagram - Stuck at fault model - Fault simulation - Ad Hoc technique - Scan design technique - Basics of ATPG - BIST-Test pattern generation for built in self test - Exhaustive pattern generation and deterministic testing - Output response Analysis - Transition count syndrome checking - Signature Analysis - Circular BIST.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Michael L.Bushnell et al., “Essentials of Electronic testing for digital, memory and mixed signal VLSI circuit”,1st edition,

Academic Press, 2002.

2. Randall L Geiger, Pillip E Allen, “VLSI design techniques for analog and digital circuits”, MGH,1990.

3. Parag.K.lala, “Digital circuit Testing and Testability”, 1st edition, Academic press, 2001.

4. Alfred L.Crouch, “Design for test for Digital ICs and Embedded core systems”, 2nd edition, PHI, 1999

5. Sabapathy S.R., “Test Engineering for electronic hardware”, Qmax publishers, 1st Edition, 2007.






SEC1618 PROGRAMMING IN MATLAB L T P Credits

Total Marks

(For ECE, EEE, E&C, EIE and ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand basic representation of Matrices and vectors in MATLAB To learn various programming structures in MATLAB To study built in and user defined functions in MATLAB. To become conversant with 2D as well as 3D graphics in MATLAB To make a Graphical User Interface (GUI) in Matlab in order to achieve interactivity To Design simple Applications with Simulink (mdl files) and (M files) MATLAB.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO MATLAB 9 Hrs. Menus & Tool bars, Variables - Matrices and Vectors - initializing vectors - Data types- Functions - User defined

functions - passing arguments - writing data to a file-reading data from a file - using functions with vectors and matrices- cell arrays & structures - Strings - 2D strings-String comparing - Concatenation - Input and Output statements - Script files .

UNIT 2 LOOPS & CONTROL STATEMENTS 9 Hrs. Introduction; Relational & Logical operations - Example programs - Operator precedence - Control & Decision

statements- IF - IF ELSE - NESTED IF ELSE - SWITCH - TRY & CATCH - FOR -WHILE - NESTED FOR - FOR with IF statements, MATLAB program organization, Debugging methods - Error trapping using eval & lastern commands.

UNIT 3 PLOTS IN MATLAB & GUI 9 Hrs. Basic 2D plots, Labels, Line style, Markers, plot, subplot, LOG, LOG-LOG, SEMILOG-POLAR-COMET, Grid

axis, labeling, fplot, ezplot, ezpolar, polyval, exporting figures, HOLD, STEM, BAR, HIST, Interactive plotting, Basic Fitting Interface – Polyfit - 3D plots – Mesh - Contour - Example programs. GUI - Creation Fundamentals - Capturing mouse actions

UNIT 4 MISCELLANEOUS TOPICS 9 Hrs. File & Directory management - Native Data Files - Data import & Export - Low Level File I/O - Directory

management - FTP File Operations - Time Computations -Date & Time - Format Conversions - Date & Time Functions - Plot labels - Optimization - zero Finding - Minimization in one Dimension - Minimization in Higher Dimensions- Practical Issues. Differentiation & Integration using MATLAB, 1 D & 2D Data Interpolation

UNIT 5 SIMULINK & APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. How to create & run Simulink, Simulink Designing - Using SIMULINK Generating an AM signal & 2n d order

systems - Designing of FWR & HWR using Simulink - Creating a subsystem in Simulink. Applications Programs - Frequency response of FIR & IIR filters. Open Loop gain of OPAMP, I/P characteristics of BJT, Plotting the graph between Breakdown voltage & Doping Concentration. PCM, DPCM

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB 6.0” ,1st Edition, Oxford University Press-2004.

2. Duane Hanselman ,Bruce LittleField, “Mastering MATLAB 7” , Pearson Education Inc, 2005

3. William J.Palm, “Introduction to MATLAB 6.0 for Engineers”, Mc Graw Hill & Co, 2001

4. M.Herniter, “Programming in MATLAB”, Thomson Learning, 2001

5. John Okyere Altla, “Electronics and circuit analysis using MATLAB” - CRC press, 1999

6. K.K.Sharma, “MATLAB Demustifyied” -Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.

7. K.C.Ravindaranath, “Systems Modelling & Simulation”




SEC1619 RADAR AND NAVIGATIONAL AIDS L T P Credits

Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE and E&I) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To acquaint the students with the concept of Radar, its basic principle and operation, its types. On completion of this course, the students will

Acquire complete knowledge on RADAR and its various types

Acquire knowledge on different transmitters and receivers used in RADAR systems Acquire knowledge on advanced RADAR concepts

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO RADAR 9 Hrs. Origin of Radar, Block diagram of Radar, Radar frequencies, simple form of Radar equation and considerations,

applications of Radar. Integration of Radar Pulses-Radar Cross Section of Targets and its fluctuations, Prediction of Range Performance, Minimum Detectable Signal, Radar Clutter-surface clutter, sea clutter and Land clutter ,weather clutter. Pulse Repetition Frequency and Range ambiguities.

UNIT 2 BASIC AND MTI RADAR, TRACKING 9 Hrs. Principle of basic radar, simple block diagram of radar, radar range equations, basic pulsed radar, CW radar,

Doppler Effect, FMCW radar, factors affecting the radar operation. Delay line canceller, blind speed, types of MTI radars, Digital MTI Processing - Moving Target Detector - Limitations to MTI Performance - MTI from a Moving Platform.

UNIT 3 RADAR TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS 9 Hrs. Types of Radar transmitters - Radar Modulators, Linear Beam Power Tubes - Solid State RF Power Sources -

Magnetron - Crossed Field Amplifiers - Other RF Power Sources - Radar transmitter monitoring and testing Noise Figure of Radar receivers - Super heterodyne Receiver - Duplexers and Receiver Protectors- Radar

Displays.

UNIT 4 DETECTION OF SIGNALS IN NOISE 9 Hrs. Introduction - Matched Filter Receiver - Detection Criteria - Detectors - Automatic Detector - Integrators -

Constant-False-Alarm-Rate Receivers - The Radar operator - Signal Management - Propagation of Radar Waves - Atmospheric Refraction - Standard propagation - Nonstandard Propagation - The Radar Antenna - Reflector Antennas - Electronically Steered Phased Array Antennas - Phase Shifters - Frequency-Scan Arrays

UNIT 5 ADVANCED RADARS AND RADAR NAVIGATION 9 Hrs. Pulse Doppler Radar, mono-pulse radar, sequential lobbing radar, conical scan radars, MST radars, Synthetic

Aperture Radars (SAR) - Principle of operation and characteristic parameters. Phased array radars - salient features, advantages and limitations of Phased Array Radars.

Elementary ideas of Navigation Aids : VOR, DME, DVOR, TACAN, ILS and MLS, GPS, Automatic Direction finder, Hyperbolic Navigation (LORAN, DECA, OMEGA).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Merrill I.Skolnik, “Introduction to Radar Systems”, Tata McGraw-Hill (3rd Edition) 2003.

2. N.S.Nagaraja, “Elements of Electronic Navigation Systems”, 2nd Edition, TMH, 2000.

3. Peyton Z. Peebles:, "Radar Principles", John Wiley, 2004

4. J.C Toomay, " Principles of Radar", 2nd Edition -PHI, 2004

5. Dr.A K Sen and Dr. AB Bhattacharya, “Radar Systems and Radio Aids to Navigation”, Khanna Publishers, 1988.




SEC1620 SPEECH PROCESSING L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ETCE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide the knowledge of basic characteristics of speech signal in relation to production and hearing of

speech by humans. To develop an understanding of how speech signals are processed in three general areas: Analysis, Synthesis, and Recognition. Analytical tools are needed for analysis and synthesis, which draw on the areas of digital signal processing and time-frequency analysis. To give an overview of applications (recognition, synthesis, coding) and to inform about practical aspects of speech algorithms implementation.

UNIT 1 SOUND, SPEECH, AND HEARING 9 Hrs. Introduction - Speech Signal, Digital speech processing, Process of speech production-mechanism of speech

production, Acoustic phonetics, Acoustic theory of speech production - Sound propagation, uniform lossless tube, effect of losses in the vocal tract, effects of radiation at the lips, vocal treat transfer functions for vowels, Excitation of sound wave in the vocal tract, models based upon the Acoustic theory, Lossless tube models, Digital models for speech perception of attributes of speech and speech like sounds, and the linguistic units that underlie speech events. Disorders of human communication

UNIT 2 TIME DOMAIN MODELS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Time-dependent processing of Speech, Short time Energy and Average Magnitude, Short-time average

Zero-Crossing rate, Speech vs. Silence Discrimination using Energy and zero crossings, Pitch period estimation using a parallel processing approach, Short-Time autocorrelation function, Pitch period Estimation using the autocorrelation function ,median smoothing and speech processing.

UNIT 3 FREQUENCY DOMAIN MODELS FOR SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Short Time Fourier analysis: Fourier transform and linear filtering interpretations, Sampling rates -

Spectrographic displays - Pitch and formant extraction - Analysis by Synthesis - Analysis synthesis systems: Phase vocoder, Channel Vocoder - Homomorphic speech analysis: Cepstral analysis of Speech, Formant and Pitch Estimation, Homomorphic Vocoders

UNIT 4 LINEAR PREDICTIVE CODING OF SPEECH 9 Hrs. Basic Principles of linear predictive analysis - Auto correlation method - Covariance method - Solution of LPC

equations - Cholesky method - Durbinŏs Recursive algorithm – Comparison - Application of LPC parameters - Pitch detection using LPC parameters - Formant analysis - VELP-CELP.

UNIT 5 APPLICATIONS OF SPEECH PROCESSING 9 Hrs. Voice response system-General Consideration in the design of voice response System, Multiple-Output Digital

voice response system, Speech synthesis by concatenation of Formant-Coded Words, Typical application of computer voice response system, Speaker recognition system-Speaker verification system, Speaker identification system ,Speech recognition system-Isolated digital recognition system, Continuous digit recognition system.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. L. R. Rabiner and R. W. Schaffer, “Digital Processing of Speech signals”, Prentice Hall, 1978.

2. Ben Gold and Nelson Morgan, “Speech and Audio Signal Processing”, John Wiley and Sons Inc., Singapore, 2004.

3. Lawrence R.Rabiner and Ronald.W.Schafer: “Introduction to Digital speech processing”, Now publishers USA, 2007

4. T.F.Quatieri, “Discrete-time Speech Signal Processing”, Prentice-Hall, PTR, 2001

5. Kenneth N.Stevens, “Acoustic Phonetics (Current studies in Linguistics)”, MIT Press, 2000

6. J.L Flanagan : Speech Analysis Synthesis and Perception - 2nd Edition - Sprenger Vertag, 1972.

7. I.H.Witten,”Principles of Computer Speech”, Academic press, 1983.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEC1621 SPREAD SPECTRUM COMMUNICATIONS L T P Credits Total Marks


COURSE OBJECTIVES On completion of this course, the students will, Understand the basic principles and building blocks of digital communication system, mathematical background and Sequence generator fundamentals and to analyze error performance of spread spectrum modulation formats and anti-jamming capability of spread spectrum signals.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Basic digital communication concepts, Impact of wide band, Detection of binary signals in additive white

Gaussian Noise, Differences between standard narrow-band communication systems and spread spectrum systems. Spread-spectrum waveforms & its characteristics, spread spectrum communication system model, Techniques for reducing the impact of interference on spread spectrum signals, Jamming considerations

UNIT 2 BINARY SHIFT-REGISTER SEQUENCES AND CODE TRACKING LOOPS 9 Hrs. Definitions , mathematical Background and Sequence generator fundamentals, Maximal-length Sequences,

Direct Sequence and Spreading Codes Walsh Code, Pseudo Random Code, Mean and Variance of Random Codes Gold codes, Nonlinear code generators. Optimum tracking of wideband signals, Baseband Delay-lock Tracking Loop, Non-coherent Delay-lock Tracking loop, Tau-Dither non-coherent tracking loop, Double-Dither Non-coherent Tracking loop, Non-coherent Delay-Lock Tracking loop with arbitrary data and spreading modulation, Code tracking loops for Frequency-Hop systems.

UNIT 3 DIRECT -SEQUENCE AND FREQUENCY- HOPPED SPREAD SPECTRUM 9 Hrs. Types and advantages of spread spectrum modulation formats- BPSK, QPSK, MSK Direct -Sequence spread

spectrum, coherent slow- Frequency hopped spread spectrum, non-coherent slow and fast Frequency hopped spread spectrum Hybrid Direct-sequence/Frequency-Hop spread spectrum, Complex-Envelop Representation of spread- spectrum systems

UNIT 4 SYNCHRONIZATION AND PERFORMANCE ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Problem definition and the optimum synchronizer, serial search synchronization techniques, general analysis of

average synchronization time, synchronization using a matched filter, synchronization by estimating the received spreading code, tracking loop pull-in, performance of spread spectrum system without coding, performance of spread spectrum system with forward error correction

UNIT 5 CODE DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS 9 Hrs. Cellular radio concept, CDMA digital cellular systems, examples of CDMA digital cellular systems, cellular

CDMA applications, Analyze the performance of spread spectrum signals in the presence of multiple access interference (CDMA context), Calculation of theoretical capacity of a CDMA system, coding and decoding processes in CDMA, effects of interference in CDMA, and synchronization in CDMA wireless communication systems. 3G wireless systems using CDMA technologies, Major factors influencing the capacity of CDMA wireless networks, Multicarrier CDMA, Rake receivers wireless LAN applications, commercial and military applications.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R. L. Peterson, R. E. Ziemer, and D. E. Borth, “Introduction to Spread Spectrum Communications”, Prentice Hall, 2005 (ISBN

81-297-0973-2) 2. R. C. Dixon, “Spread Spectrum Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 1994, ISBN: 0471593427 3. D R Kamilo Feher, “Wireless digital communications Modulation & Spread Spectrum Applications”, Prentice Hall of India,1999,

ISBN 81-203-1472-7. 4. Andreas F.Molisch, “Wideband Wireless Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, ISBN 81-7808-301-9,2003. 5. A. J. Viterbi, “CDMA: Principles of Spread Spectrum Communication”, Addison-Wesley,1995, ISBN: 0201633744 6. Bernard Sklar, Pabitra Kumar Ray, “Digital Communications”, Pearson, ISBN 978-81 -31 7-2092-9,2009

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 Marks each - No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEE1601 FLEXIBLE AC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To have a detailed knowledge in various reactive power compensators

To understand the implementation of FACTS controllers in improvement of power system performance


Electrical Transmission Network – Emerging Transmission Network – Concept of Reactive Power – Load and System Compensation – Midpoint Voltage – Passive Compensation – Synchronous Condenser – Saturated Reactor

– Classification of FACTS controllers.

UNIT 2 SHUNT COMPENSATION 9 Hrs.

Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TCR) – Thyristor Switched Reactor (TSR) – Thyristor Switched Capacitor (TSC)

– Fixed Capacitor- Thyristor Controlled Reactor (FC-TCR) – Thyristor Switched Capacitor-Thyristor Controlled Reactor (TSC -TCR) – V-I Characteristics of Static Var Compensator (SVC) – Advantages of slope in dynamic Characteristic – Voltage control by SVC.

UNIT 3 THYRISTOR CONTROLLED SERIES CAPACITOR (TCSC) 9 Hrs.

Fixed Series Compensation – Need for Variable Series Compensation – TCSC: Basic principle – Modes of Operation – Advantages – Capability Characteristic – Variable Reactance Model – Application: Open loop & Closed loop Control.

UNIT 4 EMERGING FACTS CONTROLLER 9 Hrs.

Static Synchronous Compensator (STATCOM): Introduction – Principle of Operation – V-I Characteristic. Multilevel VSC based STATCOM. SSSC: Principle of Operation. Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC): Principle of Operation. Interline Power Flow Controller (IPFC): Principle of Operation.

UNIT 5 SUB SYNCHRONOUS RESONANCE (SSR) 9 Hrs. Concept of SSR – NGH-SSR Damping scheme: basic concept – design and operation aspect. Thyristor

Controlled Braking Resistor (TCBR), Advanced Series Capacitor (ASC): Basic concept – design and operation aspect

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R.Mohan Mathur and Rajiv K. Varma “Thyristor based FACTS controllers for electrical transmission systems”, IEEE Press

John Wiley & Sons Inc. Publication, 2002.

2. Narin G.Hingorani and Laszlo Gyugi “Understanding FACTS”, IEEE Press Standard Publishers Distributors, 2001

3. K.R.Padiyar “FACTS controllers in power transmission and distribution”, New Age International Publishers, 2009.

4. M.Noroozian et.al, “ Use of UPFC for optimal power flow control”ŏ Transactions on Power Delivery, Vol.12, No.4, oct 1997, pp

1629-1634 5. Gyugyi.L, ŎUnified Power Flow Control Concept for Flexible AC Transmission”, IEEE Proc-C Vol.139, N0.4, July 1992

6. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2007.



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEE1602 POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To impart knowledge on modeling of machines, excitation system and stability analysis.

UNIT1 SYNCHRONOUS MACHINE MODELING 9 Hrs.

Mathematical description of a synchronous machine; Review of magnetic circuit equations, Basic equations of a synchronous machine, Per unit (pu) representation: pu system for the stator quantities, pu stator voltage equations, pu rotor voltage equations, Stator flux linkage equations, Rotor flux linkage equations, pu system for the rotor, pu power and torque, Alternative per unit systems and transformations- Equivalent circuits for direct and Quadrature axes-constant flux linkage model, Classical model, Constant flux linkage model including the effects of sub transient circuits.

UNIT2 INDUCTION MOTOR AND SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR MODELING 9 Hrs.

Modeling of Induction motors: Equations of an induction machine - Steady State Characteristics - Alternative rotor constructions - Representation of saturation - Per unit Representation – Representation in stability studies - Synchronous motor model.

UNIT3 EXCITATION SYSTEM 9 Hrs.

Excitation system requirements - Elements of an excitation system - Types of Excitation system: DC Excitation systems, AC Excitation systems, Static Excitation systems - Control and Protective Functions: AC and DC regulators, Excitation system Stabilizing circuits, Power System Stabilizer(PSS), Load Compensation, Under Excitation limiter, Over Excitation limiter, Volts-per-Hertz limiter and protection, Field shorting systems - Modeling of Excitation systems.

UNIT 4 SMALL-SIGNAL STABILITY Fundamental concept of stability of Dynamic Systems – Small Signal Stability of a Single-Machine Infinite Bus System

- Effects of Excitation System - Power System Stabilizer- Small Signal Stability of Multi Machine Systems.

UNIT 5 TRANSIENT STABILITY 9 Hrs. Elementary view of Transient Stability - Simulation of Power System Dynamic Response- Direct Method of

Transient Stability Analysis: Description of the Transient Energy Function Approach, Analysis of Practical Pow Systems - Limitations of the Direct Methods.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCEBOOKS 1. P.Kundur, “Power system stability and control”, McGraw Hill Inc:USA,2006

2. R.Ramanujam, “ Power System Dynamics”,Phi learning, 2010.

3. M.A.Pai and W.Saueer, “ Power system dynamics and stabilities”, Pearson Education Asia,India,20

4. Edward Wilson k imbark, “ Power systems stability”, volume III, John Wiley &Sons,Inc,2004. 5. K.R.Padiyar, “Power System Dynamics”, Anshan Pvt Ltd, 2004.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks




SEE1603 POWER SYSTEM OPERATION AND CONTROL L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand electric power system operation.

To understand electric power system steady state control.

To understand economic and technical feasible operating state.


System Load Variation: System Load Characteristics, Load curves - Daily, Weekly and Annual, Load Duration Curve, Load Factor, Diversity Factor, Reserve Requirements: Installed reserves, Spinning Reserves, Cold Reserves, and Hot Reserves. Overview of system operation: Load Forecasting, Unit Commitment, Load Dispatching. Overview of system control: Governor Control, LFC, EDC, AVR, System Voltage Control, Security contro l .

UNIT 2 ACTIVE POWER AND FREQUENCY CONTROL 9 Hrs. Fundamentals of Speed Governing - Control of Generating Unit Power Output - Composite Regulating

Characteristics of Power Systems - Response rates of Turbine Governing Systems - Fundamentals of automatic generation control - Implementation of AGC - Under Frequency Load Shedding.

UNIT 3 REACTIVE POWER AND VOLTAGE CONTROL 9 Hrs. Production and Absorption of Reactive Power - Methods of Voltage Control - shunt Reactors, Shunt Capacitors,

Series Capacitors, Synchronous Condensers, Static var Systems-Principles of Transmission System Compensation – Modeling of Reactive Compensation Devices - Application of Tap-Changing Transformers to Transmission Systems - Distribution System Voltage Regulation - Modeling of Transformer ULTC Control System.

UNIT 4 COMMITMENT AND ECONOMIC LOAD DISPATCH 9 Hrs. Statement of unit commitment (UC) problem-constraints in UC: Spinning Reserve, Thermal unit Constraints,

Hydro Constraints, Fuel Constraints and other Constraints - UC solution methods: Priority -List Methods, Forward Dynamic Programming Approach, Langrange Relaxation Method. Economic Load Dispatch: Incremental Cost Curves – Equal Incremental Cost Rule – Loss Coefficient – Coordination Equation.

UNIT 5 COMPUTER CONTROL OF POWER SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Energy control system: Function-monitoring, Data Acquisition and Control, System Hardware

Configuration-Scada and Ems Function: Network Topology Determination, Steady State Estimate, Security Analysis and Control. Various operating states: normal, Alert, emergency: Extremely Emergency and Restorative- State Transition Diagram Showing Various State Transition and Control Strategies.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. P.Kundur, “Power system stability & control”, Tata McGraw Hill publications, 5th reprint 2006. 2. Allen J. Wood, Bruce F. Wollenberg, Gerald B. Sheble, “Power generation, operation and control”, John Wiley & sons, Inc, 3rd

Edition, 2013. 3. Olle.I.Elgerd, “Electric Energy Systems theory” – An Introduction, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Copmpany Ltd, NewDelhi, 2nd

Edition, 2004. 4. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, “Modern power system analysis”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw hill publishing company limited,

NewDelhi, 2011. 5. Leonard L.Grigsby, “The Electric Power Engineering Handbook”, CRC press press, 3rd edition 2012.


PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of Internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SEE1604 EHV AC AND DC TRANSMISSION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand bulk power transmission system.

To understand issues, advantage and alternate of bulk power transmission.

UNIT 1 TRANSMISSION ENGINEERING 9 Hrs. Transmission Line Trends – Standard Transmission Voltages – Power Handling Capacity and Line Losses – Cost of Transmission Lines and Equipments – Mechanical Consideration – Transmission Engineering Principles.

UNIT 2 LINE PARAMETER 9 Hrs. Calculation of Line and Ground Parameters – Resistance, Capacitance and Inductance Calculation – Bundle Conductors – Modes of Propagation – Effect of Earth.

UNIT 3 POWER CONTROL 9 Hrs. Power Frequency and Voltage Control – Over Voltages – Power Circle Diagram – Voltage Control Using Shunt and Series Compensation – Static VAR Compensation – Higher phase order system – FACTS.

UNIT 4 EHV AC TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs. Design of EHV Lines based on Steady State Limits and Transient over Voltages – Design of Extra HV Cable Transmission – XLPE cables – Gas Insulated Cables – Corona and RIV.

UNIT 5 HVDC TRANSMISSION 9 Hrs. HVDC Transmission Principles – Comparison of HVAC and HVDC Transmission – Economics – Types of

converters – HVDC rules – HVDC control – Harmonics – filters – Multi terminal DC system – HVDC cables and HVDC circuit Breakers.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Padiyar, K.R., “HVDC Power Transmission System”, New Age International (P) Ltd. Publishers, New Delhi, 1st Edition, Reprint

2005.

2. Rakosh Das Begamudre, “Extra High Voltage AC Transmission Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2006.

3. Allan Greenwood, “Electrical Transients in Power system”, John Wiley & Sons, Newyork, 2010

4. Arrillaga, J., “ High Voltage Direct Current Transmission”, The Institution of Electrical Engineers, London, 1998.

5. Rao.S, “EHV-AC,HVDC Transmission & Distribution Engineering”, 3rd Edition, Khanna Publishers, 2001


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks




SEE1605

POWER SYSTEM RESTRUCTURING AND DEREGULATION


(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge in Deregulation and Restructuring of power systems. To understand different trading and pricing in deregulated market.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DEREGULATION AND RESTRUCTURING 9 Hrs. Gencos, Transcoŏs, Discos, Customers, ISO, Market operators. Privatization, An overview of the Restructured

Power System, Difference between Integrated Power System and Restructured Power System, Transmission Open Access, Wheeling, Power Systems Operation – Old Vs New, Key issues associated with the Restructuring of ESIs, Advantages of Competitive System.

UNIT 2 DEREGULATION OF POWER SECTOR 9 Hrs. Separation of ownership and operation, Deregulated models – Pool Model, Pool and Bilateral Tradeŏs Model,

Multilateral Trade Model.

UNIT 3 COMPETITIVE ELECTRICITY MARKET 9 Hrs.

Independent System Operator activities in Pool Market, wholesale Electricity Market Characteristics, C Auction, Single Auction Power Pool, Double Auction Power Pool, Market Clearing And Pricing, Market Power a Mitigation Techniques, Bilateral Trading, Ancillary Services.

UNIT 4 TRANSMISSIONPRICING 9 Hrs. Marginal pricing of Electricity, nodal pricing, zonal pricing, embedded cost, postage stamp method, contr path method, boundary flow method, MW-mile method, MVA-mile method, comparison of different methods.

UNIT 5 CONGESTIONMANAGEMENT 9 Hrs. Total Transfer Capability – Limitations – Margins – Available Transfer Capability(ATC) – Procedure – methods

to compute ATC – Static and Dynamic ATC – Bid, Zonal and Node Congestion Principles – Inter and Intra zonal congestion – Generation Rescheduling – Transmission Congestion Contracts.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCEBOOKS 1. Loi Lei Loi, “ Power System Restructuring and Deregulation – Trading, performance& information technology”, John Wiley

sons,2001.

2. Kankar Bhattarcharya, et,al., “Operation of restructured power systems”, Springer US, 2012. 3. S. A. Khaparde and A. R. Abhyankar, “Restructured Power Systems”, Alpha Science Intl Ltd,201 1.

4. Mohammad Shahidehpour, Hatim Yamin, Zuyi Li, “Market Operations in Electric Power Systems: Forecasting, Scheduling, and Risk Management”, Wiley-Blackwell, March 2002.

5. Mohammad Shahidehpour and Muwaffaq Almoush, “Restructured Electrical Power Systems Operation, Trading and Volatility,” Marcel Dekkar, Inc, 2001.


Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks




SEE1606 STATIC RELAYS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study and understand the working of comparators Relays in power system protection. To study and implement the advance microprocessor relays in power system protection

UNIT 1 PHASE AND AMPLITUDE COMPARATORS 9 Hrs.

Phase and Amplitude Comparators – Duality between them – Types – Direct and Integrating Rectifier Bridge, Circulating Current Opposed Voltage Coincident type Phase Comparator, Direct or Block Spike Phase comparator, Phase Splitting Techniques, Integrating type Phase Comparator with Transistor AND Gate – Hybrid comparator – Hall Effect type and magneto resistivity type, Vector Product type – Zener Diode Phase Comparator – Multi Input – Three Input Coincident Comparator/Phase Sequence Detector.

UNIT 2 SOLID STATE PROTECTIVE RELAYS 9 Hrs. Static relay circuits using analog and digital ICŏs for over current, Differential and Directional Relays

UNIT 3 SOLID STATE POWER SYSTEM ELEMENT PROTECTION 10 Hrs. Static Relay Circuits for Generator Loss of Field, Under Frequency, Distance, Impedance, Reactance, M h o and Reverse power Relays - Static Relay Circuits for Carrier Current Protection.

UNIT 4 ANALYSIS OF SOLID STATE RELAYS 8 Hrs. Steady State and Transient Behavior of Static Relays – Testing and Maintenance of Relays– Tripping Circuits Using Thyristors

UNIT 5 MICROPROCESSOR BASED RELAYS Microprocessor Based Relays – Hardware and Software for the Measurement of Voltage, Current, Frequency and Phase

Angle – Microprocessor Based Implementation of Over Current, Directional, Impedance and Mho Relays.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Van.C.Warington, “Protective Relays-their Theory and Practice”, vol I&II, Champ Man and Hall Ltd, London, 1978.

2. T.S.Madhava Rao, “Power System Protection, Static Relays with Microprocessor Applications”, Tata Mc- Graw Hill, Second edition, New Delhi, 2004.

3. S.P.Patra, S.K.Basu, S.Choudhri, “Power System Protection”, Oxford and IBM publishing Co., New Delhi, 1983. 4. Ram.B, “Fundamental of Microprocessors and Micro computers”, reprint 1997.

5. Sunil S.Rao, “Switchgear Protection & Power Systems”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi 2014.






SEE1607 RENEWABLE ELECTRIC SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the need and advantages of renewable energy.

To study the performance ,efficiency and the relevancy to the future energy needs.


Classification of Energy Resources - Importance of Non Conventional Energy Resources - Advantages and Disadvantages of Non-Conventional Energy Resources - Environmental Aspects of Energy - World Energy status - Energy scenario in India - Principles of Energy Conservation – Cogeneration.

UNIT 2 SOLAR ENERGY 9 Hrs

Theory of solar cells - VI and PV curves - Equivalent circuit. Concept of solar PV module, Panel, Array, Maximum Power Point tracking - Solar PV systems - Solar PV Applications. Solar Thermal Systems-Solar Collectorŏs

Classifications- Flat plate collectors - Focus type collectors – Solar Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning System - Solar Pond Power Plant - Solar Thermal Power Plant.

UNIT 3 WIND ENERGY 9 Hrs. Wind Power and its Sources-Energy from Wind - Horizontal axis Wind Turbine - Vertical Axis Wind Turbine - Wind Energy Conversion Systems - Cp Vs Speed Curve.

UNIT 4 GEOTHERMAL, BIOMASS, TIDAL ENERGY 9 Hrs. Geothermal Energy:-Resources of geothermal energy- environmental considerations. Bio-mass-Availability of

bio-mass and its conversion technologies-Biogas production from Bio-mass. Tidal energy-tidal range power-ocean tidal energy conversion-Ocean Thermal Energy Conversion technology (OTEC)

UNIT 5 FUEL CELL AND MISCELLANEOUS NONCONVENTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES 9 Hrs. Fuel Cells - Principle of Working - Classification of Fuel Cells - Construction, Working and Performance of

Phosphoric Acid Fuel Cell and Alkaline Fuel Cell - VI Characteristics of Fuel Cell - Fuel Cell Power Plant - MHD Power Conversion-Thermo Electric Power Conversion - Thermionic Power Conversion.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. B Khan ,“Non conventional Energy resources”, Tata McGrawHill, 2 nd Edition 2009.

2. Mukund R. Patel ,Wind & Solar Power Systems- Design, Analysis and Operation, , Taylor and Francis, 2n d Edition 2005.

3. James Larminie & Andrew Dicks, “Fuel Cell Systems Explained”, John Wiely & Sons, 2nd Edition.

4. John Twideu and Tony Weir, “Renewal Energy Resources” BSP Publications, 2006. 5. C.S. Solanki, “Renewal Energy Technologies: A Practical Guide for Beginners” PHI Learning.






SEE1608 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To give an exposure to basic concepts of PSPICE and MATLAB.

To make the students to design and simulate circuits using the above software.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PSPICE 8 Hrs Description of Spice- Limitations- Circuit Descriptions- DC Circuit Analysis- Transient Analysis- AC Analysis-Parametric - Sub circuit - Fourier analysis - programs based on DC, AC and Transient Analysis.

UNIT-2 DEVICEMODELLING 12 Hrs. Analysis of Diode, Bipolar Junction transistor, Field Effect transistor - Op Amp Circuits - Spice AC and DC models – Parameters - Examples circuits.

UNIT3 MATLAB INTRODUCTION 10 Hrs. Basic features – Script m files – Array and array operations – Data types – Cell array and structures – Relational and logical operations – Control flow – Functions – Plotting commands – Mat lab toolbox – Simulink.

UNIT 4 MATLAB ANALYSIS 10 Hrs.

DC Analysis – Nodal Analysis, Loop Analysis, Maximum power Transfer. Transient Analysis - RC, RL, RLC circuit, State Variable Approach. AC Analysis and Network Functions – Steady State AC Circuit, Single and Three Phase AC Circuit, Network Characteristics – Frequency Response. Two port Network – Z, Y, H Parameter Analysis, Transmission parameters.

UNIT 5 MATLAB APPLICATIONS 10 Hrs.

Characteristics Realization of Diodes – I-V curve, operating point, full wave rectifier. Characteristics realization of Op-Amps – open loop gain, closed loop gain, Transfer function, poles and zeros- Characteristic realization of transistor, BJT, MOSFET.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. John Okyere Attia, "Electronic and Circuit Analysis Using MATLAB" CRC Press, 2004.

2. Muhammad H.Rashid, “Introduction to PSPICE using ORCAD for circuits and electronics”,3rd Edition, Prentice Hall of india Private Limited,201 0.

3. Alok Jain, “Power Electronics: Devices, Circuits & Matlab Simulations”, Penram international Publication, 1 st Edition

4. Mohammed Rashid, “Power Electronics circuits, Devices and Applications”,3rd edition, PHI publishing company,2010

5. Duane Hansel Man, “Mastering Matlab-7”,Bruce Little Field,Pearson education Ltd,Ist Edition,2009.

6. Cleve B.Moler, "Numerical Computing with Matlab, Society for Industrial & Applied Mathematics ", 2004.

7. John Okyere Attia, "PSPICE and MATLAB for Electronics" CRC Press, 2009







SEE1609

COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT


(For EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To provide basics of electromagnetic field theory concepts.

To introduce the concept of computer aided design of electrical equipment. To introduce CAD tools for design of electrical equipment.

UNIT1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Conventional Design Procedures – Limitations – Need for Field Analysis Based Design.

UNIT 2 MATHEMATICAL FORMULATION OF FIELD PROBLEMS 9 Hrs.

Electromagnetic Field Equations – Magnetic Vector/Scalar potential – Electrical vector /Scalar potential – Stored Energy in Field Problems – Inductance- Development of Torque/Force- Laplace and Poissonŏs Equations –

Energy Functional – Principle of Energy Conversion.

UNIT 3 PHILOSOPHY OF FEM 9 Hrs. Mathematical Models – Differential/Integral Equations – Finite Difference Method – Finite Element Method –

Energy Minimization – Variational Method - 2D Field Problems – Discretisation – Shape Functions – Stiffness Matrix – Solution Techniques.

UNIT 4 CAD PACKAGES 9 Hrs. Elements of a CAD System – Pre-Processing – Modeling – Meshing – Material Properties- Boundary Conditions – Setting up Solution – Post Processing.

UNIT 5 DESIGN APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Design of Solenoid Actuator – Induction Motor – Insulators – Power transformer.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. S.J Salon, “Finite Element Analysis of Electrical Machines.” Kluwer Academic Publishers, London, 1995.

2. S.R.H.Hoole, Computer – Aided, Analysis and Design of Electromagnetic Devices, Elsevier, New York, Amsterdam, London, 1989.

3. P.P. Silvester and Ferrari, “Finite Elements for Electrical Engineers” Cambridge University press, 3rd Edition1983.

4. D.A.Lowther and P.P Silvester, “Computer Aided Design in Magnetics”, Springer verlag, 1st Edition New York, 1986.







SIC1601 INSTRUMENTATION IN AEROSPACE & NAVIGATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To describe the principle and working of aircraft and aerospace vehicle systems and instruments, their related sensors and navigation aids

To provide knowledge on flight simulation, instrumentation and control concepts with their major faults.

UNIT 1 AIR CRAFT AND AEROSPACE VEHICLE INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Air data instruments: altimeter, air speed rate of climb - gyroscopic instruments - turn and back indicator - artificial horizon - directional Gyro Schuler Tuning, Stable Platform - Introduction to Auto pilots - integrated flight instruments - altitude compensation.

UNIT 2 GPS AND SENSORS 7 Hrs. GPS - propulsion controls - Sun sensors - Horizon sensors - Star tracker - Stabilization controls

UNIT 3 RADIO NAVIGATION AIDS AND FLIGHT INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL 10 Hrs. Automatic direction finder - distance measuring equipments -instruments landing system - visual omni range -

radar - optical instruments - engine instruments and control - pressure measurements - thermal meter control - tachometer - accelerometer - smoke and fire detection - propeller controls - twin blade control - cabin pressure and temperature.

UNIT 4 AIR CRAFT FLIGHT SIMULATION INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs. Basic description of a flight simulator - Solution of Aerodynamics equations - simulation of abnormal conditions -

Jet engine power plant troubles - Flight controls and auto pilot troubles, Simulation - Simulation of difficult conditions - Weapons system trainer - Need for realism - Instrumentation.

UNIT 5 FAULTS IN AEROSPACE VEHICLE 10 Hrs.

Hydraulic systems troubles - landing gear troubles - cabin conditioning troubles - indication of unsafe canopy - Boeing condition - Radio troubles - Separate generator - System troubles - Trouble indicator light - Advantages of instrumentated flight - Black box and its use.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Pallett E.G.H., "Aircraft Instrumentation and Integrated Systems", Longman Scientific and Technicalŏ, 1992

2. Nagaraja N.S., "Elements of Electronic Navigation", Tata Mcgraw Hill Publishing Ltd., New Delhi, 1975.

3. Douglas M. Considine and Ross. S.D. Handbook of Applied Instrumentation, McGraw Hill, 1965.






SIC1602 SOFTWARE FOR SYSTEM DESIGN L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To impart knowledge on Software packages for control system design. It focuses the basic concepts of MATLAB, MAPLE, PSPICE and Lab VIEW software.

The students can also familiar with the basic programming techniques .

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION OF MATLAB 9 Hrs.

MATLAB fundamentals: function description, data types, arrays, conditional, decision making and loop statements, I/O- graphics and plotting: two dimensional, three dimensional - Data import and export - Numerical solution: Integration and differentiation- Eulerŏs method -Rungekutta method - Adam bash forth technique- solution of ordinary differential equation

UNIT 2 MATLAB PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. Programs for solution of State Space Methods for Controller Design - simple control application programs: P.PI

and PID controller.-simulation of first order, second order and lead-lag transfer function- Matlab routine for step and impulse response -development of dynamic model and Laplace domain model using MATLAB

UNIT 3 SIMULINK 9 Hrs.

Introduction-graphical user interface- starting - selection of objects- blocks-lines- simulation-application programs-limitations- Steps for creating fuzzy logic tool box -GUI editor-rule view-membership function editor- rule editor.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Introduction to virtual instrumentation-VIŏs and sub VIŏs,-running and debugging VIŏs -loops and structures-event driven programming-grouping data using strings, arrays, clusters-local and global variables -charts and graphs-file I/O -formulas and equations

UNIT 5 INSTRUMENT INTERFACE AND USE OF ANALYSIS TOOLS 9 Hrs.

DIO, RS232/RS485, GPIB,USB & PCMCIA - VISA - networking basics for office & industrial applications - VI applications in signal processing: Fourier transform, power spectrum, correlation methods, windowing and filtering- VI applications in instrumentation and control, robotics, image acquisition and processing.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sokoloff, “Basic Concepts of Lab View 4”, Prentice Hall, 1998. 2. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering”, Fourth Edition, PHI, New Delhi, 2006.

3. MATLAB user manual

4. SIMULINK user manual

5. Gary Johnson, “Lab View Graphical Programming”, Ide, McGraw Hill, 1997 6. Lisa. Kewell & Jeffery Travels, “Lab View for Every One”, Prentice Hall, 1997. 7. Gupta. S, Gupta. J.P, “PC Interfacing for Data Acquisition & Process Control”, 2nd Edition, Instrument Society of America,

1994.

8. Lab view User manual




SIC1603 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL SYSTEM L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study and understand the fundamental principles of programmable control system.

To acquire knowledge and familiar with various system components and their function.

For better understanding and gain knowledge of ladder logic, hardware installation, maintenance and repair principles

Including troubleshooting and ladder logic interpretation.

UNIT 1 PLC - FUNCTIONAL ELEMENTS 9 Hrs. PLC - Architecture - Operations - PLC Versus Computer - PLC Size & Applications - Hardware Components-Installation, Practices, Editing & Troubleshooting.

UNIT 2 PROGRAMMING in PLC 9 Hrs. Basic PLC Programming - Ladder Logic Diagram - Timers - Counters - Data Manipulation Instructions, Math Instructions

UNIT 3 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Evolution - Different Architectures - Local Control Unit - Basic Elements - Comparison of Architectures - Process Interface Issues - Security Design, Backup Design, Process Input-Output Design - Redundancy.

UNIT 4 COMMUNICATIONS FOR DISTRIBUTED CONTROL 9 Hrs. Communication Hierarchy - Communication system Requirements - Architectural Issues - Network Topologies -

Protocol - Functions of Various Layers - Communication System Standard - Operator Interface Requirements - Packing of DCS - Future Trends in DCS

UNIT 5 SCADA 9 Hrs.

Architecture - Hardware - Software - Communication - Interfacing - Scalability - Redundancy - Functionality - Access Control - MMI - Alarm Handling - Logging - Achieving Report Generation - Automation - Application Development - Configuration - Object Handling - Evolution Engineering.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Lucas M.P., “Distributed Control Systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, New York, 1986

2. Petruzella, “Programmable Logic Controllers”, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill Publishing Co, New York, 1998.

3. Moore, “Digital Control Devices”, ISA Press, 1986. 4. Webb J.W., “Programmable Controller Principles and Applications”, Morrill Publishing Co, USA, 1988

5. Kissell T.E., “Understanding and using Programmable Controllers”, Prentice Hall International Inc, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1986.

5. Hughes T., “Programmable Logic Controllers”, ISA Press, 1989.







SIC1604

INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL IN PAPER & PULP INDUSTRIES


(For E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study the fundamental concepts of paper making process

To understand the various types of paper properties and measurement techniques To introduce the consistency measurement & control techniques

To learn the concepts of paper making machine

UNIT 1 PULPING AND PAPER MAKING PROCESS 9 Hrs. Flow Diagram and description of the process - raw materials - Pulping process - Chemical recovery process - Paper making process - Converting- Energy conservation and paper quality control.

UNIT 2 PROCESS PARAMETERS 9 Hrs.

Special Process Parameters - Measurements of basic weight - Density - Specific gravity -Flow - level and solids - Pressure -Temperature - Consistency - Moisture - pH - Oxidation -Reduction potential - Graphic displays and alarms.

UNIT 3 CONTROL SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Typical Control Systems - Blow tank controls - Digester liquor feed pump controls - Brown stock washer level control - stock chest level control - Basic weight control - Dryer temperature control.

UNIT 4 CONTROL APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Special Control applications - Dissolving tank density control - White liquor classifier density control - White liquor flow control - Condensate conductivity control-- moisture control- mill wide control.

UNIT 5 COMPUTER APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Computer Application - Evolution of control - Programmable logic Controllers - Distributed Control System (DCS) - Applications for paper machine Controls.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Liptak B.G., “Process Measurement And Analysis” Third Edition, Chilton Book Co., 1995. 2. Douglas M..Considine, “Process / Industrial Instruments & Controls Hand Book”, Fourth Edition, McGrawhill, 1993.

3. Hobart.H.Willard, Lyne.L..Meritt, John.A.Dean, Frank.A.Settle, “Instrumental method of Analysis”, Seventh Edition, CBS Publishers &Distributors, 1986.

4. Sankaranarayanan, P.E., Pulp and Paper Industries — Technology and Instrumentation Kotharis Desk book series, 1995






SIC1605 FIBRE OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For ECE, ETCE, EEE, EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To expose the students to the basic concepts of optical fibres and their properties. To provide adequate knowledge about the Industrial applications of optical fibres. To expose the students to the Laser fundamentals.

To provide adequate knowledge about Industrial application of lasers. To provide adequate knowledge about holography and Medical applications of Lasers.

UNIT 1 OPTICAL FIBRES AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS 9 Hrs. Quantum nature of light, optical laws and definitions- Principles of light propagation through a fiber -optical fiber

modes, configurations and their properties-fiber materials-fiber fabrication vapor phase oxidization - fiber characteristics - Absorption losses - Scattering losses - Dispersion - Connectors and splicers -fiber termination .

UNIT 2 OPTICAL SOURCES, DETECTORS AND SENSORS 9 Hrs. LED characteristics -LED structures: surface LED, edge emitting LED-Double heterojunction LED-Basic

concepts of Laser. Optical Detectors: PN Photo diode , Avalanche photo diode ,PIN diode, Photo transistor ,Photo thyristors ,Photo thermistor, opto-couplers ,optrodes, modulators.Fibre optic sensors - Fiber optic instrumentation system - Interferometric method of measurement of length - Moire-fringes - Measurement of pressure and temperature.

UNIT 3 LASER FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs. Laser Diode Rate Equation - External Quantum Efficiency- Resonant Frequencies - Three level and four level

lasers - Properties of laser -Laser modes - Resonator configuration - Q-switching and mode locking - Cavity damping - Types of lasers - Gas lasers, Solid lasers, Liquid lasers, Semiconductor lasers, Non-semiconductor lasers- The Nd:YAG laser and glass fiber lasers.

UNIT 4 LASER APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Optical transmitter and Receiver designs - Laser for measurement of distance, length, velocity, acceleration, current, voltage and atmospheric effect - material processing - Laser heating, welding, melting and trimming of materials - Removal and vaporization.

UNIT 5 HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION 9 Hrs.

Holography- Basic principle - methods - Holographic Interferometer and application - Holography for non-destructive testing - Holographic Components - Medical applications of lasers, laser and tissue interactive - Laser instruments for surgery, tumor, vocal chords, brain surgery, plastic surgery, gynecology and oncology.


1. Senior J.M, “Optical Fibre Communication - Principles and Practice”, Prentice Hall of India,1985.

2. Wilson J and Hawkes J.F.B, “Introduction to Opto Electronics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2001. 3. Keiser G, “Optical Fibre Communication”, McGraw Hill, 1995. 4. Arumugam M, “Optical Fibre Communication and Sensors”, Anuradha Agencies, 2002.

5. John F. Read, “Industrial Applications of Lasers”, Academic Press, 1978. 6. Monte Ross, “Laser Applications”, McGraw Hill, 1968.





INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON L T P Credits Total Marks

SIC1606 AND STEEL INDUSTRIES 3 0 0 3 100 (For E&C)

COURSE OBJECTIVES x The theme of this subject is to make students learn the measurements and instrumentation applicable to iron and

steel industries.

x It reviews about the modern computer control of process parameters and data logging with utilities management related to iron and steel industries. It also summarizes special control applications in blast and basic oxygen furnaces.

UNIT 1 MEASUREMENTS IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES 9 Hrs.

Identification of various process parameters in the industry - selection of suitable measurement hardware for temperature, pressure, level, flow, weighing and proportioning - special gauges for measurement of thickness and shape - Control room layout for mill operations - graphic displays - alarm management

UNIT 2 CASTING AND ROLLING 9 Hrs. Quality of steel and iron - impurities present and allowed limits for usable steel - waste recycling - Continuous casting and batch casting of steel and iron - primary and secondary rolling - steel finishing operations

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO FURNACES 9 Hrs.

Process description in diagrammatic and functional block details - raw materials preparation - operation of blast furnace (BF) and auxiliary units including stoves - basic oxygen furnace (BoF) - electric furnace (EF) - open hearth furnace (OHF) - relative merits of various steel making furnaces

UNIT 4 EVOLUTION OF COMPUTER APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Evolution of computer applications in the industry - Review of data logging, SCADA, DDC and DCS. Practices for model calculating and data logging - steel rolling mill control - annealing process control - utilities management with computer system

UNIT 5 CONTROL APPLICATION 9 Hrs. Special applications for controls - Blast Furnace (BF) Stove combustion control system - gas and water control system in Basic Oxygen Furnace (BoF) - Mould Level control system in Strand Casting operations

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Liptak, Bela G, “Instrumentation in the Processing Industries”, Chilton Publishers, 1973.

2. Considine D. M., “Process/Industrial Instruments and control Handbook”, McGraw Hill, 4th edition 1993.

3. Serope Kalpakjian, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Addison Wesley Publishing Company, Massachusetts, 3rd edition, 1995.

4. Robert H. Perry, D.W. Green and J.O. Maloney, “Perryŏs Chemical Engineers”, Handbook, McGraw Hill Inc, New York, 7th

ed,1998.







SIC1607 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For E&C and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The theme of this subject is to make students learn the principle of operation and design of digital control systems.

To give an introductory idea about stability and state space analysis. To give knowledge of the Implementation of Control Algorithm in Microprocessor and Micro Controller.

UNIT 1 REVIEW OF SAMPLED DATA CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Hrs Review of Sampled Data Control System - Sample and Hold Operation - Review of Z Transform- Pulse Transfer Function - Z Domain Equivalents to S Domain.

UNIT2 STABILITY ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Stability Analysis - Correlation between Time Response and Root Location in the Z Plane - Effect of Pole Zero Configuration in Z Plane - Transient Response of Sampled Data - Steady State Error-Methods of stability.

UNIT 3 STATE SPACE ANALYSIS 9 Hrs. Discrete Time State Equation - State Diagram - Realization of Pulse Transfer Function - Direct Realization -

Cascade Realization - Parallel Realization - Sampled Data Model of Continuous Time System - Concepts of Controllability and Observability.

UNIT 4 DESIGN SPECIFICATION 9 Hrs. Transform of Digital Control System - Design Specification - Design on the W Plane - Digital PID Controller - Introduction to Design on the Z Plane.

UNIT 5 IMPLEMENTATION OF CONTROL ALGORITHM 9 Hrs. Implementation of Control Algorithm using Microprocessor and Micro Controller - Digital Quantization - Signal Quantization-Stepper motor control -Traffic light control.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gopal. M, “Digital Control Engineering”, Willey Eastern Publishers,1998.

2. Nagrath. I.J. “Control System Engineering”, New Age International, 2006.

3. Yoan D. Landau, Gianluca Zito, “Digital Control System: design, identification and implementation”, Springer, 2006.







SIC1608 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EEE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To Familiarize about different power generation process, various measurements & analysis in power plants, types of controls and control loops in boilers

To provide in-depth understanding of nuclear power plant.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Brief survey methods of power generation - hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power - Importance of

instrumentation in power generation - Piping and instrumentation diagram of a thermal power plant - Boiler types - water tube - fire tube - fluidized bed - Fuels - coal, fuel oil, natural and petroleum gas, synthetic fuels and biomass - Combustion process - Combustion of solid fuel, Combustion of fuel oil, combustion of gas - Cogeneration

UNIT 2 MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Hrs Metal temperature measurement in boilers, piping system for pressure measuring devices, Flow of feed water -

fuel, air and steam with correction factor for temperature and pressure - smoke and dust monitor, flame monitoring. Drum level measurement - Radiation detector - Introduction to turbine supervising system - pedestal vibration - shaft vibration - eccentricity measurement. Installation of non-contracting transducers for speed measurement - rotor and casing movement and expansion measurement

UNIT 3 CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER 9 Hrs. Combustion Control -air/fuel ratio control - furnace draft control - drum level control- main stream and reheat

steam temp control - super heater control - attemperator - de-aerator control - distributed control system in power plants - interlocks in boiler operation- Problems associated with control of multiple pulverizers - Fan drives and control

UNIT 4 ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS 9 Hrs. Coal analyzer- thermo-gravimetri - gross calorific value - total sulphur analysis - ash analyzer - online monitor -

air quality monitoring - Sampling of ambient air - general air sampling system - Flue gas oxygen analyzer - analysis of impurities in feed water and steam - dissolved oxygen analyzer - chromatography - pH Meter - pollution monitoring instruments

UNIT 5 NUCLEAR POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs. Introduction - Energy from nuclear reaction - Nuclear fission and fusion - Neutron flux and reaction rate - Types of

reactor - pressurized water reactor - boiling water reactor - Nuclear waste disposal - Piping and instrumentation diagram of different types of nuclear power plant - Nuclear reactor control loops - reactor dynamics - excess reactivity - pulse channel and logarithmic instrumentation - control and safety instrumentation - reliability aspects

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gill A.B, “Power Plant Performance”, 6th Edition, Butterworth, London, 1984

2. Liptak. B.G, Analytical Instrumentation, Vol 1 & Vol 2, Chilton Book Company, 1994

3. Nag P.K ŎPower Plant Engineeringŏ, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001

4. Sam Dukelow. G “The control of Boilers”, 2nd Edition, Instrument society of America, 1991

5. Elonka S.M, Kohan A.L, “Standard Boilers Operations”, McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1994

6. Wakil. E.A Power Plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 1984,

7. David Lindsley, “Boiler Control Systems”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1991

8. Jain. R.K, “Mechanical and industrial Measurements”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995




SIC1609 SATELLITE INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To illuminate the depth knowledge of satellite orbit & access,.

To investigate its link calculation and design To acquire knowledge on the satellite instrumentation and to understand the control system in satellite communication To focus on the application of satellite system

UNIT 1 SATELLITE ORBIT AND ACCESS 9 Hrs. Introduction to Keplerŏs Laws, orbital parameters, orbital perturbations, station keeping, geo stationary and non

geostationary orbits - Look Angle Determination - Limits of visibility - eclipse - Sub satellite point - Sun transit outage - Launching Procedures - launch vehicles and propulsion. Interference between satellite circuits, satellite access, single access, pre-assigned FDMA, SCPC (spade system), TDMA, pre-assigned TDMA, demand assigned TDMA, down link analysis, and comparison of uplink power requirements for TDMA & FDMA, on board signal processing satellite switched TDMA UNIT 2 LINK CALCULATIONS AND DESIGN 9 Hrs.

Space craft configuration, payload and supporting subsystems, satellite uplink - downlink power budget equation - System noise - Antenna noise - Amplifier noise temperature - Amplifiers in cascade - Noise factor - Noise temperature of absorptive networks - Overall system noise temperature - Carrier to Noise ratio - Uplink - Saturation flux density - Input back off - The earth station HPA - Downlink - Output back off - Satellite TWTA output - Effects of rain - Uplink rain - Fade margin - Downlink rain - Fade margin - Combined uplink and downlink C/N ratio - Inter modulation noise. UNIT 3 SATELLITE CONTROL 9 Hrs.

Attitude control of satellites, Reaction wheel, Momentum wheel, Thrusters, Stabilization satellites, Spin stabilization, Gravity gradient stabilization, control moment gyros, orbit determination of satellites, sensors in satellite ADCS. Dual spinners, navigation of satellites, ascent guidance, satellite rendezvous. Tethered satellite systems, satellite services, space stations and docking of spacecrafts. UNIT 4 SATELLITE INSTRUMENTATION 9 Hrs.

Advanced very high resolution radiometer, Magnetometer, Torque coil, high-resolution infrared radiation sounder, Microwave sounding unit, stratospheric sounding unit, advanced microwave sounding unit, solar backscatter ultraviolet radiometer, GOES imager and sounder. UNIT 5 SATELLITE APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

INTELSAT series, INSAT, VSAT, Remote sensing, Mobile satellite Service: GSM, GPS, INMARSAT, LEO, MEO, Satellite navigation system, Direct Broadcast satellites(DBS), Direct to home broad cast (DTH), Digital audio broadcast (DAB) , World space services , Business TV(BTV), GRAMSAT, Specialized services - E-mail, Video conferencing and internet connectivity.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Dennis Rody, “Satelite communication”, Regents/Prentice Hall, Eaglewood Cliff, New Jersey, 1983 2. Marshall. H Kalpan, ŎModern Spacecrafts Dynamics and Controlŏ, John Wiley & sons, 1976 3. Wilbur L. Pritchard and Joseph A. Sciulli, “Satellite Communication Systems Engineering”, prentice hall, New Jersey, 1986 4. Timothy Pratt and Charles W. Bostain, “Satellite Communications”, John Wiley and sons, 1986 5. Tri T Ha, “Digital Satellite Communication”, 2nd edition, McGraw Hill, New york, 1990. 5. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhood, Robert A. Nelson, “Satellite Communication Systems Engineering”. 2ndEdition,

Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1993 6. Feher.K, “Digital Communication Satellite / Earth Station Engineering”, Prentice Hall Inc. New Jersey, 1983




SIC1610 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To expose the student to ultrasound and its interaction with environment, generation of ultrasonic waves and its various test methods To focus on the measurement of ultrasound and its display modes, artifacts and the characteristics of the resolution in ultrasound imaging and also the applications of ultrasound in the field of medicine, power and quality assurance.

UNIT 1 PHYSICS OF ULTRASOUND AND ITS CHARACTERISTICS 9 Hrs. Basic principle of Ultrasound - Pulse echo Technique - Producing beam of ultrasound, Interaction of ultrasound

with matter, properties of ultrasonic transmission, reflection and transmission coefficients, intensity and attenuation of sounds beam, attenuation, power level, medium parameters.

UNIT 2 ULTRASONIC WAVE GENERATION AND TEST METHODS 9 Hrs. Generation of ultrasonic waves: magneto-strictive and piezoelectric effects, search unit types, construction and

characteristics Test methods: Ultrasonic test methods: pulse echo, transit time, resonance, direct contact and immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection.

UNIT 3 ULTRASOUND MEASUREMENT AND DISPLAY MODES Ultrasound measurement: measuring thickness, depth and flow, variables affecting ultrasonic testing in various

applications Ultrasonic Display modes: A-mode, B-mode, Time position mode, Ultrasonic Probe construction.

UNIT 4 ARTIFACTS AND RESOLUTION IN ULTRASOUND IMAGING 9 Hrs.

Display of false echoes - Reverberation between Probe and structure, omission of echoes from display - Acoustic Shadowing, Off-Normal incidence, Distortion of echoes. Beam width and lateral resolution, factors affecting lateral and longitudinal resolution, Hazardous effects of ultrasound.

UNIT 5 ULTRASONIC APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs.

Ultrasound quality assurance, Acoustic power and bio-effects: Acoustic power and intensity of pulsed ultrasound, Applications in medicine: Echo-Cardiography, Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Liver, Biliary systems, Kidneys and Adrenals.


1. David J Cheeke. N “Fundamentals And Applications of Ultrasonic Waves”, CRC Press 2002.

2. Dale Ensminger, Ultrasonic: “Fundamentals, Technology, Applications”, CRC press, 1988, Second Edition. 3. Baldev Raj, Palanichamy P., Rajendran. V, “Science and Technology of Ultrasonic”, Alpha Science, 2004

4. David.J.Farman and Isabel M Shirley, "A Users guide to diagnostic Ultrasound", Pitman Medical Publishing Co Ltd, 1978.

5. Brown Y.H.W and Dickson J.F., "Advances in Medical Engineering" Volume II and V, Academic Press, London, 1972

6. Jerold T. Bushhery, J. Antony Siebert, Edwin M. Leidholdt, John M Boone, “The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging”,

Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 3rd Edition 2011.

7. Flower. M.A “Webhŏs Physics of Medical Imaging”, Taylor & Francis, 2nd Edition, 2012

8. Perter Hoskins, Kevin Martin and Abigail Thrush, “Diagnostic ultrasound: Physics and Equipment”, Cambridge University Press, 2nd Edition, 2010.





SIC1611 FUNDAMENTALS OF MECHATRONICS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE, E&C and EEE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To create a strong base on the various sensors and transducers in mechanical system, interdisciplinary applications of Electronics, Electrical, Mechanical and Computer Systems for the Control of Mechanical and Electronic Systems

To design control system for computer application like CNC.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Mechatronics: Definition & Key Issues - Evolution - Elements - Mechatronics Approach to Modern Engineering, Industrial design and safety Design.

UNIT 2 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS 9 Hrs.

Introduction and background, difference between transducer and sensor, transducers types, transduction principle, photoelectric transducers- thermistors, thermodevices, thermocouple, inductive transducers capacitive transducers, piezoelectric transducers, piezoelectric transducers. Hall Effect transducers, Fiber optic transducers, Signal Processing - Data Display.

UNIT 3 ACTUATION SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Introduction to Mechanical Types and Electrical Types - Pneumatic & Hydraulic Systems - Applications - Selection of Actuators, Kinematics of robot manipulator links.

UNIT 4 DIGITAL AND CONTROL SYSTEMS 9 Hrs.

Digital logic neuron system, Types of Controllers - Programmable Logic Controllers - applications - ladder diagrams - Microprocessor Applications in Mechatronics: Temperature measurement system, Domestic washing machine - Programming Interfacing - Computer Applications: CNC drilling machine

UNIT 5 RECENT ADVANCES 9 Hrs. Manufacturing Mechatronics - Automobile Mechatronics - Medical Mechatronics - Office Automation - Case Studies

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bolton. W “Mechatronics: Electronic Control System for Mechanical & Electrical Engineering”, 2nd Edition Pearson Education,

2004.

2. Ramachandran. K.P,Vijaya Raghavan. G.K, Mechatronics, A.R.S. Publications, Second Edition, 2008.

3. Bradly.D.A, Dawson.D, Burd. N.C, Loader. A.J “Mechatronics: Electronics in Products and Processes” Nelson Publisher, 2004.

4. Michael B. Histand & David G. Alciators, “Introduction to Mechatronics & Measurement systems”, McGraw- Hill International Editions, 1998

5. Dan Necsulescu, “Mechatronics”, Pearson Education, 2005.Bishop, Robert H, "Mechatronics Hand book", CRC Press, 2002.






SIC1612 ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To make the student familiarize with adaptive control schemes and MRAS

To identify the techniques of linear and nonlinear systems with unknown parameters To introduce stability robustness concepts with protection systems.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO ADAPTIVE CONTROL SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Definition of adaptive control system - functions of adaptive control - Different approaches to Adaptive Control - gain scheduling - Relay feedback

UNIT 2 IDENTIFICATION OF ADAPTIVE CONTROL 9 Hrs. Conventional methods of Identifications - step response, impulse response, Bode plot - Identification of linear

time-invariant systems - Adaptive observers - Sufficient richness condition for parameter convergence - Equation error and output error methods

UNIT 3 MODEL REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEMS (MRAS) 9 Hrs. The need for MRAS - An over view of adaptive control systems - Mathematical description of MRAS - Design hypothesis - Equivalent representation of MRAS.

UNIT 4 CLASSIFICATION OF ADAPTIVE CONTROL 9 Hrs. Definitions - Auto tuning - Types of adaptive control - Recent trends in self-tuning - Robustness studies - Multivariable systems - Model updating - General-purpose adaptive regulator

UNIT 5 ADAPTIVE PROTECTION 9 Hrs. Need of Adaptive Protection in the system - Techniques for adaptive strategies in distance protection -

Synchro-phasor based adaptive protection schemes - protection schemes - SCADA based protection systems - FTA - Testing of Relays.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Astrom K.J, Wittenmark B, Adaptive Control, Addison-Wesley, 2nd edition, 1995

2. Shankar Sastry, Marc Bodson, "Adaptive Control", Prentice Hall of India (P) Ltd., 1993.

3. Chalam V.V “Adaptive Control Systems - Techniques & Applications” - Marcel Dekker Inc

4. Chang C. Hong, Tong H. Lee and Weng K. Ho, Adaptive Control, ISA press, Research Triangle Park, 1993.






SIC1613 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY MANAGEMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To educate on the safety, safety considerations and safety management systems in industries and to handle the complex industrial environment

To prevent accidents and pollution

UNIT 1 FIRE AND EXPLOSION 9 Hrs.

Introduction - Industrial processes and hazards potential, mechanical, thermal and process hazards. Shock wave propagation, vapor cloud and boiling liquid expanding vapors explosion ( V C E and BLEVE), mechanical and chemical explosion, multiphase reactions, transport effects and global ra tes .

UNIT 2 RELIEF SYSTEMS 9 Hrs. Preventive and protective management from fires and explosion - inerting, ventilation, and sprinkling, proofing, relief systems -relief valves, flares, scrubbers.

UNIT 3 TOXICOLOGY 9 Hrs. Hazards identification - toxicity, fire, static electricity, noise and dust concentration-Material safety data sheet, -hazards indices - Dow and Mond indices, hazard operability (HAZOP) and hazard analysis (HAZAN).

UNIT 4 ELECTRICAL SAFETY 9 Hrs.

Primary and secondary hazards, shocks, burns, falls, human safety, capacity and protection of conductor - joints and connections, overload and short circuit protection - no load protection - earth fault protection - system grounding - equipment grounding maintenance of ground - ground fault circuit interrupter - safety in handling hand held electrical appliances tools and medical equipments.

UNIT 5 SAFETY MANAGEMENT 9 Hrs.

Evaluation of modern safety concepts - safety management functions - safety Organization, safety department - safety committee - safety audit - general safety considerations in power plants, pressure vessels and pressurized pipe lines - operation and inspection of extinguishers - preventing the spread of fire - emergency exit facilities.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Fordham Coper, W. “Electrical Safety Engineering” Buterworth and Company, London, 1986

2. Blake Roland.P, “Industrial safety”, Prentice Hall of India, 1973. 3. John.V.Grimaldi and Rollin. H Simonds, “Safety Management”, All India traveler book seller, New Delhi - 1989.

4. Krishnan N.V, “Safety in Industry”, Jaico Publisher House, 1996. 5. Crowl D.A. and Louvar J.F., “Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall.2001.

6. John V Grimaldi, “Safety Management”, AITB publishers, 2003. 7. Mannan S., “Leeŏs Loss Prevention in the Process Industries”, Vol. I, 3rd Edition, Butterworth - Heinemann, 2004

8. Noel de Nervers, “Air Pollution Control Engineering”, McGraw Hill Book Co., 2000.






SIC1614 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES L T P Credits Total Marks

(For EIE and E&C) 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To learn the key aspects of Neural networks, Fuzzy logic components and building block hypothesis of Genetic algorithm

To adopt these techniques in solving problems in the real world.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO SOFT COMPUTING AND ARTIFICIAL NEURAL NETWORKS 9 Hrs. Evolution of Computing - Soft Computing Constituents - From Conventional AI to Computational Intelligence -

Machine Learning Basics, Fundamentals of ANN - Biological Neurons and Their Artificial Models - Types of ANN - Properties - Different Learning Rules - Types of Activation Functions - Training of ANN - Hebb learning - Perceptron Model (Both Single & Multi Layer) - Training Algorithm - Problems Solving Using Learning Rules and Algorithms - Linear Separability – Limitation.

UNIT 2 DETERMINISTIC & STATISTICAL NETWORKS 11 Hrs. Back Propagation Training Algorithm - Practical Difficulties - Counter Propagation Network - Structure &

Operation - Training of Kohonen and Grossberg Layer - Applications of BPN & CPN - Statistical Method - Training Application - Boltzman Training - Cauchy Training - Hop Field Network and Boltzman Machine - Speed Energy Function - Network Capacity - RBF Network, BAM, Architecture of SOM, ANN based water level controller.

UNIT 3 FUZZY LOGIC 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Fuzzy Set Theory - Basic Concepts of Fuzzy Sets - Classical Set Vs Fuzzy Set - Properties of Fuzzy Set - Fuzzy Logic Operation on Fuzzy Sets - Fuzzy Logic Control Principles - Fuzzy Relations - Fuzzy Rules - Defuzzification - Fuzzy Inference Systems - Fuzzy Expert Systems - Fuzzy Decision Making.

UNIT 4 FUZZY LOGIC CONTROLLER & ITS APPLICATION 9 Hrs.

Fuzzy Logic Controller - Fuzzification Interface - Knowledge Base- Decision Making Logic - Defuzzification Interface- Application of Fuzzy Logic to Water Level Controller - Temperature Controller - Control of Blood Pressur during Anesthesia.Introduction to Neuro - Fuzzy Systems - Fuzzy System Design Procedures - Fuzzy Sets and Logic Background - Fuzzy / ANN Design and Implementation.

UNIT 5 GENETIC ALGORITHMS 9 Hrs. Introduction - Robustness of Traditional Optimization and Search Techniques - The goals of optimization -

Survival of the Fittest - Fitness Computations - Cross over - Mutation -Reproduction- Rank method- Rank space method.

Max. 45Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Laurene Fausett, "Fundamentals of Neural Networks", Pearson Education, 2003

2. Timothy J. Ross , “Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications”, McGraw - Hill International Editions,1995

3. George J. Klir and Bo Yuan, "Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic", Prentice Hall, USA .1995

4. Jang J.S.R., Sun C.T. and Mizutani E, "Neuro-Fuzzy and soft computing", Pearson Education 2003

5. David E. Goldberg, “Genetic Algorithms in Search, Optimization and Machine Learning”, Addison Wesley, 19

6. Rajasekaran. S, Pai. G.A.V. “Neural Networks, Fuzzy Logic and Genetic Algorithms”, Prentice-Hall of India, 2003

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each-No choice 20 Marks




SBI1101 INTRODUCTION TO BIOINFORMATICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To enable the students to understand about tools used in Bioinformatics & how to use them. This will facilitate

the students to undertake projects in the modern biology.


Introduction to bioinformatics, biological information, the Central Dogma, Bioinformatics: Definition and overview Bioinformatics, Branches of Bioinformatics, Aim, Scope and Research areas of Bioinformatics. Genome projects, human genome project- Databases and human chromosomes, role of Bioinformatics in biological sequences. Biological data- DNA sequence protein sequence, macromolecular structure. Challenges in bioinformatics.

UNIT 2 COMPUTING IN BIOINFORMATICS 9 Hrs. Introduction to internet-facilities used on the internet-www- web browsers, introduction to network basics-LAN,

wan, network topology, protocol. Basic principles of computing in bioinformatics - databases system, programming languages for bioinformatics- Perl, python. Introduction to computational biology.

UNIT 3 BIOLOGICAL DATABASES 9 Hrs. Databases and programs, Information retrieval from databases of nucleic acid and proteins. Pair wise alignment

and database searching, Multiple Sequence Alignment database searching, DNA analysis, protein analysis, Data information and Knowledge Management, Concepts in Bioinformatics, Databases and Data Warehouses in Bioinformatics. Challenges, combining multiple types of data, Information Retrieval system in bioinformatics

UNIT 4 TOOLS APPLICATIONS IN BIOINFORMATIC 9 Hrs.

Bio-algorithms and Tools- Identifying genes, Overview of sequence annotation. Gene prediction methods-Human variation and disease identification, Visualizing and comparing nucleic acids and Protein Introduction to Phylogenetic analysis definition, concepts of tree, steps in constructing Phylogenetic analysis. Introduction to microarray.

UNIT 5 SOFTWARES IN BIOINFORMATICS 9 Hrs. Basic software tools used in bioinformatics - Sequence analysis- GCG, Emboss - Cn3D viewer- Rasmol, Swiss pdb viewer, Pymol, Jmol. Modeling- Discovery studio 2.0, Docking -Auto dock,HEX.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Des Higgins and Willie Taylor, “Bioinformatics sequence structures and databases”, Oxford University press, 1st ed., 2000.

2. Atwood, Paey Smith, “Introduction to bioinformatics”, 2001.

3. Arthur M.Lesk, “Introduction to bioinformatics”, 2002. 4. David W. Mount, “Bioinformatics: Sequences and genome analyses”, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory press, 2000. 5. Westhead, Parish and Twyman, “Instant notes: Bioinformatics”, 2003.







SBI1605 PYTHON L T P

Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To learn to appreciate the programming language that can be used for a wide variety of programming tasks and

to expose the student to the standard scripting language. At the end of the course, the student will be developing adequate skills in programming and will be known to understand the implementation of various applications using powerful assortment of built-in types in python.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PYTHON 9 Hrs. Introduction to PYTHON- History -Features –installation - Setting up path -Working with Python -Basic Syntax - -Operator

UNIT 2 VARIABLE AND DATA TYPES 9 Hrs. Native datatypes – Booleans–Numbers– Strings- Bytes and byte arrays-Lists- Tuples – Sets - Dictionaries

UNIT 3 REGULAR EXPRESSIONS 9 Hrs. Python regular expressions – Match function -Search function -Matching VS Searching -Modifiers-Patterns.

UNIT 4 CONTROL STATEMENTS 9 Hrs. Conditional Statements -If , If- else , Nested if-else , - Looping- For , While , Nested loops,- Control Statements- Break , Continue , Pass

UNIT 5 FUNCTIONS AND MODULES 9 Hrs. Functions - Defining a function -Calling a function-Types of functions-Function Arguments-Anonymous functions

-Global and local variables, Modules- Importing module-Math module -Random module -Packages – Composition

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Hetland., “Beginning Python” , Apress, 2008

2. Mark Pilgrim, “Dive Into Python”, Apress, 2004

3. Martin C. Brown, “Python: The Complete Reference (English)” , McGraw-Hill/Osborne Media, 2001.

4. Mark Summerfield , “Programming in Python 3”, 2nd ed (PIP3) , Addison Wesley ISBN: 0-321-68056-1






SBM1304 BIOMATERIALS L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The course provides an intriguing insight in chemistry, engineering, biology and medicine that has a significant

impact on biomaterials.

It highlights the way in which modern biology and medicine is inextricably linked to scientific discipline and helping us to understand the complex world of biomaterials.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND METALS 9 Hrs. Biomaterials – Overview, Classification of biomaterials, Interfacial Phenomena and tissue response to

biomaterials, Metals and alloys for orthopedic implants-Stainless steel, Cobalt chromium alloy, Titanium and its alloys, Precious metal alloys, Other metal alloys. Dental implants – materials, types and designs

UNIT 2 REPLACEMENT AND FIXATION DEVICES 9 Hrs. Bioelectric effect, Wolff’s Law, Types of orthopedic fixation devices-pins, screws and plates, Intra Medullary

and spinal nails. Interface Problems with artificial joints and various fixation methods, Hard tissue replacements – total hip and knee joint replacements. Soft Tissue replacements- Sutures -Tapes, Staples, Adhesives. Maxillofacial Implants

UNIT 3 POLYMERS AND APPLICATIONS 9 Hrs. Polymers in biomedical use, Hydrogels, silicone rubber, biodegradable polymers, Polymer Sterilization, Deterioration of polymers

UNIT 4 BIOCERAMICS AND COMPOSITES 9 Hrs.

Bioceramics, types and – bioactive resorbable, non – resorbable, bioceramic coatings on metallic and implants and bone bonding reactions on implantation. Hydroxyapatite – properties and applications. Composites – Types and Applications, Bioglass

UNIT 5 OPTHALMOLOGY, CORROSION AND TESTS 9 Hrs.

Ophthalmology- Introduction, Contact lenses, Eye shields, Viscoelastic solutions, Vitreous implants, Acrylate adhesives, Scleral buclikng materials for retinal detachment, artificial tears. Corrosion, Biocompatibility and Hemocompatibility, Biological Tests. Material surface characterization

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sujata V Bhat, “Biomaterials”, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

2. Rolando Barbucci, “Integrated Biomaterials Science”, Plenum Publishers, New York, 2002.

3. A.F. Von Recum, “Handbook of Biomaterials Evaluation – Scientific, Technical and Clinical Testing of Implant Materials”, 2nd Edition, Taylor & Francis, Philadelphia,1999.

4. J.B Park and R.S Lakes, “Biomaterials: An Introduction”, Second Edition, Plenum press, New York, 1992.

5. Joseph D Bronzino, “The Biomedical Engineering Hand Book”, Vol – 11, CRC press, 2000.







SBM1404 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The paper provides opportunities for training and research in all aspects of hospital / health administration. It

helps promotes scientific management of hospital and advancement of health care systems so as to make it rational, responsive and cost efficient.

The student is thus educated in the development of high quality of hospital care in the community and the country so as to provide a satisfactory environment to the patient and clinical research

UNIT 1 STANDARD OF HOSPITAL 9 Hrs. Concept of Hospital Management – Role of Administrator – Responsibilities of Administrator – Hospital Design – Outlines for establishing Departmental Zones – Hospital Engineering

UNIT 2 HOSPITAL ORGANIZATION 9 Hrs.

Organization of Out-Patient Services – Problems encountered in functioning of O.P Department – Organization of In- Patient Services – Casualty & Emergency Services- Organization and management of Operation theatres

UNIT 3 SERVICES IN HOSPITAL 9 Hrs. Organization of Ancillary Services: Lab Services – Department of Physiotherapy & Occupational Therapy – Organization of Blood Transfusion Services – Department of Radio – diagnosis – Hospital Pharmacy

UNIT 4 STERILIZATION AND HOSPITAL SAFETY 9 Hrs. Disease transmission, Sterilization and disinfection methods, Hospital safety – Radiation Safety, hazardous safety, safety disposal of biological waste - Maintenance of Equipments& Instruments.

UNIT 5 SUPPORTIVE SERVICES IN HOSPITAL 9 Hrs.

Organization and management of Nursing services and Dietary Services in hospital – House-keeping and maintenance –Medical Records -Staffing the hospital - Human resources management in hospital - Management Assisted by Computers: Reservation, Admission, Registration & Discharge Module

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Dr. L.L. Rao, “Hospital Management.”

2. R. D. Lele, “Computers in Medicine”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008

3. Mohan Bansal, “Medical informatics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2005



PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SBM1606 BIOMEMS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To enable the student to acquire adequate knowledge on micro mechanical devices and their applications in

drug delivery and nanotechnology.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. MEMS – definition. Origin of MEMS – Types – Materials used and their properties. MEMS Technology. Applications in health care. Integrated MEMS and microsystem.

UNIT 2 PROCESSING: MICRO MACHINING TECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Lithography- etching- Ion implantation- wafer bonding- Integrated processing- Bulk micro machining- surface micro machining- coating technology and CVD-LIGA process.

UNIT 3 MICROSYSTEMS AND MICROFLUIDS 9 Hrs.

General principles- Microsensors – Actuators- Electrostatic forces- Piezoelectric crystals – Intelligent materials and structures. Fundamentals of micro fluids, lab – on – a chip devices - Silicon and glass micromachining for micro total analysis systems.Surface chemistry in polymer microfluidic systems.

UNIT 4 APPLICATION IN MEDICINE 9 Hrs. Trends in MEMS for health care. Drug delivery systems - Biochip – Micro needles- Microelectrodes- Neural prosthesis – shape memory implants.

UNIT 5 BIOMEDICAL NANOTECHNOLOGY 9 Hrs. Nanotechnology- Medical applications of Nanotechnology- Drug synthesis and delivery- Nanofabrication methods – Nanomaterials in human body- Toxicity in nanomaterials.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Tai-Ran Hsu, “MEMS & Microsystem - Design and manufacture”, Mc. Graw Hill

2. Malsch, NeelinaH., ed., “Biomedical Nanotechnology”, Washington, DC: CRC Press, 2005

3. Marc J. Madou, “Fundamentals of Microfabrication and Nanotechnology”, 3rd Edition, Three-Volume Set,CRC Press

4. Mohamed Gad-el-Hak, “The MEMS Handbook”, CRC Press, 2005

5. L.Yahia (Editor), L'HocineYahia, “Shape Memory Implants.”







SBI1207 PERL PROGRAMMING L T P

Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the basics of Perl programming and its role and applications in Bioinformatics discipline.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO PERL PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. Introduction to Perl for Bioinformatics- Comprehensive PERL Archive Network-Variables in Perl: Scalars, Arrays

and Hashes. Basic structure of Perl language- a functional approach – constructing atgc.pl. tr/// function –text formatting – formatting numerical output with printf – trapping errors at run time – the s/// operator – the chop and chomp operators.

UNIT 2 INTRODUCTION TO ARRAYS AND HASHES 9 Hrs. Introduction to arrays and Hashes Variables – Printing hash data, accessing and removing elements. Special

variable $[ Accessing elements in an array. Function list – reverse- sort- join- split- pop- push- shift- unshift-split function–advanced array operation – copying and creating arrays – populating arrays with sequential data – qw function – determination of the size of an array –counting arrays – accessing first element in an array, accessing last element in an array, accessing other elements in an array – adding elements to the end of an array – adding elements– removing elements – appending elements ,altering elements – array slices – splicing array – sorting arrays – reversing arrays – arrays from strings. Merging arrays, Transforming strings to arrays, transforming arrays to strings (Split and join functions).

UNIT 3 PERL REGULAR EXPRESSIONS AND CONTROL STRUCTURES. 9 Hrs. Perl regular expressions – special characters (+, *,?, [ ]) – regex operator – pattern modifier operator –

conditional matching operator – range operator – match quantifiers – matching boundaries, grouping matching. Perl control statements – control structures – if statements – if-else – if-elsif – if-elsif-else – while loop – until loop –unless for loop – foreach loop –scoping of variables.

UNIT 4 FILES AND DIRECTORY MANIPULATIONS 9 Hrs.

Files- Operating modes: read, write, append function- File variable, Die function– terminating a program, Reading complete file, Reading a file line by line, Closing a file. File test operators (d, e, l, r, s, w, x, B, T)-Manipulation Functions –link, unlink, rename, truncate, removing files. Directory Manipulation functions – mkdir, chdir, opendir, readdir, closedir, rmdir, chmod.

UNIT 5 INTRODUCTION TO PERL MODULES 9 Hrs.

Introduction to modules and Subroutines- BioPerl module, Getopt: Long module and LWP: Simple Module-Cwd module – creating perl module tree, system function –Perl subroutines and functions. Introduction and applications of Common Gateway Interfaces (CGI).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Harshawardhan P Bal, “Perl Programming for Bioinformatics”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2003.

2. Tim Bunce and Alligator Descartes, “Programming the Perl DBI”, O'Reilly Media, USA, 2000.

3. Michael Moorhouse and Paul Berry, “Bioinformatics, Biocomputing and PERL”, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK, 2004. 4. James Tisdall, “Beginning Perl for Bioinformatics”, O’Reilly & Associates, USA, 2001.

5. Steven Holzner,” PERL- Black Book”, Dreamtech Publications, 2nd Edition, 2001.






SBT1610 GMP AND QUALITY CONCEPTS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To introduce students about Good manufacturing practices quality concepts which would expose them to

industrial scenario.


Basic Concepts: Quality concepts, Quality Control, Quality Assurance, Good Manufacturing Practices, Good Laboratory Practices, Responsibilities. Quality Control: Quality control laboratory: Responsibilities, good laboratory practices, routine controls, instruments, protocols.

UNIT 2 GMP 9 Hrs.

Good Manufacturing Practice. Legal requirements pertaining to GMP: GMP Guidelines, Standards, Regulatory agencies c) Basic Components of GMP: Organization & Personnel, Premises, Equipments, Raw Materials, Complaints and recalls, Specifications, Self inspection.

UNIT 3 GLP 9 Hrs. Good Laboratory Practice (GLP) – an overview and basic information, Scope. Principles of GLP: Test Facility

Organization and Personnel, Quality Assurance Programme, Facilities, Test Systems, Test and Reference Items, Standard Operating Procedures, Performance of the Study, Reporting of Study Result, Storage and Retention of Records and Materials.

UNIT 4 INSPECTION 9 Hrs.

Inspections, Quality Audit and Quality System Reviews: Inspections, role of quality audit, role of inspectors, methods of inspection- routine, concise, follow-up and special inspections, frequency and duration of inspections, preparations for inspections, conduct, report and regulatory actions.

UNIT 5 REGULATION 9 Hrs. Regulatory bodies – Need and role of regulatory bodies. Different regulatory bodies – FDA, HACCP and their scope. Importance of regulatory approval. ISO 9000 – regulations.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Sidney H. Willig, “Good manufacturing Practices for Pharmaceuticals, 5th Edition, Revised and Expanded”, Marcel Dekker, Inc.

New York, 2005.

2. Jose Rodriguez-Perez, “The FDA and Worldwide Current Good Manufacturing Practices and Quality System requirements guidebook for finished pharmaceuticals”, American Society for Quality, ASQ Quality Press, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, 2014.






SBT1611 BIOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS L T P

Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To understand the essentials of basic biological principles

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO CELLS 9 Hrs.

Cell-Functional unit of live organisms - Cell theory - Prokaryotic and eukaryotic cell - plant, animal, bacterial cell - cell components - functions- cell organization – tissues - basic types -cell division: Mitosis, meiosis, cell cycle regulation

UNIT 2 SOCIAL IMPORTANCE 9 Hrs. Application of biological sciences and biotechnology to the society - human health care and medicines - pharmaceuticals and nutraceuticals -food and agriculture- pollution management and environment - Biofuels

UNIT 3 INTRODUCTION TO BIOMOLECULES 9 Hrs. Biomolecules - classification, salient features - biological significance - carbohydrates, proteins and amino acids - lipids and fats - nucleic acids - vitamins-Enzymes

UNIT 4 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY 9 Hrs.

Human Physiology - Different systems associated with human- Tissues, organ and physiology of the various systems: Digestive, respiratory, circulatory, skeletal, nervous, excretory and reproductive system - Artificial memory and neural net work

UNIT 5 MEDICAL IMPORTANCE 9 Hrs.

Infectious and non infectious diseases- causative agents, epidemiology, pathogenicity, control and prevention, treatment of AIDS, tuberculosis, Pathology of non infectious and genetic diseases and disorders - cancer, diabetes melites, cardiac diseases- neurological disorders-Parkinson’s disease

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Satyanarayana, U. “Biotechnology”, 4th Edition, Books and Allied Pvt. Ltd. Kolkata, 2007.

2. Lehninger A.L, Nelson D.L, Cox .M.M, “Principles of Biochemistry”,. CBS Publications 1993







SCH1616 ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide a basic understanding of the EIA process as it is used for research, planning, project or program

evaluation, monitoring, and regulatory enforcement and to introduce students to the legal, economic, administrative and technical process of preparing and/or evaluating environmental impact documents.


Historical development of Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA). EIA in Project Cycle. Legal and Regulatory aspects in India. Types and Limitations of EIA, Cross sectoral issues and terms of reference in EIA – Public Participation in EIA. EIA process.

UNIT 2 METHODS FOR EIA Methods of EIA – Check lists – Matrices – Networks – Cost-benefit analysis – Analysis of alternatives.

UNIT 3 PREDICTION AND ASSESSMENT 9 Hrs. Assessment of Impact on land, water, air, social & cultural activities and on flora & fauna- Mathematical models- Public participation – Rapid EIA.

UNIT 4 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN 9 Hrs.

Environmental Management Plan – Preparation, Implementation and review – Mitigation and Rehabilitation Plans– Policy and guidelines for planning and monitoring programmes – Post project audit – Ethical and Quality aspects of Environmental Impact Assessment.

UNIT 5 LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT & EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 9 Hrs.

Life Cycle Assessment - Elements of LCA - Life Cycle Costing – Eco Labeling – Designs for the Environment - International Environmental Standards - ISO 14001 - Environmental Audit. Executive summary - Documentation of EIA findings, Planning, Organization of information and Visual display material, Report preparation.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Canter, L.W., “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw Hill, New York. 1996

2. Y.Anjaneyulu: “Environmental Impact Assessment Methodologies”, BS Pub. 2002. 3. S.K.Shukla and Srivastava P.R., “Concepts in Environmental Impact Analysis”, Common Wealth Publishers, New Delhi, 1992. 4. John G. Rau and David C Hooten (Ed), “Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook”,McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1990.

5. Lawrence, D.P., “Environmental Impact Assessment – Practical solutions to recurrent problems”, Wiley-Interscience, New Jersey, 2003.

6. “Environmental Assessment Source book”, Vol. I, II & III. The World Bank,Washington, D.C., 1991. 8. Judith Petts, “Handbook of Environmental Impact Assessment”, Vol. I & II”, Blackwell Science, 1999

9. World Bank –Source book on EIA

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN:





SCI1619 DISASTER MANAGEMENT L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To create an awareness towards natural and man-made disasters, disaster preparedness and disaster

management

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO DISASTERS 12 Hrs. Natural resources and its importance - understanding on fragile eco-system - characteristics and types of

Disasters, Geological and Mountain Area Disasters: Earthquakes, Volcanic eruption, landslides - Wind and Water Related Natural Disaster: Floods, Droughts, Cyclones, Tsunamis - Man Made Disasters: Forest fires, Nuclear, Biological and Chemical disaster - Causes and effects - Disaster Profile of India - Disaster Management cycle.

UNIT 2 DISASTER PREPAREDNESS 8 Hrs. Disaster management, mitigation and preparedness: Disaster Preparedness for People and Infrastructu

CommUNITy based Disaster Preparedness Plan - Roles & Responsibilities of Different Agencies and Governme Education, Communication & Training, Central, State, District and local administration, Armed Forces, Police, Par Military Forces, International Agencies, and NGO’s - Disaster Mitigation: Strategies, Emerging Trends, Mitigat management and Role of Team and Coordination.

UNIT 3 REHABILITATION, RECONSTRUCTION & RECOVERY 10 Hrs. Damage assessment – Development of Physical and Economic Infrastructure - Nature of Damage to Houses

and Infrastructure due to Disasters - Funding Arrangements for Reconstruction - Monitoring and Evaluation of Rehabilitation Work: Training, Rescue and planning the rescue activities and rehabilitations - Role of Government and NGO’s - Participative Rehabilitation Process: Case Studies

UNIT 4 DISASTER RESPONSE AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 8 Hrs. Disaster Response Plan: Communication, Participation and Activation of Emergency Preparedness P

Search, Rescue, Evacuation and other logistic management - Human Behaviour and Response Managemen Psychological Response and Psychological Rehabilitation, Trauma and Stress Management, rumour and Panic Management, Medical and Health Response to Different Disasters - Relief Measures: Minimum Standard of Reli essential components of Relief Management, and funding.

UNIT 5 RISK ASSESSMENT AND VULNERABILITY ANALYSIS 7 Hrs. Hazard, Risk and Vulnerability: Concept and Relationship: Disaster Risk Reduction, People Participat Risk

Assessment- Vulnerability Analysis, Vulnerability Identification - Vulnerability profile of India - Strategies fo Survival - Social Infrastructure for Vulnerability Reduction.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bryant Edwards, “Natural Hazards”, Cambridge University Press, U.K, 2005 2. Carter, W. Nick, “Disaster Management, Asian Development Bank”, Manila, 1991. 3. Government of India, “Vulnerability Atlas of India”, New Delhi, 1997. 4. Sahni, Pardeep et.al. (eds.), “Disaster Mitigation Experiences and Reflections”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2002 5. Sahni, Pardeep and Ariyabandu, Madhavi Malalgoda, 2012: “Disaster risk reduction in South Asia”, Phi learning pvt.

Ltd.-publisher, New Delhi, 2012. 6. Sharma, R.K. & Sharma, G.,(ed), “Natural Disaster”, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2005. 7. Taori, K, “Disaster Management through Panchayati Raj”, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2005. Websites 8. NOAA Coastal Services Center, “Linking People Information and Technology”, 9. “Risk and Vulnerability Assessment Tool”, at, http://www.csc.noaa.gov/rvat/criticalEdd.html

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SCS1302 COMPUTER GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA

SYSTEMS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To gain knowledge to develop, design and implement two and three dimensional graphical structures To enable students to acquire knowledge of Multimedia compression and animations. To learn creation, Management and Transmission of Multimedia objects.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF COMPUTER GRAPHICS 9 Hrs. Output Primitives: Survey of computer graphics – Overview of graphics systems – Line drawing algorithm – Circle drawing algorithm – Curve drawing algorithm - Attributes of output primitives – Anti-aliasing.

UNIT 2 2D TRANSFORMATIONS AND VIEWING 8 Hrs. Basic two dimensional transformations – Other transformations – 2D and 3D viewing – Line clipping – Polygon clipping – Logical classification – Input functions – Interactive picture construction techniques.

UNIT 3 3D CONCEPTS AND CURVES 10 Hrs. 3D object representation methods - B-REP , sweep representations, Three dimensional transformations. Curve generation -

cubic splines, Beziers, blending of curves- other interpolation techniques, Displaying Curves and Surfaces, Shape description requirement, parametric function. Three dimensional concepts.Introduction- Fractals and self similarity- Successive refinement of curves, Koch curve and peano curves.

UNIT 4 METHODS AND MODELS 8 Hrs. Visible surface detection methods – Illumination models – Halftone patterns – Dithering techniques – Polygon rendering methods – Ray tracing methods – Color models and color applications.

UNIT 5 MULTIMEDIA BASICS AND TOOLS 10 Hrs.

Introduction to multimedia - Compression & Decompression – Data & File Format standards – Digital voice and audio – Video image and animation. Introduction to Photoshop – Workplace – Tools – Navigating window – Importing and exporting images – Operations on Images – resize, crop, and rotate. Introduction to Flash – Elements of flash document – Drawing tools – Flash animations – Importing and exporting - Adding sounds – Publishing flash movies – Basic action scripts – GoTo, Play, Stop, Tell Target

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Donald Hearn, Pauline Baker M., "Computer Graphics”, 2nd Edition, Prentice Hall, 1994. 2. Tay Vaughan ,”Multimedia”, 5th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001.

3. Ze-Nian Li, Mark S. Drew ,”Fundamentals of Multimedia”, Prentice Hall of India, 2004. 4. D. McClelland, L.U.Fuller ,”Photoshop CS2 Bible”, Wiley Publishing, 2005. 5. James D. Foley, Andries van Dam, Steven K Feiner, John F. Hughes, “Computer Graphics Principles and Practice, 2nd Edition

in C, Audison Wesley, ISBN – 981-235-974-5

6. William M. Newman, Roberet F. Sproull, “Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Edition.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs.

PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks




SCY1601 SPECTROSCOPY L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To make the students to understand the basic concepts about the analytical techniques

UNIT 1 UV-VIS SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs.

Principles of radiation – Frank condon principle – Various electronic transitions (185-800 nm) – Beer-Lambert law – Instrumentation of single beam and double beam spectrophotometer – Woodward and Fieser rule – Applications of UV-Visible spectroscopy.

UNIT 2 IR AND RAMAN SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs.

Principles of IR spectra – Instrumentation of IR spectroscopy – Force constant – Effect of hydrogen bonding – Applications of IR spectroscopy – Raman spectroscopy: Principle – Strokes line and antistrokes line – Instrumentation – Applications of Raman spectroscopy.

UNIT 3 1H NMR AND 1 3 C SPECTROSCOPY 9 Hrs. General introduction and definition: Chemical shift – Spin-spin interaction – Shielding mechanism – Coupling constants. Nuclear overhauser effect (NOE). Instrumentation of 1H NMR and 1 3 C spectroscopy.

UNIT 4 MASS SPECTROMETRY 9 Hrs. Principle of Mass spectra – Instrumentation – Principle of fragmentation – Nitrogen rule – McLafferty rearrangement – Representation of Mass spectrum – Applications of mass spectra.

UNIT 5 IMAGING TECHNIQUES 9 Hrs. Scanning electron microscopy – Energy dispesrve X-ray spectroscopy – Transmission electron microscopy – Atomic force microscopy – Scanning tunneling microscopy – X-ray photoelectron spectroscopy.

Max. 45 Hours


1. Banwell C.N., and McCash E. M., “Fundamentals of Molecular Spectroscopy”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2000. 2. Silverstein R. M., and Webster F. X., “Spectroscopic Identification of Organic Compounds”, 6th Edition, John Wiley & Sons,

2003.

3. Levine I. N., “Molecular Spectroscopy”, John Wiley & Sons, 1974. 4. Williams D. H., and Fleming I., “Spectroscopic Methods in Organic Chemistry”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing

Company, 1988.

5. Kemp W., “Applications of Spectroscopy”, English Language Book Society, 1987.



PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (10% problems may be asked)



SCY1602 ENERGY SOURCES L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To know the various sources of energy available and to face the future challenges arising due to energy crisis.

UNIT 1 GLOBAL AND INDIAN ENERGY SCENARIO 9 Hrs. Bio-fuels - Nuclear energy - Their utilization pattern in the past, present and future projections of consumption pattern. Power sector reforms - Restructuring of energy supply sector - Energy strategy for future.

UNIT 2 HYDROGEN ENERGY 9 Hrs. Hydrogen as a renewable energy source: Sources of Hydrogen – Fuel for Vehicles. Hydrogen Production:

Direct electrolysis of water – Thermal decomposition of water – Biochemical methods of hydrogen production. Storage of Hydrogen: Gaseous, Cryogenic and Metal hydride.

UNIT 3 ELECROCHEMICAL ENERGY 9 Hrs.

Fuel cells: Principle of working, construction and applications of phosphoric acid fuel cell – Solid oxide fuel cell – Molten carbonate fuel cell – Polymer electrolyte membrane fuel cell. Batteries: Lead-acid battery – Nickel-cadmium battery – Lithium batteries – Nickel hydride batteries.

UNIT 4 BIOENERGY 9 Hrs.

Thermo-chemical Conversion: Pyrolysis – Combustion – Gasification – Liquification. Bio-Chemical Conversion: Aerobic and Anaerobic conversion – Fermentation. Ethanol as a fuel for I.C. engines. Isolation of methane from Biogas and packing and its utilization.

UNIT 5 NUCLEAR ENERGY 9 Hrs. Nuclear Energy – Nuclear Chain reaction – Fuel enrichment – Different Types of Nuclear Reactors: Pressurised water reactor – Boiling water reactor – Fast Breeder reactor. Nuclear waste disposal – Nuclear Fusion.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Culp A. W., “Principles of Energy Conversion”, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1991.

2. Maths D. A., “Hydrogen Technology for Energy”, Noyes Data Corp., 1976.

3. Linden D., Handbook: “Batteries and Fuel cell”, Mc.Graw Hill, 1984. 4. Bansal N. K., and Kleeman M. K., “Renewable Sources of Energy and Conversion Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill, 1990. 5. White L. P., “Biomass as Fuel”, Academic Press, 1981.

6. Raymond Murray, Keith Holbert, “Nuclear Energy: An Introduction to the Concepts, Systems, and Applications of Nuclear. Processes”, 7th Edition, Elsevier Science & Technology, 2014.

7. Arniker H. J., “Essentials of Nuclear Chemistry”, New Age Publications, 1996.



PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks (10% problems may be asked)



SHS1601 LIFE AND EMPLOYABILITY SKILLS L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES The course aims at equipping students to be competent in facing the challenges in today's globalized context, by

providing an insight to soft skills for success and life skills for survival at the workplace.

UNIT 1 ACHIEVEMENT MOTIVATION Time Management - Positive and negative aspects of time log - Formula for successful time management.

UNIT 2 SELF-AWARENESS AND EMPATHY 9 Hrs. Work-Life Balance – Project completion Techniques – Effective Planning and Organisation - Strategies to improve team communication.

UNIT 3 DECISION MAKING Decision making techniques- types of decisions- Setting Goals and Plans - Problem Solving Techniques.

UNIT 4 EFFECTIVE COMMNICATION 9 Hrs. Non-verbal communication - means of communication – Personality development – Language and body language for interviews- Self Empowerment.

UNIT 5 NEGOTIATION SKILLS 9 Hrs. Negotiation skills – skill acquisition strategies – effective persuading skills.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Gravells, Ann. “Delivering Employability Skills in the Lifelong Learning Sector Further Education and Skills”, United Kingdom:

SAGE Publications Ltd, 2010.

2. Hind, David W.G., Stuart Moss, “Employability Skills,” Business Education Publishers Ltd., United Kingdom :Tyne & Wear, 2005.

3. Rao M.S., “Enhancing Employability: Connecting Campus with Corporate”, New Delhi: I K International Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, 2010






SHS1602 TECHNICAL WRITING FOR SCIENTISTS L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide with an introduction to professional writing as a disciplinary field.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO TECHNICAL WRITING 9 Hrs. Technical Writing – Principles and procedure of technical writing; Role of a Technical writer, Various forms of Technical Writing

UNIT 2 ONLINE TOOLS 9 Hrs. Printed documentation and Online Help Systems, Working with images and illustrations, designing graphic aids.

UNIT 3 PROCESS OF WRITING 9 Hrs. Collecting and Organizing information, Drafting information verbally and visually, Producing Information, Documentation Process.

UNIT 4 REACHING THE AUDIENCE 9 Hrs. Technical Writing Process Templates and Page design, Audience Profiling.

UNIT 5 PRESENTATION 9 Hrs. Writing specialized forms as abstracts, instructions, proposals and project and lab re

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Mike Markel's “Technical Communication”, New York: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2009

2. Joseph M. Williams book Style: “Toward Clarity and Grace”, Chicago, University of Chicago Press, 1995






SHS1603 PROFESSIONAL WRITING AND L T P Credits Total Marks

ADVANCED RHETORIC 3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To educate the learners on written communication and provide exposure to practical aspects of writing for

wider audience and for scientific community.

UNIT 1 BASICS OF PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Technical Writing and Business communication (process, networks, importance, cultural variations, today’s globalized workplaces), Practical aspects of communication, Principles and procedure of technical writing, Role of a Technical writer , attention to analyzing audience and purpose, Understanding and Inventing Pedagogies for Professional Writing.

UNIT 2 PROCESS OF PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs. Technical Writing Process Today, Genres of Technical Communication, Writing Proposals, Formats for Letters, Memos, abstracts, instructions, and proposals, and Email Messages.

UNIT 3 PRACTICAL ASPECTS OFPROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION 9 Hrs.

Drafting and Documentation, Collecting and Organizing information , Drafting information verbally and visually, Producing Information, Documentation Process, Argument, Persuasion, Propaganda, Audience and Style, Readers and Context of Use, The participatory model of writing.

UNIT 4 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS & STRATEGIES IN CHANGING SCENARIO 9 Hrs. Ethics in Professional Communication, Applying theory to practice- analysis of papers and speeches, Writing on

line-Principles while designing web sites, Creating effective presentation slides, Speech writing- basics, scrutiny and observation, Speech writing techniques and application.

UNIT 5 PROFESSIONAL COMMUNICATION & FUTURE 9 Hrs. Future of Technical Communication, multimedia genre, Identity, Authority, and Learning to Write in New Workplaces, Writing work, technology, and pedagogy in the present era


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Dubinsky, James, ed., “Teaching Technical Communication: Critical Issues for the Classroom”. Bedford, 2004

Hawk, Byron. "Toward a Post-Techne: or, Inventing Pedagogies for Professional Writing." (TCQ)

Mara, Andrew and Byron Hawk. "Posthuman Rhetorics and Technical Communication."

Henry, Jim. “Writing Workplace Cultures: An Archaeology of Professional Writing”. SIUP, 2000.

Johnson-Sheehan, Richard. “Technical Communication Today” 3rd ed. NY: Longman, 2010.

Locker, Kitty O. and Donna S. Kienzler., “Business and Administrative Communication”. 9th ed. McGraw Hill, 2010.

Mike Markel's Technical Communication, New York: Bedford/St. Martin's, 2009

Spilka, Rachel, ed. “Digital Literacy in/for Technical Communications”. Routledge, 2009.

Spinuzzi, Clay. “Tracing Genres through Organizations: A Sociocultural Approach to Information Design (Acting with

Technology)”. MIT, 2003






SIT1402 MOBILE APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To develop applications for current and emerging mobile computing devices, performing tasks at all stages of

the software development life-cycle.

To learn how to utilize rapid prototyping techniques to design and develop sophisticated mobile interfaces. To design, implement and deploy mobile applications using an appropriate software development environment.

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION AND UI INTERFACE 9 Hrs.

Introduction to mobile technologies, mobile operation systems, Mobile devices-pros and cons, Introduction to Android, Versions, Features, Architecture, UI Widgets and Events handling, Layouts, Required tools-Eclipse, ADT, AVD, Application structure, AndroidManifest file, Android design philosophy, Creating Android applications.

UNIT 2 BUILDING BLOCKS AND DATABASES 9 Hrs. Introduction to Activities and Intents-Understanding Activity life cycle, Linking Activities, Passing Data, Toast,

Displaying a Dialog Window and Notifications. Content Provider, Services, Broadcast receivers, accessing databases, sample applications, debugging and deploying app, publish in Playstore.

UNIT 3 C PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs. C- Data Types and Expressions, Decision Making and Looping, Objects and Classes, Property, Messaging,

Categories and Extensions, Fast Enumeration – NSArray, NSDictionary, Methods and Selectors, Static & Dynamic objects, Exception handling, Memory management, Required Tools- Xcode, iOS Simulator, Instruments, ARC, frameworks.

UNIT 4 INTRODUCTION TO IOS 9 Hrs. Introduction to iPhone, History, Versions, Features, MVC Architecture, View Controller - Building the UI and

Event handling, Application life cycle, Tab Bars, Story Boards and Navigation Controllers, Table View, Push Notification, Database handling, Debugging and Deployment, Publishing app in Appstore, sample applications.

UNIT 5 WINDOWS MOBILE APP DEVELOPMENT 9 Hrs.

Introduction to Windows Phone 8, Application Life cycle, UI Designing and events, Building, Files and Storage, Network Communication, Push Notification, Background Agents, Maps and Locations, Data Access and storage,Introduction to silvelight and XAML, Running and Debugging the App, Deploying and Publishing.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Reto Meier, “Professional Android Application Development”, Wrox Edition. 2. http://www.tutorialspoint.com/android/index.htm

3. http://developer.android.com/training/index.html

4. Stephen G. Kochan, “Programming in COURSE OBJECTIVE C”, Addition Wesley, 4th Edition.

5. David Mark, Jack Nutting and Jeff LaMarche, “Beginning iOS 5 Development”, Apress Edition.

6. Baijian Yang, Pei Zheng, Lionel M. Ni, “Professional Microsoft Smartphone Programming”, Wrox Edition.






SIT1606 BIG DATA L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To understand the dominant software systems and algorithms for coping with Big Data.

Apply appropriate analytic techniques and tools to analyze big data, create statistical models, and identify insights that can lead to actionable results

To explore the ethical implications of big data research, and particularly as they relate to the web

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION 9 Hrs. Introduction to Big Data – Challenges of Conventional Systems - Nature of Data - Small data-Medium data –

Big Data – Small data vs Big data - Sources of Big Data- Big Data Characteristics – Big Data Analytics – Importance of Big Data, Big Data in the Enterprise – Big Data Enterprise Model – Building a Big Data Platform -Big data in Social and Behavioral sciences.

UNIT 2 HDFS, HADOOP AND HADOOP INFRASTRUCTURE 9 Hrs. Hadoop and Databases - Typical Datacenter Architecture - Adding Hadoop to the Mix - Key Benefit -· Flexibility:

Complex Data Processing - HDFS - Hadoop Infrastructure -Architecture – Different in Data Model and Computing Model – HDFS Files and Blocks , Components of HDFS - Hadoop framework - HDFS-Map Reduce Framework-Data Loading techniques-Hadoop Cluster Architecture-Hadoop Configuration files-Hadoop Cluster modes-Single Node-Multi Node-Fully distributed node.

UNIT 3 HADOOP MAP REDUCE FRAMEWORK 9 Hrs. Relationship between MapReduce and HDFS- Relationship between MapReduce and HDFS- Clients, Data Nodes, and HDFS Storage - MapReduce workloads.

Hadoop framework- Hadoop data types-Hadoop map reduce Paradigm-Map and Reduce Tasks-Map reduce Execution framework-Partitioners and Combiners-Input formats (Input Splits and Records, Text Input, Binary Input, Multiple Inputs)- Output Formats (TextOutput, BinaryOutPut, Multiple Output)- Hadoop Mapreduce programming-Advanced Map reduce concepts- Counters, Custom Writables-Unit testing framework-Error Handling-Tuning-Advanced Map reduce.

UNIT 4 HADOOP IMPLEMENTATION AND HADOOP ECO SYSTEM TOOLS 9 Hrs. Hadoop Implementation - · Job Execution - · Hadoop Data Types - · Job Configurations - · Input and Output Formats ECO system tools- Pig's Data Model, Pig Latin, Developing & Testing Pig Latin Scripts- Writing Evaluation,

Filter, Load & Store Functions-Hive- Hive Architecture- Comparison with Traditional Database- HiveQL: Data Types, Operators and Functions- Hive Tables- Querying Data-Advance Hive, NoSQL Databases -HBase-Loading Data in Hbase-Querying Data in Hbase

UNIT 5 HADOOP PROJECT ENVIRONMENT 9 Hrs. HBase: Introduction to HBase, Client API's and their features, Available Client, HBase Architecture, MapReduce

Integration. HBase: Advanced Usage, Schema Design, Advance Indexing, Coprocessors, Hadoop 2.0- MRv2 –YARN-NameNode High Availability, HDFS Federation, MRv2, YARN, Running MRv1 in YARN, Upgrade your existing MRv1 code to MRv2, Programming in YARN framework-cover Apache Oozie Workflow Scheduler for Hadoop

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCES BOOKS 1. WA Gmob , “Big Data and Hadoop”, Kindle Edition, 2013

2. Eric Miller, “A Overview of Map Reduce and its impact on Distributed Data”, Kindle Edition, 2012. 3. Strata, “ Big Data Now”, O’Reily Media Inc., Kindle Edition, 2012.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each - No Choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks



SIT1608 GREEN COMPUTING L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To study about existing green computing strategies

Fundamental challenges in achieving green operations of computing units

Assess enterprise-wide and personal computing and computing related energy consumption.

UNIT 1 GREEN COMPUTING FUNDAMENTALS 9 Hrs.

Green IT fundamentals: Business, IT, and the environment – Green computing: Carbon foot print - scoop on power – Green IT strategies: Drivers, Dimensions, and Goals – Environmentally responsible business: Policies, Practices and Metrics.

UNIT 2 GREEN ASSETS AND MODELING 9 Hrs.

Green Assets: Buildings, data centers, networks and devices – Green business process management: Modeling, optimization and collaboration – Green enterprise architecture – Environmental intelligence – Green supply chains – Green information systems: Design and development models.

UNIT 3 GRID FRAMEWORK 9 Hrs. Virtualizing of IT systems – Role of electric utilities, telecommuting, teleconferencing and teleporting – Materials recycling – Best ways for green PC – Green data center – Green grid framework

UNIT 4 GREEN COMPLIANCE 9 Hrs.

Socio-cultural aspects of green IT – Green enterprise transformation roadmap – Green Compliance: protocols, standards and audits –Emergent carbon issues: technologies and future.TheWayClimate Savers Computing Initiative Do - The Climate Savers Computing Initiative - What Green Computing Impact Organization Supplies - Green Computers Initiatives - Green Computing Impact Organization Overview - Green Electronics Council - Going Green Can Be Truly Challenging - The Green Grid Framework - The CSCI Top Secrets Revealed - The EPEAT Standards - To Have a Green Computer - Green Computing Means to Save Your Money and Your Business - Finances - Green Computing Initiative Platforms.

UNIT 5 CASE STUDIES 9 Hrs. The Environmentally Responsible Business Strategies (ERBS) – Case study scenarios for trial runs – Case studies – Applying green IT strategies and applications to a home, hospital, packaging industry and telecom sector.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bhuvan Unhelkar, “Green IT Strategies and Applications- Using Environmental Intelligence”, CRC Press, June 2011.

2. Woody Leonhard, Katherrine Murray, “Green Home computing for dummies”, August 2009. 3. Warland & Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Jean Harcourt Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001. 4. Jason Harris, “Green Computing and Green IT- Best Practices onregulations & industry”, Lulu.com, 2008.

5. Alin Gales, Michael Schaefer, Mike Ebbers, “Green Data Center:steps for the Journey”, Shoff/IBM rebook, 2011.

6. John Lamb, “The Greening of IT”, Pearson Education, 2009.






SIT1609 GAME PROGRAMMING L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVES To provide introductions to event driven programming, game engine scripting, game engine class structures. Learning to plan and to report on a significant programming project.

Learn to work in programming in teams, and learn to use standard game development environments, in particular the Unity development platform.

UNIT 1 3D GRAPHICS FOR GAME PROGRAMMING 9 Hrs.

Coordinate Systems, Ray Tracing, Modelling in Game Production, Vertex Processing, Rasterization, Fragment Processing and Output Merging, Illumination and Shaders, Parametric Curves and Surfaces, Shader Models, Image Texturing, Bump Mapping, Advanced Texturing, Character Animation, Physics-based Simulation

UNIT 2 GAME DESIGN PRINCIPLES 9 Hrs. Character development, Story Telling, Narration, Game Balancing, Core mechanics, Principles of level design, Genres of Games, Collision Detection, Game Logic, Game AI, Path Finding.

UNIT 3 GAMING ENGINE DESIGN 9 Hrs. Renderers, Software Rendering, Hardware Rendering, and Controller based animation, Spatial Sorting, Level of detail, collision detection, standard objects, and physics

UNIT 4 GAMING PLATFORMS AND FRAMEWORKS 9 Hrs. Flash, DirectX, OpenGL, Java, Python, XNA with Visual Studio, Mobile Gaming for the Android, iOS, Game engines - Adventure Game Studio, DXStudio, Unity.

UNIT 5 GAME DEVELOPMENT 9 Hrs. Developing 2D and 3D interactive games using OpenGL, DirectX – Isometric and Tile Based Games, Puzzle games, Single Player games, Multi-Player games.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT REFERENCE BOOKS

1. David H. Eberly, “3D Game Engine Design, Second Edition: A Practical Approach to Real-Time Computer Graphics” Morgan Kaufman , 2 Edition, 2006.

2. Jung Hyun Han, “3D Graphics for Game Programming”, Chapman and Hal/CRC,1st edition, 2011 .

3. Mike McShaf rfy, “Game Coding Complete”, Third Edition, Charles River Media, 2009.

4. Jonathan S. Harbour, “Beginning Game Programming”, Course Technology PTR, 3 edition, 2009.

5. Ernest Adams and Andrew Rolings, “Fundamentals of Game Design”, Prentice Hall 1st edition, 2006.

END SEMESTER QUESTION PAPER PATTERN






SPH1601 ENERGY PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To expose the students to the basic principles of energy conversions, materials for energy conversion and

energy storage devices.

UNIT 1 ENERGY AND THERMODYNAMICS 9 Hrs. Forms of Energy, Conservation of Energy, Entropy, Heat capacity, Thermodynamic cycles: Brayton, Carnot Diesel, Otto and Rankin cycle; Fossil fuels, time scale of fossil fuels and solar energy as an option,.

UNIT 2 ENERGY CONVERSION MATERIALS 9 Hrs. Single, poly – and amorphous silicon, GaAs, CdS, Cu2S, CuInSe2, CdTe etc. technologies for fabrication of

single and polycrystalline silicon solar cells, amorphous silicon solar cells and tandem cells, solar cell modules, photovoltaic systems, space quality solar cells

UNIT 3 PHOTO VOLTAIC CON VERTORS 9 Hrs. Introduction- Photovoltaic effect-conversion of solar energy into electrical energy- behaviour of solar cells-basic

structure and characteristics of solar cells-single, multi and thin film silicon solar cells-solar cell arrays- PV modules, generators-interfacing PV modules to loads, direct connection of load to PV modules and connection of PV modules to a battery and load together-energy storage alternatives to PV systems..

UNIT 4 THERMOELECTRIC CONVERTERS 9 Hrs. Thermoelectric effects, solid state description of thermoelectric effect, Kelvin’s thermodynamic relations,

analysis of thermoelectric generators, basic assumptions, temperature distribution and thermal energy transfer for generator, co-efficient of performance for thermoelectric cooling,.

UNIT 5 ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES 9 Hrs. Cuprates and MgB2 superconductors and their properties, superconducting wires, Role of superconductor in

Electric generator, Magnetic energy storage devices and power transmission. Energy storage systems, Faradaic and non-Faradaic processes, Types of capacitors and batteries, Comparison of capacitor and battery, Charge-discharge cycles, experimental evaluation using Cyclic voltammetry, and other techniques.

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Richard C. Neville, “Solar energy conversion: The solar cell”, Elsevier Science; 2 edition, 1995 2. Peter Aue, “Advances in Energy systems and technology”, Academic Press, 1978. 3. Frank Kreith and Jang Kreider, “Principles of solar engineering”, CRC Press; 2 edition, 2000. 4. A. E. Dixon & J. D. Leslie, “Solar energy conversion”, Science Direct, 1999. 5. A.Goetzberger, V.U.Hoffmann, “Photovoltaic solar energy generation”, Springer-Verlag, 2005.

6. Castaner, S.Silvestre, “Modelling Photovoltaic systems”, Pspice John Wiley & Sons, 2002. 7. R.J.Komp, Practical Photovoltaics, “Electricity from solar cells”, 3rd edition, Aatec Publ., 2001. 8. R.Messeiger, J.Ventre, “Photovoltaic systems Engg”, 2n d edition, CRC Press, 2004. 9. Stanley W Angrist, “Direct energy conversion” (4th edition) –Allyn and Bacon, Inc., 1982

10. B. E. Conway, “Electrochemical supercapacitors”, Kluwer Academic Press. Springer US, Apr 30, 1999

11. David Linden, “Handbook of Batteries and Fuel Cells”, McGraw-Hill, 1984 12. A.G. Milnes and D. L. Feucht, “Heterojunction and metal – semiconductor junctions“, Academic Press, 1972. 13. B.G. Streetman, “Solid state electronic devices”, 5th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2000.

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks - 80 Marks

(10% problems may be asked)



SPH1602 GEOPHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide a qualitative idea on the fundamentals of seismology and theoretical understanding of various

physical properties of earth.

UNIT 1 SEISMOLOGY 9 Hrs. Introduction-Seismology-P-waves-S waves, their velocities-the location of epicenters-Effect of Boundaries-Major

discontinuities-.Seismic energy sources-Detectors-Interpretation of time and distance curves.-Derivation of properties from the velocities.

UNIT 2 INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF EARTH 9 Hrs. Introduction-Seismic waves-Rayleigh waves and love waves-Study of earth by seismic waves-Earthquake seismology-Horizontal and vertical seismograph-Seismograph equation-Internal structure of earth..

UNIT 3 EARTHQUAKES AND GRAVITY 9 Hrs. Earthquakes: Focus, Magnitude, Frequency–Detection and prediction–Gravity–Absolute and relative measurements of gravity-Worden gravimeter-Application of gravity methods.

UNIT 4 GEOMAGNETISM 9 Hrs. Geomagnetism-Definitions, magnetic field,-Measurements Proton precession magnetometer, Alkali vapour magnetometer–Theory of Earth magnetism-Dynamo theory of earth magnetism-Magnetic surveying-application.

UNIT 5 GEOCHRONOLOGY AND GEOTHERMAL PHYSICS 9 Hrs.

Geochronology-Radioactivity of the earth-Radioactive dating of rocks and minerals-Geological time scale Geothermal Physics: Flow of heat to the surface of earth–Sources of heat within earth--Process of heat transport-Internal temperature of earth..

Max. 45 Hours


1. Cook,A.H., “Physics of the Earth and Planets”, I Ed, McMillan Press, London ,1973

2. William Lourie, “Fundamentals of Geophysics”, II Ed, Cambrige University Press, 1982

3. Garland .G.D., “Introduction to Geophysics”, 11 Ed, WB Saunder Company, London.1979

4. Ramachandra Rao M.B., “Out lines of Geophysical prospecting-A manual for Geologists”, Prasaranga University of Mysore, Mysore, 1975

5. Telford, W.M. Geldart, L. P. Sheriff R.E. and Keys .D.A., “Applied Geophysics:, Oxford–IBH Publishing Co.Pvt.Ltd. New Delhi. 1976

6. Rama Rao.B.S., Murthy I.V.R., “Gravity and magnetic methods of prospecting”, Arnold Heinemann Publishers, New Delhi, 1978



PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks - 80 Marks



SPH1603 SPACE PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE

To provide the Windows to the Universe, Solar System, and Planetary Atmospheres and also to expose the students to the instruments related with space physics.

UNIT 1 ASTRONOMY FUNDAMENTALS, TELESCOPES FOR ASTRONOMY 9 Hrs. Radiation from space, radiation laws, Basic terminology used in astronomy, Introduction to the various types of astronomy: optical, radio, IR, UV, X-ray, γ ray, Gravitational etc. Introduction to Optical, IR, X ray, γ ray



SPH1604 ASTROPHYSICS L T P Credits

Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To provide qualitative description of interesting astronomical aspect and evolution of structures in the Universe.

UNIT 1 GRAVITY 9 Hrs.

Newtonian gravity and basic potential theory, Simple orbits – Kepler’s laws and precession, flat rotation curve of galaxies and implications for dark matter, virial theorem and simple applications, role of gravity in different astrophysical systems,.

UNIT 2 RADIATIVE PROCESSES 9 Hrs. Overview of radiation theory and Larmor formula, Different radiative processes : Thomson and Compton

scattering, Bremsstrahlung, Synchrotron [detailed derivations are not expected] Radiative equilibrium, Planck spectrum and properties; line widths and transition rates in QT of radiation, qualitative description of which radiative processes contribute in which waveband/ astrophysical system, distribution function for photons and its moments, elementary notion of radiation transport through a slab, concept of opacities.

UNIT 3 GAS DYNAMICS 9 Hrs.

Equations of fluid dynamics; equation of state in different regimes [including degenerate systems]; Models for different systems in equilibrium, Application to White dwarfs/Neutron stars, Simple fluid flows including supersonic flow, example of SN explosions and its different phases.

UNIT 4 STELLAR SYSTEM 9 Hrs. Basic equations of stellar structure, Stellar energy sources; qualitative description of numerical solutions for stars of different mass, homologous stellar models, Stellar evolution, Evolution in the HR-Diagram.

UNIT 5 GALACTIC DYNAMICS 9 Hrs. Milky Way Galaxy, Spiral and Elliptical galaxies, Galaxies as self gravitating systems; spiral structure, Supermassive black holes, Active galactic nuclei.

Max. 45 Hours

TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Bradley W. Carroll, D.A.Ostlie, “Modern Astrophysics”, Addison-Weseley, 1996.

2. Frank H. Shu,”The physical universe: An Introduction to Astronomy”, University Science books, 1982. 3. Frank H. Shu, “The Physics of Astrophysics”, Volume I and II, University Science books, 2010.

4. T. Padmanabhan, “Theoretical Astophysics”, Volumes I, II and III, Cambridge University Press; First edition, 2001. 5. Arnab Rai Choudhuri, “The Physics of fluids and plasmas”, Cambridge University Press, 1998. 6. Martin. Harwitt, “Astrophysical concepts”, 3rd edition, Springer Science & Business Media, 1998.

7. James Binney & Michael Merrifield, “Galactic Astronomy”, Princeton University Press, 1998. 8. James Binney & Scott Tremaine, “Galactic dynamics”, 2n d edition, Princeton University Press, 2008.

9. A. K. Kembhavi and J. V. Narlikar, “Quasars and Active Galactic Nuclei”, Cambridge University Press, 1999.

10. Bradley M. Peterson, “An Introduction to Active Galactic Nuclei”, Cambridge University Press, 1997.






SPH1605 ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS L T P Credits Total Marks

3 0 0 3 100

COURSE OBJECTIVE To enable the students understand the laws that govern the structure and properties of the atom, molecules and

the nucleus. Also to provide an introduction to the elementary particles.

UNIT 1 IONS, ELECTRONS AND ATOMIC STRUCTURE 9 Hrs. Detection of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields-Dunnigton's method for e/m-positive ray analysis:

Thomson's parabola method-Bohr's atom model-Sommerfeld's relativistic atom model-the Vector atom model and the quantum numbers-comparison with quantum model. Coupling schemes: L - S coupling and j-j coupling–Pauli’s exclusion principle-Magnetic moment due to (i) orbital motion of the electron (ii) due to spin-Stern and Gerlach experiment

UNIT 2 ATOMIC AND MOLECULAR SPECTRA 9 Hrs. Spin-orbit interaction in atomic spectra-fine structure and sodium doublet-Zeeman effect: experiment-classical

result-Quantum mechanical explanation-anomalous Zeeman effect-Paschen Back effect-Stark effect (qualitative) Origin of a pure rotational spectra of a rigid linear molecule-vibrating diatomic molecule as a quantum harmonic oscillator-pure vibrational spectra-Spectroscopy (Schematic): Ultraviolet-Infrared-absorption-Raman.

UNIT 3 PROPERTIES OF NUCLEI AND RADIOACTIVITY 9 Hrs. Isobars, isotopes, mirror nuclei-Nuclear mass and binding energy-Parity-Nuclear spin–Mass defect and packing

fraction-Stable nuclei–Nuclear size, nuclear magnetic moment-Electric quadrapole moment-Nuclear energy levels. Radioactivity: Range and stopping power of alpha particles.-Geiger-Nuttal law-Feature of alpha decay Tunnelling–Beta ray spectrum-Energetic of beta decay-Detection of neutrino-Gamma ray absorption in matter.

UNIT 4 NUCLEAR MODELS, FISSION AND FUSION 9 Hrs. Neutron: Discovery, Mass, Half life, Magnetic Moment, sources and detection–Shell model, Liquid drop

theory-Nuclear fission–Spontaneous fission and potential barrier-Self sustaining Chain Reaction–Neutron balance in Nuclear Reactor-Uncontrolled chain reaction-Nuclear Fusion–radiation hazards and safety measures-Controlled fusion-Fusion in stars..

UNIT 5 ELEMENTARY PARTICLE PHYSICS 9 Hrs. Discovery of cosmic rays-primary and secondary rays-cosmic ray showers-discovery of positron–the mesons–

origin of cosmic rays-the Big-Bang theory-thermal history of the Universe-Hubble’s law–the future of the universe-dark matter. Particles and anti-particles-antimatter-the fundamental interactions–elementary–particle quantum numbers–conservation laws and symmetry–the Quark model–quantum chromodynamics-the standard model– unification of interactions–Grand unified theories. (Qualitative).

Max. 45 Hours TEXT / REFERENCE BOOKS 1. R.Murugeshan and Kiruthiga Sivaprasath, “Modern Physics” 14thEd, S.Chand and Company Ltd, 2009

2. A.B. Gupta and Dipak Ghosh, “Atomic and Nuclear Physics”, Books and Allied(P)Ltd, Calcutta, 1997

3. Ronald Gautreau and William Savin, “Modern Physics, Schaum’s outline series, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill P.Ltd, 2004 4. K.Gopla Krishnan, Atomic and Nuclear Physics”, 3rd Ed. ,MacMillan India Ltd. 1994

5. H.S.Mani and Mehta ( G.K) , “Introduction to Modern Physics”, Affiliated EWast-West Press, 1989

6. R.P.Feynmann, R.B. Leighton and M.Sands , “The Feynmann Lectures on Physics”, Vol III, 7 th Indian reprint, Narosa Pub. Ltd, 1992

END SEMESTER EXAM QUESTION PAPER PATTERN Max. Marks : 100 Exam Duration : 3 Hrs. PART A : 10 Questions of 2 marks each – No choice 20 Marks PART B : 2 Questions from each unit of internal choice, each carrying 16 marks 80 Marks

programme : b.e. - sathyabama university · 2018-05-17 · sathyabama institute of science and...

Documents